JP7738367B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (also known as "pachinko gaming machines" or "pachinko machines").

In a typical pachinko machine, when a game ball is fired into the play area and enters the starting hole, a random number value for the lottery is obtained, and the obtained random number value is temporarily stored as an activation reserve ball up to a predetermined maximum number. The activation reserve balls are consumed sequentially each time a predetermined activation condition is met, and a win/loss determination is made to see if they correspond to a win or loss. Based on the result of the win/loss determination, a special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and a decorative pattern is displayed in the performance display device in a variable manner, so that the result of the win/loss determination is presented in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

In addition, until the result of the win/loss determination is shown, the effect display device not only displays a changing display using decorative symbols, but also executes various display effects to heighten the player's sense of anticipation. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses an effect (dialogue preview) in which the likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on the content of the dialogue displayed on the effect display device.

JP 2013-141587 A

However, effects that display images, text, etc. on an effect display device have a significant impact on player interest, so there is a demand for more diverse effects that can increase player interest, beyond just the dialogue previews disclosed in Patent Document 1.

In view of the above-mentioned issues, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can execute new effects that can increase the interest of players.

In order to solve such a problem, in the present invention, a game machine judges whether or not a win/loss is based on information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, performs a variable display of a special symbol based on the result of the judgment, and when a specific display result is displayed as a result of the variable display, a special game advantageous to the player is performed, and the game machine is equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, a performance control means for controlling the execution of a performance according to the progress of the game by the main control means, and a display device capable of displaying a performance, and when a first condition is satisfied that the difference between the number of game values to be awarded and the number of game values to be used reaches a predetermined number, , configured to be able to enter a suppression state in which the progress of the game is suppressed, and configured to be able to execute advance notification regarding the suppression state when a second condition is satisfied in which the difference between the number of game values awarded and the number of game values used reaches a specific number different from a predetermined number, and is able to execute a development effect that develops after a reach state is established by a decorative pattern, and is able to execute a character effect that displays characters on a display device, and as the character effect, has a suppression-related character effect that displays characters when the first condition is satisfied, and an error character effect that displays characters related to the error when an error occurs, and the suppression-related character effect is The game has a first inhibition-related character effect and a second inhibition-related character effect, and when a first condition is satisfied while a special game is being played, the first inhibition-related character effect can be executed, and when the first condition is satisfied while a special game is not being played, the game can move to a second situation where a second inhibition-related character effect is being executed in a first situation where the first inhibition-related character effect is being executed, but the game does not move from the second situation to the first situation, and the error character effect includes a first error character effect that displays the occurrence of a first type of error in characters when the first type of error occurs, and a second inhibition-related character effect that displays the occurrence of a first type of error in characters when the first type of error occurs. and a second error character effect that displays the occurrence of a second type of error in text when the second type of error other than the first type of error occurs, and during execution of a special game, an accumulated value correspondence display that displays the accumulated value of the number of game values assigned to a specified game section can be executed in one or more ways, the first error character effect can be executed simultaneously with at least any of the accumulated value correspondence displays and can be displayed superimposed on at least any of the accumulated value correspondence displays with a higher priority than the accumulated value correspondence displays, and the second error character effect is not executed simultaneously with any of the accumulated value correspondence displays.

This invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute new effects that can increase the interest of players.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the rear. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine from the front, with the glass frame open from the front frame and the front frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame, seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame, seen from the rear. FIG. This is an oblique view of the game board from the front right. FIG. This is an oblique view of the back of the game board from the rear left. This is an oblique view of the back of the game board from the rear right. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine (part 1). This is a rear view of a pachinko machine (part 2). This is a rear view of a pachinko machine (part 3). FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state shown in FIG. 17. FIG. 2 is a control block diagram showing an example of the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an example of the functions of the main control board shown in FIG. 19 . A block diagram showing an example of the function of the performance control board shown in Figure 19. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol winning/losing lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol winning symbol table. A figure showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for winning. A figure showing an example of a special pattern change pattern table for losses. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process on the main control side. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing on the main control side following Figure 27. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing on the main control side following Figure 28. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing that follows Figure 32. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port monitoring control process. This is a flowchart showing an example of the start port monitoring control processing following Figure 34. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variation start monitoring control process. A flowchart showing an example of the special pattern variation start monitoring process shown in Figure 36. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern variation start monitoring process following Figure 37. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control general-purpose processing shown in FIG. 39. A flowchart showing an example of the special pattern variation start processing shown in Figure 40. A flowchart showing an example of processing during special pattern fluctuation shown in Figure 40. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during the display of the special symbol stop symbol shown in FIG. 40. This is a flowchart continuing from Figure 43, showing an example of processing during display of special pattern stop patterns. This is a flowchart continuing from Figure 44, showing an example of processing during display of special pattern stop patterns. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special electric device control process. This is a flowchart showing an example of special electric device control processing following Figure 46. This is a flowchart showing an example of special electric device control processing following Figure 47. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a reset start process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process on the performance control side. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 50. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the presentation state transition process shown in FIG. 51. A flowchart showing an example of the variable performance content determination process shown in Figure 51. A flowchart showing an example of the jackpot presentation content determination process shown in Figure 51. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining the content of the jackpot presentation, following Figure 54. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an image control command transmission interrupt process. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display of decorative patterns, etc. on a performance display device. FIG. A figure showing an example of the relationship between characters that may appear in the presentation and the expected suggestion level. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition before the start of a demo performance. A figure showing screen transitions in the first example of the demo presentation. A figure showing screen transitions in the second example of the demo presentation. A figure showing screen transitions in the first example of dialogue presentation. A figure showing screen transitions in a second example of dialogue presentation. A figure showing screen transitions in a third example of dialogue presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display of a manufacturer pattern. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating first to third patterns of dialogue development. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the fourth and fifth patterns of dialogue development. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of screen transitions for caption effects. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of a screen transition in which dialogue presentations and caption presentations are displayed. A figure showing an example of screen transition in an effect that combines a telop effect and an SP reach effect. A figure showing an example of screen transition in a presentation that combines dialogue presentation and pseudo-stop pattern presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting an error output according to the type of error. A figure showing an example of a screen transition in which a pre-reading effect and a text effect are combined. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a counting method of an MY counter. A figure showing an example (part 1) of the advance notification display. A figure showing an example of the advance notification display (part 2). A figure showing an example of the display of a suppression notification effect.

Below, a pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Structure of a Pachinko Machine>
Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 and subsequent figures show the pachinko machine 1 shown in Fig. 1 as viewed from other directions and disassembled. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front with the glass frame opened from the front frame and the front frame opened from the outer frame. Fig. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, disassembled into the glass frame, game board, front frame, and outer frame. Fig. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear, disassembled into the glass frame, game board, front frame, and outer frame.

The pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall; a glass frame (door frame) 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2; a front frame 4 that supports the glass frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed; and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the front frame 4 from the front, is visible through the glass frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which game balls are shot.

The outer frame 2 is rectangular, combining frames 2a and 2b that extend vertically and horizontally, and frames 2c and 2d that extend vertically and horizontally. It is equipped with hinge members 2e and 2f on the top and bottom of the left edge from the front, and the hinge members support the front frame 4 and glass frame 3 so that they can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached freely.

A glass frame 3 is attached to the front side of the front frame 4 via hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b on the left edge as viewed from the front, allowing it to be opened and closed sideways and detached. The glass frame 3 is held closed by a glass plate covering its front using a locking device 3c. A game board 5 is detachably attached to the front side of the front frame 4 in the upper half of the front frame 4, located behind the glass frame 3, and the game area 5a in front of the game board 5 can be seen through the double-pane glass of the glass frame 3, which is held closed as described above.

The glass frame 3 comprises a base unit 3e with a rectangular through-hole 3d penetrating from front to back, a tray unit 3f for storing game balls below the front of the base unit 3e, and an area 3g for accommodating a handle 4a that can be operated by a player to shoot the game balls stored in the tray unit 3f into the game area of the game board 5. The front side of the glass frame 3 is provided with a frame lamp (LED lamp) 3h that emits light depending on the progress of the game, and a speaker 3i that outputs sound depending on the progress of the game. A performance button 3j that can be pressed by a player is provided in the center of the front of the tray unit 3f. The base of the performance button 3j has a lever structure that can be tilted toward the player (toward the player) to a predetermined angle, and functions as a second performance button 3k that can be pulled in by the player. The second effect button 3k may be designed to always allow for the pull-in operation, but considering the operability of the effect button 3j, it is preferable that it is normally fixed to the OFF side by a locking mechanism or the like, and that the lock is released when a specific effect is performed, allowing for the pull-in operation (ON operation).

The front frame 4 is insertable into the outer frame 2 and includes a frame body 4b that supports the outer periphery of the game board 5; hinges 4c and 4d that are rotatably attached to the top and bottom of the left side of the frame body 4b when viewed from the front, and to the hinges of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3; a ball launcher 4e that is attached to the lower front of the frame body 4b and that shoots game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5; a locking unit 4f that is attached to the right side of the frame body 4b when viewed from the front and that locks the gap between the outer frame 2 and the front frame 4 and the glass frame 3; a circuit board unit 4g that is attached to the lower rear of the frame body 4b; and a back cover 4h that is attached to the rear of the frame body 4b and covers the rear of the game board 5 attached to the frame body 4b. The circuit board unit 4g houses a speaker unit, a power supply board, an interface control board, and a payout control board that controls the payout of game balls.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the game ball launcher 4a, game balls are shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength corresponding to the angle of the rotation. When a game ball shot into the game area 5a is received by a prize slot (ball entry slot), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the prize slot into which the ball was received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 8 to 14. Figure 8 is a front view of the game board, Figure 9 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, Figure 10 is a rear view of the game board, Figure 11 is a perspective view of the rear of the game board seen from the rear left, Figure 12 is a perspective view of the rear of the game board seen from the rear right, Figure 13 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and seen from the rear.

The gaming board 5 has a playing area 5a into which gaming balls are shot. The gaming board 5 is composed of a front unit 100m, a back unit 200m, an LCD base 300m, and an LCD display device (performance display device) 70. The front unit 100m comprises a front member 100a that defines the outer periphery of the playing area 5a and has a roughly rectangular outline when viewed from the front, and a plate-shaped playing panel 100b that is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a and defines the rear end of the playing area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined arrangement on the front side of the playing panel 100b within the playing area 5a.

The front member 100a is equipped with a functional display unit 100c in the bottom right corner that allows the player to see the game status based on control signals from the main control unit 5b (main control board 100 that controls the overall game). The LCD display device 70 is positioned in the center of the game area 5a and displays a specified presentation image. A peripheral control unit 5c (presentation control board 200 that controls the overall presentation) is attached to the back of the LCD display device 70. The LCD base 300m is open on the side facing the rear unit 200m to accommodate the rear unit 200m, and the LCD display device 70 is attached to the back of the LCD base 300m.

The game panel 100b has an outer peripheral shape that is almost the same as that of the front member 100a, and is made of a transparent, flat panel board.It is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a and further has a holder on the rear surface to which the back unit 200m can be attached. The front member 100a is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 66 that are always open so that they can accept game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 61 that is always open so that it can accept game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the general winning openings, a gate 63 (integrally formed in the attacca unit 500 described below) that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second starting opening 62 (integrally formed in the attacca unit 500 described below) that can accept game balls depending on the result of a normal pattern lottery that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate, and a large winning opening 64 (integrally formed in the attacca unit 500 described below) that can accept game balls depending on either the result of a first special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is accepted into the first starting opening 61 or the result of a second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is accepted into the second starting opening. Note that the gate 63, second starting gate 62, and large prize gate 64 are located within the attacker unit 500 and are therefore not shown here.

The second starting opening is equipped with a normal electric device composed of a movable piece and a normal electric device solenoid for opening and closing the normal electric device. Depending on the current state of the normal electric device solenoid, the normal electric device can alternate between a closed state, which makes it difficult for game balls to enter the second starting opening, and an open state, which makes it easier for game balls to enter than the closed state. The second starting opening is configured so that game balls are difficult to enter unless the normal electric device is in the open state, but are easy to enter when the normal electric device is in the open state. The front member 100a is equipped with a first outlet 29 directly below the first starting opening 61 in the left-right center. The attacca unit 500 is located at the bottom right of the front member 100a. The attacca unit 500 is primarily equipped with a movable piece serving as the special electric device 642 that opens and closes the large prize opening 64, and is an integrated unit of multiple parts.

The rear unit 200m has an opening 200a for viewing the LCD display screen at the rear. The rear unit 200m is equipped with sensors that detect game balls received in the general winning opening 66, first starting opening 61, etc., a locking mechanism for detachably attaching the LCD base 300m, and a passage for discharging game balls.

The front member 100a has a roughly square exterior when viewed from the front, and a roughly circular interior that penetrates in the front-to-back direction, with the inner periphery of the interior defining the outer periphery of the play area 5a. This front member 100a is equipped with an outer rail 100f that extends in an arc from the lower end toward the left of the center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, passing the upper center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right; an inner rail 100d that is positioned inside the front member 100a roughly along the outer rail 100f and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left-to-right direction in a front view to the upper left diagonal direction in a front view; and an out guideway 100e that is formed at the lowest point of the play area 5a to the right of the lower end of the inner rail 100d in a front view, sloping downward toward the rear.

The gaming panel 100b has a center ornament 22 that protrudes toward the front member 100a around an opening that has the same shape as the opening in the front member 100a. When the gaming panel 100b is fixed to the front member 100a, the center ornament 22 fits into the opening to match the shape of the opening in the front member 100a, decorating the area around the opening 100h of the front unit 100m. The player can see the presentation screen and the behavior of the presentation device through the opening 100h. The center ornament 22 is a type of decorative element and performs a decorative function at the center of the gaming board 5, supporting the screen of the presentation display device 70, etc. The center ornament 22 may be provided with a movable role (movable presentation device) that performs presentation operations according to the progress of the game. The movable role is operated by a drive source such as a stepping motor or solenoid. The center ornament 22 may also be provided with a lamp that lights up according to the progress of the game.

The main control unit 5b (see Figure 7) is attached to the rear of the LCD display device 70, below the peripheral control unit 5c. The main control unit 5b includes a main control board 100 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board case 100n that houses the main control board 100 (see Figure 16). The main control unit 5b controls the game content and the prize balls, etc.

The function display unit 100c comprises a status indicator consisting of one LED that displays the game status; a normal pattern display that displays a variable normal pattern by controlling the blinking of two LEDs based on the result of a normal pattern lottery drawn when a gaming ball passes through gate 63, and then displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to the result of the normal pattern lottery; a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of hold indicators, which is the number of variable normal pattern indicators related to the passage of a gaming ball through gate 63 for which the conditions for starting the variable display have not yet been met; a first special pattern display that displays a variable first special pattern by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of a first special lottery drawn when a gaming ball is received through first start port 61 (occurrence of a start winning), and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to the result of the first special lottery; The device is equipped with a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number, which is the number of variable displays of the first special pattern related to acceptance for which the conditions for starting the variable display have not yet been met, a second special pattern display that controls the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of a second special lottery drawn upon acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting port (occurrence of a start winning), thereby displaying the second special pattern variable, and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery, a second special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number, which is the number of variable displays of the second special pattern related to acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting port for which the conditions for starting the variable display have not yet been met, and a round display consisting of four LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" or the like. The functional display unit 100c can display the reserved number, patterns, etc. by appropriately turning the LEDs on, off, blinking, etc.

The peripheral control unit 5c is attached to the rear of the LCD display device 70 and includes a presentation control board 200 that controls the presentations (lighting presentations, sound presentations, moving presentations, etc.) presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 100, and an image control board 300 that controls image display and sound output according to the development of the game (see Figure 19). The LCD display device 70 is located in the center of the play area 5a and is detachably attached to the rear surface approximately in the center of the LCD base 300m that houses the rear unit 200m. When the game board 5 is assembled, the LCD display device 70 can be seen from the front through the frame of the frame-shaped center ornament 22. The LCD display device 70 is a full-color display device backlit by white LEDs and displays still images and videos. In this embodiment, the performance control board 200 and image control board 300 are configured as two separate boards, but the functional configuration of the CPU on each board is not limited to that described above and can be changed as appropriate (for example, sound control can be performed by the CPU on the performance control board), or all performances can be controlled by the CPU on a single board.

The LCD display device 70 primarily displays effect images, including decorative patterns and preview effects that change and stop in conjunction with the first or second special pattern, and also displays the first and second special patterns on hold. Specifically, the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided with a decorative pattern display section that displays decorative pattern changes and preview effects, a first special pattern reserve display section that displays the first special pattern on hold in synchronization with the first special pattern reserve lamp, and a second special pattern reserve display section that displays the second special pattern on hold in synchronization with the second special pattern reserve lamp.

The decorative symbol display section of the LCD screen has three display areas (left display area, middle display area, right display area) on a specified active line that serve as variable display areas for decorative symbols, with the left decorative symbol corresponding to the left display area, the middle decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display area, and the right decorative symbol corresponding to the right display area being displayed in a static state. In the normal display mode, the special symbol reserve display section displays a reserved image with a white circle when a special symbol activation reserved ball is generated, but when the activation reserved ball is consumed, the corresponding reserved image disappears. These reserved images are displayed in a predetermined order, such as the type of special symbol activation reserved ball and the order of occurrence (ball entry order), and up to four can be displayed on each special symbol reserve display section.

<Change settings>
The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be equipped with a setting change function that changes the degree of advantage for the player using multiple setting values. Here, the setting value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player and is managed by the main control board 100 (see FIG. 19 ). In this example, six setting values are provided, in order of decreasing advantage: "Setting 1,""Setting2," ..., "Setting 5," and "Setting 6." To vary the degree of advantage for the player depending on each setting value, for example, different odds of winning the special symbol lottery may be set for each setting value. The main control board 100 controls the progress of the game based on the setting value, and when the setting value is changed by a setting change operation (described later), the main control board 100 controls the progress of the game based on the changed setting value.

The following section will explain in detail the features of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment when it is equipped with a setting change function. In the following explanation, changing/setting a setting value will be referred to as a "setting change," and a series of operations related to a setting change will be referred to as a "setting change operation."

When performing a setting change operation on pachinko machine 1, first an operation is performed to transition the internal state controlled by main control board 100 (main control CPU 101) to a "setting change state" in which the setting value can be changed. Then, while controlled in the setting change state, an operation is performed to select and set the desired setting value (a known operating method for conventional gaming machines can be used, and a detailed explanation will be omitted), thereby changing the setting value.

The operations required to transition to the above setting change state consist of the first step (open frame) of opening the front frame 4, the second step (turn on setting key switch), the third step (turn on RAM clear switch) of performing an initialization operation on the initialization switch, and the fourth step (turn on power switch) of performing a power-on operation on the power switch. However, steps three and four must be performed in parallel.

These first to fourth steps will be explained in detail below, with reference to the characteristic structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

In the first step (frame opening), a door key is used to open the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Door keys are also called common keys, and are generally not unique to each gaming machine manufacturer or model, but are keys that can be shared with other gaming machine models to facilitate operation within gaming parlors.

To explain the frame opening procedure in more detail, for example, the front frame 4 can be released from the outer frame 2 by inserting a door key into the keyhole (not shown) of the locking device that keeps the front frame 4 closed relative to the outer frame 2 and turning it in a predetermined direction while pulling the front frame 4 toward you. Note that the keyhole into which the door key is inserted to release the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 may also be configured to share the keyhole of the locking device 3c that keeps the glass frame 3 closed relative to the front frame 4.

In pachinko machine 1, a door-opening sensor 2p is provided on the curtain panel of outer frame 2 to detect the open/closed state of front frame 4 relative to outer frame 2. Furthermore, a door-opening detection member 4p is provided on front frame 4 at a position corresponding to the door-opening sensor 2p. For example, when front frame 4 is closed relative to outer frame 2, door-opening detection member 4p engages with door-opening sensor 2p, causing door-opening sensor 2p to detect the closed state of front frame 4 (door closed). On the other hand, when front frame 4 is open relative to outer frame 2, door-opening detection member 4p separates from door-opening sensor 2p, causing door-opening sensor 2p to detect the open state of front frame 4 (door open). Detection information from door-opening sensor 2p is output to a specified circuit board or the like and is processed as an error, if necessary. Note that the above structure is merely one example of a mechanism for detecting the open/closed state of front frame 4 relative to outer frame 2, and other known mechanisms may also be used.

Figure 15 is a rear view (part 1) of a pachinko machine. Figure 15 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 before the frame is opened, but if the outer frame 2 is removed from Figure 15, it corresponds to a rear view of the front frame 4 when it is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (frame opened). According to Figure 15, on the rear side of the front frame 4, the back cover 4h covering the rear side of the game board 5 is in a closed state. The back cover 4h is a covering member that normally covers the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and the peripheral control unit 5c (performance control board 200). Therefore, even if the first procedure of opening the front frame 4 is performed, these covered units cannot be touched as long as the back cover 4h is in a closed state.

Note that Figure 15 also shows a RAM clear switch cover 400p that is provided on the dispensing control board 400 (dispensing control unit) and covers the RAM clear switch 400q, and a power switch cover 600p that is provided on the power supply board 600 (power supply unit) and covers the power switch 600q; details of these will be provided later.

Next, in the second step (setting key switch on), the setting key switch 100q is turned on using the setting key. Unlike the door key described above, the setting key is unique to each gaming machine manufacturer (or model) for security reasons, preventing fraudulent "settings," which have a significant impact on gaming machine performance. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting key switch 100q is provided on the main control unit 5b (e.g., the main control board 100). As described above with reference to Figure 15, simply releasing the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 in the first step does not allow the setting key to be inserted into the setting key switch 100q because the main control unit 5b is covered by the back cover 4h. Therefore, when performing the second step, the back cover 4h must be opened.

Figure 16 is a rear view (part 2) of the pachinko machine. Figure 16 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 with the rear cover 4h removed from Figure 15. Removing the outer frame 2 from Figure 16 corresponds to a rear view of the front frame 4 when the second procedure is being executed (i.e., when the front frame 4 is open and the rear cover 4h is open). Figure 16 shows that the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and peripheral control unit 5c (performance control board 200), which were covered by the rear cover 4h, are exposed. However, the setting key switch 100q has not yet appeared in a visible position.

In this embodiment, the back of the main control unit 5b is covered by a main control board case 100n, and the portion where the setting key switch 100q is provided is normally covered by an openable harness cover 100p. In other words, the setting key switch 100q is normally doubly covered by the rear cover 4h and the harness cover 100p. When performing the second procedure, it is necessary to open the rear cover 4h and then the harness cover 100p. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the rear cover 4h is designed to open and close in the left-right direction, while the harness cover 100p is designed to open and close in the up-down direction. By making the opening and closing directions of the two covers different in this way, it becomes difficult to operate the setting key switch 100q through a gap when the front frame 4 is slightly opened, thereby improving security.

Figure 17 is a rear view (part 3) of the pachinko machine. Figure 17 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 with the harness cover 100p opened from the state shown in Figure 16. Figure 18 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state shown in Figure 17. As shown in Figures 17 and 18, by opening the harness cover 100p to the rear side of the front frame 4, the setting key switch 100q located behind it is exposed and can be operated.

At this time, the person performing the setting change operation (e.g., the hall manager) can perform the second procedure of turning the setting key switch 100q on by leaving the harness cover 100p open and inserting the corresponding setting key into the setting key switch 100q from the back side of the front frame 4 and turning it in the specified direction.

Figures 17 and 18 also show the RAM clear switch cover 400p on the dispensing control unit and the power switch cover 600p on the power supply unit when open.

The RAM clear switch cover 400p is a cover that swings open and closed in the vertical direction. For example, the RAM clear switch cover 400p has a locking mechanism when closed, and can be unlocked by first moving the RAM clear switch cover 400p downward, after which it can be opened toward the front. When the RAM clear switch cover 400p is opened, the RAM clear switch 400q is exposed and can be operated.

The RAM clear switch 400q corresponds to the initialization switch operated in the third procedure, and outputs a signal to initialize (clear the RAM) the control information stored in the main control RAM 103 when a specified initialization operation is performed (for example, pressing the RAM clear switch 400q to turn it ON within a specified period after power-on). Note that the initialization operation for clearing the RAM is not limited to operating the RAM clear switch 400q alone; for example, turning on the power switch 600q while pressing the RAM clear switch 400q may also be used as an initialization operation for clearing the RAM. Furthermore, the range of information initialized when a RAM clear is performed is not limited to the control information stored in the main control RAM 103.

Therefore, after performing the second procedure, the operator performing the setting change operation can perform the third procedure (RAM clear switch ON) by opening the RAM clear switch cover 400p and performing an initialization operation (e.g., an ON operation) on the RAM clear switch 400q from the back side of the front frame 4.

Furthermore, like the RAM clear switch cover 400p described above, the power switch cover 600p is a cover that swings up and down to open and close. The power switch cover 600p may also have a locking mechanism. When the power switch cover 600p is opened, the power switch 600q is exposed and can be operated.

The power switch 600q is a power switch that changes the power supply state in the gaming machine 1 (at least the main control board 100), and outputs a signal to switch the power on/off state when a power operation is performed.

Therefore, after performing step 2, the operator performing the setting change operation can perform step 4 (power switch on) by performing the specified power operation (power on operation) on the power switch 600q from the back side of the front frame 4 with the power switch cover 600p open. As mentioned above, steps 3 and 4 must be performed simultaneously (in parallel). Then, by performing steps 1 through 4, the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the setting change state, making it possible to select and set setting values.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the first to fourth steps for transitioning to the setting change state described above, if the first step (opening the slot) and the second step (turning on the setting key switch) are omitted and executed, an initialization operation will be performed, and if the third step (turning on the RAM clear switch) is omitted and executed, the machine will transition to a setting confirmation state in which the current game settings (setting values) are confirmed.

As described above, when changing settings on a pachinko machine 1, steps 2 to 4 must be performed from the back side of the front frame 4, with the front frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 using step 1. This prevents fraudulent behavior such as attempting to change settings while the front door (front frame 4) of the gaming machine is closed.

<Control configuration of gaming machine>
FIG. 19 is a control block diagram showing an example of the control configuration of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Main control board>
As shown in Figure 19, the main control board 100 comprises a main control CPU 101, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, an I/O port circuit 104, etc. The main control CPU 101 controls the operation of the main control program and executes various calculation processes related to the game. The main control ROM 102 stores the main control program and various data in a non-volatile manner. The main control RAM 103 functions as a work area and buffer memory used as a temporary storage area. The I/O port circuit 104 inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices such as the performance control board 200 and payout control board 400 under the control of the main control CPU 101.

The main control CPU 101 reads the main control program from the main control ROM 102 and executes each command on the main control RAM 103, thereby controlling game operations in accordance with each command in the main control program.

In addition, the main control board 100 is equipped with a clock circuit, a WDT circuit, a CTC circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc., although not shown.

The clock circuit divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock. The WDT circuit resets the main control CPU 101 to return it to normal operation if it malfunctions or goes out of control. The CTC circuit generates real-time interrupts and measures time. The random number generation circuit operates as a separate system from the program processing (software random numbers) performed by the main control CPU 101, and generates predetermined random numbers (internal random numbers). These are electrically connected to each other via an internal bus (not shown).

The main control CPU 101 reads the main control program stored in the main control ROM 102 and executes calculations based on detection information from each switch 161, etc., thereby performing various processes related to the main control of the game.

Furthermore, the main control CPU 101 has a presentation command output port for outputting presentation control commands to the presentation control board 200 to execute presentation operations associated with the main control of the game, as well as a payout command output port for outputting payout commands to execute the payout operation of game balls, and a strobe signal output port used to output strobe signals to determine the timing for receiving each of these transmitted commands on the target board. The main control CPU 101 also has various other output ports, and the strobe signal output port 101B actually exists as a port that outputs multiple data items combined with other output data.

The main control RAM 103 is a volatile memory device in which at least a portion of its area is backed up by the backup power generated by the power supply board 600. In the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "power outage"), the backup area of the main control RAM 103 is an area that retains the stack pointer, register data, and other data held at the time of the power outage. When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state it was in before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

The main control board 100 is electrically connected to various switches, such as a setting key switch 100q for changing setting values, a first start port switch 161 provided in the first start port 61, a second start port switch 162 provided in the second start port 62, an operating gate switch 163 provided in the gate 63, a special prize port switch 164 provided in the special prize port 64, and a general prize port switch 166 provided in the general prize port 66. In the main control board 100, detection signals from these various switches are input to the main control CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to various display means such as the first special symbol display device 171, the second special symbol display device 172, the first special symbol hold lamp 173, the second special symbol hold lamp 174, the normal symbol display device 175, and the normal symbol hold lamp 176. This main control board 100 is electrically connected to various solenoids such as the normal electric role solenoid 123 that operates the normal electric role 622, and the special electric role solenoid 124 that operates the special electric role 642, and transmits control signals from the main control CPU 101 to these various display means and various solenoids via the I/O port circuit 104.

The main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are connected, for example, by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe signal line, allowing communication in only one direction, from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200. In other words, while it is permitted to send various performance control commands from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, it is not permitted to send commands or data from the performance control board 200 to the main control board 100.

The I/O port circuit 104 is located on the main control board 100 between the main control CPU 101 and the performance control board connector 109. The main control CPU 101 and the performance control board connector 109 are connected by a data bus 111 consisting of eight data lines, as well as a strobe signal bus 112 consisting of strobe signal lines. Command data sent from the I/O port circuit 104 is received by the performance control board 200 via the performance control board connector 109 under the control of the main control CPU 101, as described below.

<Performance control board>
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 19, the presentation control board 200 is equipped with a presentation control CPU 201 that executes various arithmetic processing related to game presentations based on presentation control commands from the main control board 100, a presentation control ROM 202 that stores presentation control programs and various data, a presentation control RAM 203 that functions as a work area and buffer memory as a temporary working area, and an I/O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards such as the main control board 100 and image control board 300 and each device.

The presentation control CPU 201 reads the presentation control program stored in the presentation control ROM 202 and executes it on the presentation control RAM 203, thereby controlling presentation operations as the game progresses in accordance with this presentation control program. In addition, although not shown, the presentation control board 200 is equipped with a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, a WDT circuit that resets the presentation control CPU 201 to return it to normal if it malfunctions or goes out of control, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that generates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on register settings and signals from the CTC circuit, a serial communications circuit for inputting and outputting serial data, and a real-time clock circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC circuit") with a timing function, all of which are connected to each other via an internal bus.

In performance control processing in response to performance control commands from the main control board 100, the performance control board 200 generates image control commands that instruct the image control board 300 to output images and sounds, as well as lamp control signals (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 and drive control signals (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92. The performance control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 to enable two-way communication. Image control commands related to images and sounds are sent from the performance control board 200 to the image control board 300, and in response, the image control board 300 sends a response command (so-called ACK command) to the performance control board 200 indicating that the image control command was successfully received.

The performance control board 200 is connected to a speaker 11 that outputs sound, and the performance control CPU 201 controls the output of sound data generated by the image control board 300 to the speaker 11.

The performance control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 equipped with multiple LED drivers, and transmits lamp control signals (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. In this embodiment, the performance control board 200 and lamp connection board 91 use clock-synchronized serial communication, and the lamp control signals are transmitted one bit at a time via a signal line (clock line) separate from the data line used to transmit lamp data, in synchronization with a clock signal transmitted via that data line.

The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions in response to a lamp control signal for driving the LEDs sent from the performance control board 200. The lamp connection board 91 switches on/off the switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal, thereby supplying or cutting off the drive current to the performance lamps 10, 25, thereby controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the performance lamps 10, 25.

Furthermore, the performance control board 200 is electrically connected to multiple motor drivers 92, and outputs drive control signals (drive data) for driving the reels to the motor drivers 92 via the I/O port circuit 204. The motor drivers 92 supply or cut off drive current to the stepping motors of each movable reel by switching switches within the circuit on or off based on the drive control signals for driving the reels sent from the performance control board 200, thereby operating each movable reel. Note that a parallel communication method is used to send data to the motor drivers 92. Note that, not limited to this embodiment, if the reel has a drive source other than a stepping motor as its drive source, control signals and control data are sent to the driver IC corresponding to the drive source instead of the motor driver 92.

The image control board 300 comprises an image control CPU 301, ROM 304, RAM 305, and an I/O port circuit 306. The image control CPU 301 executes various calculations related to image presentation based on image control commands from the presentation control board 200. The ROM 304 stores image control programs and various data. The RAM 305 functions as a work area and buffer memory that temporarily serves as a storage area (temporary area). The I/O port circuit 306 inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices.

The image control CPU 301 reads the image control program from ROM 304, loads it into RAM 305, and executes it to control the image display operations related to the performance in accordance with this image control program. Note that this ROM 304 corresponds to the ROM on the performance control ROM board.

The image control board 300 is further equipped with a VDP 302 that generates image data in accordance with the performance content based on control signals received from the image control CPU 301, and a sound source IC 303 that generates sound data in accordance with the performance content based on control signals received from the image control CPU 301. The VDP 302 is a so-called graphics processor that reads image data stored in an image ROM (not shown) in response to instructions from the image control CPU 301, processes the image data, and outputs the generated video signal to the performance display device 70. A high-speed VRAM (not shown) is connected to the VDP 302 and is used to expand and process the image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC 303 reads sound data stored in an audio ROM (not shown) in response to instructions from the image control CPU 301, and synthesizes and processes it to generate sound data. The generated sound data is output via the performance control board 200 to the speaker 11 via an amplifier.

<Dispensing control board>
The payout control board 400 comprises a payout control CPU 401, a payout control ROM 402, and a payout control RAM 403. The payout control board 400 drives the prize ball payout unit 34 based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 to control the payout operation of the game balls (prize ball operation), and also drives the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 in synchronization with the amount of operation of the launching handle 12 to control the launching operation of the game balls.

<Power supply board>
The power supply board 600 is equipped with a normal power supply circuit, a backup power supply circuit, and a power interruption monitoring circuit. The normal power supply circuit generates normal power used by each control board based on the primary power supplied from the power supply equipment of the gaming machine island. The backup power supply circuit generates backup power. The power interruption monitoring circuit has the function of monitoring power interruptions due to voltage drops.

The power supply board 600 generates and supplies the power supply voltage required for electronic and electrical components such as each control board and gaming equipment. A power switch 600q for activating the power supply circuit is connected to the power supply board 600. When the power switch 600q is turned on while primary power is being supplied from the power supply device of the gaming machine island, a specified power is supplied to each control board, etc. from the normal power supply circuit of the power supply board 600.

The power supply board 600 has the function of detecting when the power supply from the gaming machine island's power supply is interrupted (hereinafter also referred to as "power interruption"). When a power interruption is detected, it sends a power interruption signal (NMI signal) to the main control board 100, the presentation control board 200, and the payout control board 400 to notify them. The backup power circuit is configured to charge while power is being supplied to the gaming machine from the gaming machine island's power supply. A RAM clear switch 400q and a door open sensor 2q are connected to the power supply board 600. The RAM clear switch 400q is a switch that temporarily erases the contents of the main control RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and sets the initial value when the gaming machine is powered on. The door open sensor 2q is a sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. The RAM clear switch 400q and the door open sensor 2q may be connected to other boards, such as the main control board 100, instead of the power supply board 600.

<Example of basic gaming machine operation>
In the gaming machine configured as described above, play begins with gaming balls stored in the upper ball tray 8. First, when the launch handle 12 is rotated, the gaming balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are sent one by one to the launch mechanism 14 by the ball feed mechanism 13 provided on the back side of the glass frame 3, and are launched into the playing area 20A by the launch mechanism 14 with a launch strength according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 12.

When a game ball rolling down the game area 20A enters any of the general prize openings 66, first start opening 61, second start opening 62, and large prize opening 64, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. In the main control board 100, the main control CPU 101 sends a payout control command to the payout control board 400 instructing the prize ball operation according to the type of prize opening. The payout control board 400 then controls the payout control command, causing the game balls in the storage tank 31 to be paid out by the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball tray 8 or the lower ball tray 9.

On the other hand, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 61 or the second starting hole 62, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. In the main control board 100, the main control CPU 101 obtains the lottery random number value for the special pattern when it detects a ball entering the first starting hole 61 or the second starting hole 62, and temporarily stores this random number value as reserved balls for the special pattern up to a predetermined upper limit. When a predetermined variation start condition is met, the main control CPU 101 then performs a special pattern hit/miss and pattern determination on the lottery random number value for the earliest reserved ball, as well as a variation pattern determination to select a variation pattern, and displays the special pattern using the first special pattern display device 171 or the second special pattern display device 172 in a manner corresponding to the result of this determination. In addition, the main control CPU 101 sends a performance control command to the performance control board 200, causing the image control board 300 to display the decorative pattern variation and the variable performance on the performance display device 70. The variable display of the special and decorative symbols is synchronously stopped and displayed after the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern has elapsed. Here, when a ball enters the first start port 61 or the second start port 62 and various random number values are obtained, and when the obtained random number values are reserved and the variable start conditions are met, the special symbol game is played using the special symbol display device. This process, which ultimately results in the execution of the special symbol game, is referred to as the "start condition (being met)."

When the first special pattern or the second special pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display device 171 or the second special pattern display device 172 in a stopped state indicating a jackpot, the game transitions to special game, which is a game state more advantageous to the player than normal game, and the opening and closing operation of the jackpot opening 64 begins in response to the operation of the special electric device 642. On the other hand, the stopping state of the decorative pattern indicating a jackpot on the performance display device 70 is, for example, a state in which three patterns match. In this embodiment, the three special games available are 10R special game, in which the round play is set to 10 times (10 rounds), 5R special game, in which the round play is set to 5 times (5 rounds), and 2R special game, in which the round play is set to 2 times (2 rounds).

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is switched to 10R special game, 5R special game, or 2R special game, the special symbol probability fluctuation function (also referred to as "probable win") is activated over the period (also referred to as the "ST period") from the end of the special game until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined final number (also referred to as the "ST number"). In other words, in this embodiment, the special symbol probability fluctuation function does not continue until the next jackpot occurs, but is limited to until the above-mentioned ST number is reached. In this way, when the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery transitions from a low probability state to a high probability state, increasing the probability of a new jackpot occurring relatively quickly.

On the other hand, after the special game has ended, the main control CPU 101 may activate a special pattern fluctuation time reduction function (hereinafter also referred to as "time reduction"), either in conjunction with or separately from the special pattern probability fluctuation function. When the special pattern fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special patterns (and decorative patterns) tends to be shorter than usual, increasing the number of special pattern draws per unit time and making it easier to win the next jackpot in a shorter period of time than the end of the previous jackpot.

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the main control CPU 101 also activates the so-called electric chute support function (normal electric device support function). The electric chute support function activates any one or a combination of the following functions: normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time shortening function, and normal electric device 622 opening extension function. When the normal symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning a normal symbol is increased compared to the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is shortened, and the opening mode of the normal electric device 622 is changed to that in the normal game state (when the electric chute support function is not activated) (for example, the opening time of the normal electric device 622 is extended more than normal), thereby creating a state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 62 (also referred to as the "easy ball entry state"). When the opening time extension function of the normal electric device 622 is activated, the opening time of the normal electric device 622 is extended beyond its normal state. In this ball-scoring state, the operation of the normal symbol variation time shortening function increases the likelihood that the number of times the normal symbol will change per unit time will be greater than in the normal state, and the operation of the opening time extension function of the normal electric device 622 also improves the ease of balls scoring into the second start hole 62, increasing the likelihood that the number of balls scoring into the second start hole 62 will increase. Therefore, the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chute support function increases the chances of winning prize balls by scoring into the second start hole 62 during that period, allowing the player to continue playing in a state where it is less likely to lose balls than in the normal game state.

<Example of main functional configuration of gaming machine>
The outline of the gaming operation of the gaming machine according to this embodiment has been described above, and next, the main functions of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 20 is a block diagram showing an example of the functions of the main control board 100 mounted on the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

The main control board 100 includes a ball-entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, a normal symbol lottery processing means 145, a special game control means 150, a symbol display control means 155, an electric device control means 160, a game status control means 169, an error monitoring control means 170, a main information storage means 180, and a command transmission/reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control board 100 is composed of hardware such as a main control CPU 101, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, and electronic circuits provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a main control program stored in the main control ROM 102, etc., but is represented here as a functional block.

The ball entry determination means 110 determines whether a game ball has entered each entry port, etc., based on detection signals from the first start port switch 161, the second start port switch 162, the operating gate switch 163, the special prize port switch 164, the general prize port switch 166, and the out ball detection switch 167, etc.

The gaming lottery random number generating means 120 takes in the internal random number generated by the random number generating circuit described above and adds the software random number for special symbols described below to this to generate a random number for special symbols used in the lottery to determine whether a player wins or loses a special symbol. The gaming lottery random number generating means 120 is equipped with random number counters for generating various software random numbers through program processing by the main control CPU 101. These random number counters function as random number generating means that generate random numbers using software.

These software random numbers include special symbol software random numbers that are added to the aforementioned built-in random numbers to form special symbol random numbers; special symbol software initial value random numbers that determine the initial and ending values of the special symbol software random numbers; special symbol pattern random numbers used to determine winning symbols (symbol combinations that activate the condition device, losing symbol combinations, etc.) as special symbol stopping symbols; special symbol initial value random numbers that determine the initial and ending values of the special symbol pattern random numbers; special symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers used to select the special symbol fluctuation pattern; regular symbol random numbers used to determine whether a regular symbol wins or loses; regular symbol initial value random numbers that determine the initial and ending values of the regular symbol random numbers; and regular symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers used to select the regular symbol fluctuation pattern. Note that the winning symbol referred to above refers to the winning symbol.

These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs, and the initial value random number is updated using the remaining time in the interrupt cycle even when the timer interrupt process is not being executed (during loop processing).

The reserve control means 130 includes a special symbol reserve control means 131 and a normal symbol reserve control means 132. Triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 61 or the second start hole 62, the special symbol reserve control means 131 obtains lottery random number values related to the special symbol game, such as a special symbol random number value, a special symbol random number value, and a special symbol variation pattern random number value, and manages these random number values as activated reserved ball information for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol reserve control means 131 temporarily stores the activated reserved ball information for the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (e.g., four), respectively, in the first special symbol reserve storage area or the second special symbol reserve storage area of the main information storage means 180 so that it is linked to the order in which the reserved balls entered.

The first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area are each provided with a reserved 1 memory area (first reserved memory area), a reserved 2 memory area (second reserved memory area), a reserved 3 memory area (third reserved memory area), and a reserved 4 memory area (fourth reserved memory area) in the order of balls entering each starting port 61, 62. Each reserved memory area can store a set of activated reserved ball information, including a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number. The activated reserved ball information is stored in the order of reserved 1 memory area, reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area, and is consumed in the order of reserved 1 memory area, reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area according to the so-called first-in, first-out principle. When the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 memory area is consumed, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area is shifted to the memory area with the lower number, and the contents of the reserved 4 memory area are cleared to zero.

The special symbol reserve control means 131 has a first special symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol. The special symbol reserve control means 131 updates the number of activated reserved balls of the special symbol by incrementing the corresponding counter by 1 each time an activated reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired, and decrementing the corresponding counter by 1 each time an activated reserved ball is consumed.

When the special symbol reserve control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of activated reserved balls for the first or second special symbol, it generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pattern storage number command") containing the updated number of reserved balls and temporarily stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This single command includes information on both the number of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of activated reserved balls for the second special symbol. While, as a general rule, the activated reserved balls for each special symbol are consumed in the order in which they are entered, this embodiment employs a so-called priority consumption system that prioritizes the variable display of the second special symbol over the first special symbol. Therefore, as long as activated reserved balls for the second special symbol game are present, the activated reserved balls for the second special symbol game are consumed preferentially, regardless of the presence of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol game. Furthermore, under this priority consumption system, if an activation reserved ball for the second special symbol is present, the consumption of the activation reserved ball for the first special symbol will be put on hold, even if an activation reserved ball for the first special symbol is also present.

When a game ball rolling down the game area 20A passes through gate 63, the normal symbol reserve control means 132 acquires the lottery random numbers related to the normal symbol game, namely, the normal symbol random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the normal symbol variation pattern random number value, and manages these random number values as normal symbol activation reserved ball information. The normal symbol reserve control means 132 temporarily stores up to a predetermined upper limit number (e.g., four) of normal symbol activation reserved ball information in the normal symbol reserve storage area of the main information storage means 180 so that it is linked to the ball entry order of the reserved balls. The normal symbol reserve control means 132 has a normal symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of normal symbol activation reserved balls. The normal symbol reserve control means 132 updates the number of reserved balls for activated normal symbols by adding 1 to the corresponding counter each time an activated reserved ball for a normal symbol is acquired, and subtracting 1 from the corresponding counter each time an activated reserved ball is consumed.

When an activated reserved ball with a special pattern is acquired at a predetermined pre-determination timing, the pre-determination means 135 performs a pre-determination for a pre-reading notice on the activated reserved ball. Examples of pre-determination timing are when any of the following conditions are met: (1) when an activated reserved ball with a first special pattern is acquired while waiting for a win and the electric chute support function is not yet activated; (2) when an activated reserved ball with a second special pattern is acquired while waiting for a win and the electric chute support function is activated; or (3) when an activated reserved ball with a second special pattern is acquired during a big win or small win. Note that the main control board 100 can perform a pre-determination and send the information to the presentation control board 200 regardless of when the activated reserved ball is acquired, and the presentation control board 200 can then make all decisions regarding whether to execute the pre-reading notice.

Specifically, the preliminary determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the currently acquired activation reserved ball from the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area of the main information storage means 180, and sequentially performs a preliminary determination of the win/lose lottery (win/lose preliminary determination), a preliminary determination of the pattern lottery (pattern preliminary determination), and a preliminary determination of the variation pattern lottery (variation pattern preliminary determination). The preliminary determination tables used for each preliminary determination are not shown, but are divided into multiple areas corresponding to the total number of random numbers in a manner similar to the lottery tables (special symbol win/lose lottery table, special symbol winning symbol table, variation pattern table) described below, and a lottery ID is assigned to each area (number of determination values). Note that the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means 135 may be based on data temporarily stored in RAM or a CPU register, rather than data stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area, as long as the preliminary determination corresponds to the random number value used in the lottery when the variation actually begins.

This lottery ID is set to a number indicating the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as the "preliminary determination number"). The preliminary determination means 135 sequentially generates performance control commands (referred to as "preliminary determination commands") containing information on the preliminary determination results (preliminary determination numbers), and stores these in a command storage area in the main information storage means 180. Note that, unlike in this embodiment, the preliminary determination results are not necessarily transmitted as information (lottery ID) indicating which random number range they belong to; the results of a preliminary lottery may also be transmitted using a win/lose lottery table or the like that is used when the actual fluctuations begin.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol hit/miss determination means 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination means 142, and a special symbol change pattern determination means 143. When the special symbol change start condition is met, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 reads out the special symbol random number value, special symbol pattern random number value, and special symbol change pattern random number value stored in the first memory area (reserve 1 memory area) of the special symbol reserve storage area in the main information storage means 180, and stores these in the special symbol hit/miss determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol change pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, "the conditions for starting the special symbol change are met" means, for example, when priority control of the second special symbol is adopted as in this embodiment, that all of the following conditions are met: (1) neither a big win nor a small win is occurring, (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, and (3) an activation pending ball is present in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When all of these conditions are met, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing.

The special pattern hit/miss determination means 141 reads the special pattern hit random number value from the special pattern hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, performs a hit/miss determination, and decides whether the determination result corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. The result of this hit/miss determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data (e.g., "55H"), small hit data (e.g., "33H"), and miss data (e.g., "00H"), and is used in subsequent processing before being cleared when the special symbol stops changing. The special symbol hit/miss determination means 141 references a special symbol hit/miss lottery table when making this hit/miss determination. Note that the "H" shown after each piece of data above stands for "Hexadecimal" and indicates that the data is expressed in hexadecimal. For example, "55H" indicates that the 1-byte data is "01010101B ("B" is binary)." When expressing decimal notation in particular, no symbol is added, or a "D" is added.

Figure 22(A) shows an example of a special symbol lottery table that is referenced in the normal state, which is a so-called low probability state, and Figure 22(B) shows an example of a special symbol lottery table that is referenced in the special variable state, which is a so-called high probability state.

In this special symbol win/loss lottery table, the special symbol win random number value is associated with the judgment results of a jackpot, small win, and loss. The probability of winning a jackpot or small win is determined according to the associated random number range. As can be seen from Figures 22(A) and 22(B), in the special symbol game win/loss lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), a jackpot occurs only when the random number value falls within the range of "0 to 219." On the other hand, in the special symbol game (high probability state), the jackpot range is expanded, and a jackpot occurs not only when the random number value falls within the range of "0 to 219," but also when it falls within the range of "220 to 2184." In other words, when the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from a low probability state (approximately 1/300) to a high probability state (approximately 1/30).

As such, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the game status, but the probability of winning the jackpot is the same for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Here, even if the special symbol hit random number value does not fall within the jackpot range, it will result in a small hit if it falls within a specified range. In this embodiment, a small hit exists only for the first special symbol lottery, but it is also possible, for example, to provide a small hit for the second special symbol lottery so that the second special symbol lottery has a higher probability of a small hit than the first special symbol lottery, or to provide a small hit only for the second special symbol lottery.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can be equipped with a setting change function that changes the degree of advantage given to the player by using multiple setting values. When the setting is changed in such a pachinko machine 1, the random number range that results in a jackpot changes according to the setting (setting value). Therefore, a special symbol lottery table is prepared in which the jackpot range varies depending on the setting value. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the ratio between the jackpot lottery probability in a low-probability state and the jackpot lottery probability in a high-probability state is constant regardless of the setting value. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery probability when the setting value is "1" is 1/300 for the low-probability state and 1/30 for the high-probability state (10 times that of the low-probability state), then when the setting value is "6," the jackpot lottery probability is 1/250 for the low-probability state and 1/25 for the high-probability state (10 times that of the low-probability state).

The special symbol stopping symbol determination means 142 determines the stopping symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol group to which the stopping symbol belongs, based on the result of the winning/losing lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol stopping symbol determination means 142 has a first special symbol winning symbol table and a second special symbol winning symbol table that are referenced when determining the stopping symbol and symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 23 (A), the first special symbol winning symbol table associates the random number value of the special symbol winning symbol with the stopping symbol, symbol group, and jackpot details (number of times the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function are activated, and the activation pattern of the large prize slot 64). Note that the number "100" in parentheses represents the number of times the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function are activated, i.e., the number of STs. In this table, the stopping symbols "1" to "8" for the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups, A and B, depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the winning symbol table is not shown for when the winning/losing lottery results in a loss or small win, but if the losses and small wins are all single actions, the losing symbol and small win symbol are determined uniquely without using the winning symbol table. If it is desired to give different types to losses and small wins, change the fluctuation pattern, or change the control mode of special electric devices, the winning symbol table may be used to determine the symbol even in the case of a loss or small win.

Specifically, the symbols "1," "2," "3," and "4" are associated with symbol group A (10R specific time-saving symbols), the symbols "5" and "6" are associated with symbol group B (5R specific time-saving symbols), and the symbols "7" and "8" are associated with symbol group C (2R specific time-saving symbols). In this embodiment, "specific symbols" are symbols that activate the probability fluctuation function after the special game ends, while "normal symbols" are symbols that do not activate the probability fluctuation function after the special game ends (the same applies to the second special symbol described below).

Symbol groups A and B are specific symbols that transition the game state to a probability variable state (high probability state) after the end of special play, indicating a so-called "probability variable hit." The special symbol probability variable function, variable time reduction function, and electric chute support function are granted only until the number of special symbol fluctuations ends within the ST number of times without a jackpot occurring, or until the next jackpot occurs within the ST number of times. For symbol group A, the specified number of rounds for special play is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time for the large prize slot 64 in one round of play is approximately 30 seconds. On the other hand, for symbol group B, the specified number of rounds for special play is 5 rounds, and the maximum opening time for the large prize slot 64 in one round of play is approximately 30 seconds.

Although symbol group C differs from the "probable hit" described above in the number of times and duration for which the large prize slot 64 is opened, it is a specific symbol that indicates a so-called "sudden probability hit" that transitions the game state to a special symbol probability hit state (high probability state) after the special game ends. The special symbol probability change function, change time reduction function, and electric chute support function are granted only until the number of times the special symbol changes ends without generating a jackpot within the ST number of times, or until the next jackpot occurs within the ST number of times. The specified number of rounds for special play is two, and the maximum opening time of the large prize slot 64 during one round of play is approximately 1.8 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a small win, the pattern determination using the special pattern win random number is skipped, and the pattern "9" is unambiguously assigned as the stopping pattern. This pattern "9" is associated with pattern group F (special electric activation pattern 1). Note that a small win does not trigger a change in the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time reduction function, electric chute support function) or the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the game state is maintained before and after the win/loss lottery. If the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, the pattern "0" is unambiguously assigned as the stopping pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23 (B), the second special symbol winning symbol table mentioned above associates the special symbol winning symbol random number value with the stopped symbol, symbol group, and jackpot details (the number of times the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function are activated, and the activation pattern of the special electric device 642). In this second special symbol winning symbol table, the second special symbol stopping symbols "11" to "18" are classified into two symbol groups D and E according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols "11", "12", "13", and "14" are associated with symbol group D (10R specific time-shortened symbols), and symbols "15", "16", "17", and "18" are associated with symbol group E (5R specific time-shortened symbols).

Symbol groups D and E are specific symbols that transition the game state to a probability variable state (high probability state) after the end of special play, indicating a so-called "probability variable hit." The special symbol probability variable function, variable time shortening function, and electric chute support function can be applied only until the number of special symbol fluctuations ends within the ST number of times without a jackpot occurring, or until the next jackpot occurs within the ST number of times. For symbol group D, the specified number of rounds for special play is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time for the large prize slot 64 in one round of play is approximately 30 seconds. For symbol group E, the specified number of rounds for special play is 5 rounds, and the maximum opening time for the large prize slot 64 in one round of play is approximately 30 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a small win, the pattern determination using the special pattern win random number is skipped, and the pattern "19" is unambiguously assigned as the stopping pattern. This pattern "19" is associated with pattern group G (special electric activation pattern 2). Note that a small win does not trigger a change in the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time reduction function, electric chute support function) or the fluctuation pattern selection state. Just as in the case where the winning result is a loss before or after the win/loss lottery, a determination is made as to whether the game state termination conditions for the probability fluctuation function, etc. are met, and if the termination conditions are not met, the game state at the time when a small win was determined is maintained. If the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, the pattern "0" is unambiguously assigned as the stopping pattern.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, three types of jackpots are available: a 10R jackpot (a 10R special time-saving symbol), a 5R jackpot (a 5R special time-saving symbol), and a 2R jackpot (a 2R special time-saving symbol). The expected value of winning prize balls in special play (expected value of winning prize balls) is 10R jackpot > 5R jackpot > 2R jackpot. Therefore, hereinafter, a 10R jackpot will be referred to as a "high-profit jackpot," with the highest expected value of winning prize balls, and a 2R jackpot will be referred to as a "low-profit jackpot," with the lowest expected value of winning prize balls. Furthermore, even if the same number of rounds are played, if there is a mixture of long-open round play (30 seconds) and short-open round play (1.8 seconds), the jackpot with the most long-open round play will be the "high-profit jackpot."

Specifically, special games may have a common number of execution rounds, such as 10 rounds, but may include special games in which the round game mode changes at predetermined rounds. In this case, special games may include a type of special game consisting only of short-open round games in which the large prize opening 64 is open for a relatively short time, and a type of special game that switches to long-open round games in which the large prize opening 64 is open for a relatively long time after a predetermined number of execution rounds, the latter of which constitutes a "high-profit jackpot." Even jackpots with the same number of execution rounds may be configured so that the actual profit, i.e., the expected value of winning prize balls, differs depending on the large prize opening pattern.

As can be seen from the above explanation, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that a 10R jackpot will be selected, whereas if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, there is a 75% chance that a 10R jackpot will be selected. This gives the player an advantage in that landing the game ball in the second starting hole 62 rather than the first starting hole 61 means that there is a higher chance of winning more balls. The count number (specified count number) is the maximum number of game balls that can enter the big prize hole 64 in a round of play.

The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 shown in Figure 20 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 has multiple variation pattern tables that are referenced when selecting a special symbol variation pattern, as exemplified in Figures 24 and 25 described below. The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects one of these variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the winning/losing lottery. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern tables will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines multiple variation patterns. Note that while "selection rates" are shown in each figure for ease of explanation, in reality, a determination value (range of random number values) for determining the variation pattern is set according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value, and the variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random number value belongs to. Each type of variation pattern has a variation time set as the end condition for that pattern variation, and is specified on the assumption that pattern variations due to decorative patterns made up of multiple patterns will also be executed during that variation time. Note that, for the sake of convenience, this embodiment will only use multiple types of variation patterns as examples, but in reality, many more variation patterns exist.

Figure 24 shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table for jackpots and small jackpots. The top row (A1) is the normal fluctuation pattern table, the middle row (A2) is the probability fluctuation pattern table, and the bottom row (A3) is the special fluctuation pattern table. In this embodiment, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern selection state, or even if the same fluctuation pattern selection state is used, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1), if the jackpot type is a 10R jackpot, fluctuation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or fluctuation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected, and if it is a 5R jackpot, fluctuation pattern PY2 (normal reach A) or fluctuation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, if it is a 2R jackpot or small jackpot, fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In this normal fluctuation pattern table for jackpots and small jackpots, non-reach mode fluctuation patterns are never selected, and if a jackpot or small jackpot occurs under normal conditions, only reach mode fluctuation patterns can be selected.

In the probability variable fluctuation pattern table (A2), if the jackpot type is a 10R jackpot or a 5R jackpot, only fluctuation pattern PX7 (Super Reach B) is selected. On the other hand, if it is a 2R jackpot or small jackpot, either fluctuation pattern PZ6 (Normal Reach B) or fluctuation pattern PZ8 (Super Reach D) is selected. In this probability variable fluctuation pattern table for jackpots and small jackpots, non-reach type fluctuation patterns are never selected, and if a jackpot or small jackpot occurs in a probability variable state with a special symbol, only reach type fluctuation patterns can be selected.

In the special fluctuation pattern table (A3), if the jackpot type is a 10R jackpot, only fluctuation pattern PX9 (non-reach C) is selected, and if it is a 5R jackpot, only fluctuation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected. On the other hand, if it is a 2R jackpot or small jackpot, only fluctuation pattern PZ10 (super reach C) is selected. Here, fluctuation pattern PX9 for the non-reach C mode is configured as an ultra-shortened fluctuation time (2 seconds), while fluctuation patterns PY10 and PZ10 for the super reach C mode are configured as relatively long fluctuation times (120 seconds).

Figure 25 shows an example of a variation pattern table for misses. The top row (B1) is the normal variation pattern table, the middle row (B2) is the probability variation pattern table, and the bottom row (B3) is the special variation pattern table. In this embodiment, the variation pattern selected is set to differ depending on the variation pattern selection status and the number of balls reserved for special symbol activation.

The normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) is designed to select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol (because the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the main focus during normal gameplay). In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), one of the following fluctuation patterns is selected: PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3 corresponding to non-reach A; PH1-4, PH1-5 corresponding to non-reach B; PH2 corresponding to normal reach A (N reach A); PH3 corresponding to super reach A (SP reach A); or PH4 corresponding to super reach D (SP reach D). In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), fluctuations of non-reach A are not subject to pre-reading, and fluctuations other than non-reach A are subject to pre-reading.

In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), the selection rates of fluctuation patterns PH1-4 and PH1-5 corresponding to non-reach B may be changed depending on the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the selection rates of fluctuation patterns corresponding to reach areas (N reach A, SP reach A, SP reach D) are generally not changed depending on the number of reserved balls. However, for reach types with low expectations, such as N reach A, the selection rate may be changed depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is small, lowering the selection rates of non-reach A and non-reach B and increasing the selection rate of N reach A will lengthen the fluctuation time, thereby avoiding situations where no fluctuation display is performed and preventing a decline in interest.

The probability variation pattern table (B2) is designed to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol (because in the probability variation state, the variation of the second special symbol is the main focus). In the probability variation pattern table (B2), one of the following variation patterns is selected: PH5-1, PH5-2 corresponding to non-reach B, PH6 corresponding to normal reach B (N reach B), PH7 corresponding to super reach B (SP reach B), or PH8 corresponding to super reach D (SP reach D). In the probability variation pattern table (B2), non-reach B variations are not subject to pre-reading, and variations other than non-reach B are subject to pre-reading.

In the special fluctuation pattern table (B3), only fluctuation pattern PH9 corresponding to non-reach C is selected. Here, fluctuation pattern PH9 for the non-reach C mode is configured as an ultra-shortened fluctuation time (2 seconds). In the special fluctuation pattern table (B3), all fluctuations are excluded from pre-reading.

As shown in Figure 25, when the result of the lottery is a loss, a different variation pattern table can be set to be selected depending on the number of activated balls (0-4) for the special symbol. In other words, by using a variation pattern table according to the number of activated balls for the special symbol, the greater the number of activated balls, the higher the probability that a relatively short variation time will be selected, and conversely, the fewer the number of activated balls, the higher the probability that a relatively long variation time will be selected. It is also possible to separate variation pattern tables by type of special symbol. For example, when the electric chute support function, such as the probability variation state, is activated, the second special symbol is easily displayed, and if a jackpot with the second special symbol is more advantageous as shown in Figure 23, the variation time of the first special symbol can be lengthened to create time to accumulate the reserved second special symbol, which will be given priority in variation control.

For example, in the case of Figure 25, in the probability variation pattern table (B2) which assumes the selection of a variation pattern for the second special symbol, the selection rate for all non-Reach B (variation patterns PH5-1, PH5-2) is a constant 750/1000 regardless of the number of reserved symbols. However, when looking at the distribution of variation patterns PH5-1 and PH5-2 according to the number of reserved symbols, in situations where reserved symbols are accumulated ("reserved symbols 2 → 1," "reserved symbols 3 → 2," "reserved symbols 4 → 3"), the variation pattern PH5-1 (5 seconds), which has a short variation time, is more likely to be selected, whereas in situations where reserved symbols are not accumulated ("reserved symbols 1 → 0"), the variation pattern PH5-2 (10 seconds), which has a long variation time, is more likely to be selected. By allocating in this way, when there are fewer reserved second special symbols in a probability variable state where the second special symbols are consumed first, a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected, making it easier to expect additional reserved second special symbols, and preventing unfavorable situations such as all reserved second special symbols being consumed and the reserved first special symbols starting to be consumed.

After selecting a special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 generates a presentation control command containing special symbol variation pattern information (referred to as a "variation pattern designation command"), a presentation control command containing information on the special symbol (symbol group) and game status (referred to as a "symbol designation command"), a presentation command containing information on the number of reserved symbols after variation has started (referred to as a "symbol memory number command"), etc., in order to instruct the presentation control board 200 to start varying the decorative symbols (hereinafter these presentation control commands are collectively referred to as "variation start commands"), and stores these in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has a normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol change pattern determination means 148. When the normal symbol change start conditions are met, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol hit random number value and the normal symbol change pattern random number value stored in the earliest memory area in the normal symbol reserve storage area, and stores them in the normal symbol hit/miss determination area and the normal symbol change pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively.

The normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146 reads a normal symbol hit random number value from the normal symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, performs a hit/miss determination, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to a hit or a miss. The result of this hit/miss lottery is temporarily stored as a normal symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180, is used in subsequent processing, and is cleared when the normal symbol stops changing. The normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146 holds a normal symbol hit/miss lottery table that is referenced when performing this hit/miss lottery. In a normal state (low probability state), this normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146 references a normal symbol hit/miss lottery table that results in a hit with a probability of, for example, 160/283, while in a normal symbol probability change state (high probability state), it performs the hit/miss lottery for the normal symbol by reference to a normal symbol hit/miss lottery table that results in a hit with a probability of, for example, 282/283.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and selects a predetermined winning symbol if the result of the win/lose lottery is a win, or selects a predetermined losing symbol if the result is a loss. If multiple control patterns for the normal electric device are desired, the device can be designed to have multiple lottery results for the normal symbol symbol lottery table. Furthermore, even if the winning normal symbol is the same, the control pattern for the normal electric device can be made different depending on whether the game state is in operation of the opening extension function of the normal electric device.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 148 reads out a normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value from the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table to select a relatively long fluctuation time for normal symbol fluctuation display in the normal state (for example, uniformly selecting one of the seven types: 4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds). On the other hand, in the time-saving state (easy-to-score state) for normal symbols, a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected.

If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the special game control means 150 determines the demo presentation duration for the start demo presentation and the end demo presentation to be displayed on the presentation display device 70 during special game play, depending on the type of jackpot determined. The special game control means 150 generates a presentation control command (referred to as the "jackpot start demo command") that instructs the presentation control board 200 to execute the start demo presentation, and a presentation control command (referred to as the "jackpot end demo command") that instructs the presentation control board 200 to execute the end demo presentation, and stores these in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The jackpot start demo command also serves as a trigger for the presentation control board 200 to determine the content of the series of jackpot presentations (start demo presentation, round presentation, end demo presentation) that will be played during special game play. In addition to this embodiment, the demo presentation duration determined by the special game control means 150 can also be determined based on the game state at the time of the jackpot, in addition to the type of jackpot.

When the special game control means 150 generates a presentation control command (referred to as a "round presentation designation command") for instructing the start of a round presentation corresponding to each round play during a special game, it stores this in a command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round presentation designation command includes a round start command containing information about the current round number sent at the start of the round, and a special prize opening activation command for executing a prize presentation based on the detection of the special prize opening switch 164 during a round play.

If the result of the win/lose lottery is a small win, the special game control means 150 determines the demo duration for the small win start demo effect and the small win end demo effect to be displayed on the effect display device 70, etc. during the small win game. The special game control means 150 generates a presentation control command that instructs the execution of the small win start demo effect ("small win start demo command") and a presentation control command that instructs the execution of the small win end demo effect ("small win end demo command"), and stores these in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol to be displayed variably on the first special symbol display device 171 in accordance with the variable pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and causes the first special symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after this variable display has ended. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol to be displayed variably on the second special symbol display device 172 in accordance with the variable pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the variable display has ended. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating status of the first special symbol display device 171 and the second special symbol display device 172 is monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. When the special symbol fluctuation stops (i.e., when the special symbol game timer is managing the fluctuation time and its value reaches "0"), the special symbol display control means 156 generates a presentation control command (referred to as a "fluctuation stop command") to request the presentation control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol.

On the other hand, the normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 175 to display a changing normal symbol in accordance with the normal symbol change pattern (change time), and then causes the normal symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the change. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time related to the display of the normal symbol (change time, fixed display time). The operating status of the normal symbol display device 175 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

If the result of the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, the electric device control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric device solenoid 124 as special game processing, causing the special electric device 642 to open according to a predetermined operation pattern. In special games, one opening and closing operation of the special electric device 642 constitutes one round of play, and the round of play is executed consecutively for a specified number of rounds (10R, 5R, 2R in this embodiment). The electric device control means 160 maintains a large prize opening opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric device 642 has been activated (i.e., the number of rounds currently being executed). Here, if the jackpot type is a so-called 10R jackpot (symbol group A, D) or 5R jackpot (symbol group B, E), the large prize opening 64 is opened for a maximum of approximately 30 seconds during one round of play. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a so-called 2R jackpot (symbol group C), the large prize opening 64 is left open for a maximum of approximately 1.8 seconds during one round of play. Here, the conditions for closing the large prize opening 64 during special play (the conditions for ending a round of play) are when a specified number of game balls enter or the specified number of seconds for the open period have elapsed.

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, the electric device control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric device solenoid 124 as a small win game process, causing the special electric device 642 to open for a short period of time. A small win game is a special game consisting of a single round of play, and is distinguished from a big win game, which is a special game consisting of multiple rounds of play. In particular, both small win games and big win games are special games in which winning balls are easy to obtain based on the operation of the special electric device 642, but they are distinguished by whether or not the device continuous operation device, which enables continuous operation of the special electric device 642, is operating.

If the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric device control means 160 outputs a control signal to the normal electric device solenoid 123, causing the normal electric device 622 to open for a predetermined opening time. In the normal state, the electric device control means 160 opens the normal electric device 622 for an extremely short time (e.g., 0.2 seconds), whereas in the easy-to-score state (electric chute support state), it opens the normal electric device 622 for a relatively longer time (e.g., 4 seconds) compared to the normal state.

When the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the game state control means 169 determines the game state after the end of the special game based on the type of symbol group related to the jackpot, and switches the game state after the end of the special game. Hereinafter, of the functions related to the special and normal symbols mentioned above, 1) a game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, special symbol variation time reduction function, and electric chute support function are activated is referred to as the "probability variation state," 2) a game state in which only the special symbol variation time reduction function and electric chute support function are activated is referred to as the "time-saving state," 3) a game state in which only the special symbol probability variation function is activated is referred to as the "latent probability variation state," and 4) a state in which no functions are activated is referred to as the "normal state." It should be noted that the "probability variation state," "time-saving state," and "latent probability variation state" are all game states that are more advantageous to the player than the "normal state."

In the following, each game state will be referred to as (1) the special mode state "high probability/high base," (2) the time-saving mode "low probability/high base," (3) the latent special mode state "high probability/low base," and (4) the normal mode "low probability/low base" based on the combination of the special symbol game operation state (high probability/low probability) and the normal symbol game operation state (electric chute support function activated/electric chute support function not activated) ("Base" refers to the number of prize balls per number of balls fired, and when the electric chute support function is activated, it is referred to as a "high base," which means there is a high possibility of winning prize balls due to the operation of normal electric devices). In this embodiment, as an example, after the special game ends, the game state remains in a special variable state until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined final number of times (i.e., the aforementioned ST number) from the end of the special game (however, if the next jackpot occurs within the ST number, the special variable state ends with that change, and at the end of the jackpot game, the game transitions to the corresponding game state based on the jackpot type and jackpot symbol). Note that if a small jackpot occurs during the ST period, the ST number is not reset to 0; the ST number is continuously counted before and after the small jackpot occurs. In this embodiment, the ST number is set to 100 as an example, but may be set to another number. Note that when the special game transitions to a special variable state, the special symbol probability change function, special symbol change time reduction function, and electric chute support function are activated simultaneously, and each function continues as long as the special variable state continues.

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, regardless of whether the game state before the jackpot was normal or a special probability state, the game will remain normal during the special game, and will enter a special probability state uniformly after the special game, up to the number of STs. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small jackpot, and the game state before the small jackpot was normal, the game state during and after the small jackpot will also be normal. If the game state before the small jackpot was a special symbol probability state, the game state during and after the small jackpot will also be a special symbol probability state.

When the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot, the game state control means 169 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type of jackpot (the type of symbol group A to E) and switches the variation pattern selection state after the special game. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referenced when selecting the variation pattern table described above. The variation pattern selection state is switched at the end of the special game or when the final number of times for the variation pattern selection state has been reached. In this embodiment, there are three types of variation pattern selection states: "low-probability normal variation state α," "high-probability shortened variation state β," and "high-probability special variation state γ." Here, the low-probability normal variation state α is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern table (A1 in Figure 24 and B1 in Figure 25) selected when the game state is normal (low-probability state). The high probability shortened variation state β is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation pattern table (A2 in FIG. 24 and B2 in FIG. 25) selected when the game state is a probability variation state of the special symbol (excluding the limited period described below). The high probability special variation state γ is a state in which the game state is a probability variation state of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special variation pattern table (A3 in FIG. 24 and B3 in FIG. 25) that is only selectable for a certain period immediately after the end of the special game (a period spanning the number of pattern variations (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number of activation reserved balls (4) of the second special symbol: referred to as the "limited period"). In this embodiment, regardless of which of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the variation pattern selection state (1) remains in the high-probability special variation state γ for a limited period of four symbol variations immediately after the end of the special game; (2) remains in the high-probability shortened variation state β after the end of the limited period and if the number of times the special game is played is within the ST number (100 times); and (3) remains in the low-probability normal variation state α after the ST number is played, i.e., from the 101st time onwards. Of course, the low-probability normal variation state α will remain until the first win occurs. The game state control means 169 generates a presentation control command (referred to as a "game state designation command") including the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Furthermore, without being limited to this embodiment, it is also possible to have multiple special fluctuation states γ, and to refer to different special fluctuation states at different times during one fluctuation time shortened game state (for example, a special fluctuation state γ2 may be provided in which the player stays in special fluctuation state γ1 four times after the end of a jackpot, and then stays in shortened fluctuation state β 95 times, and then stays in special fluctuation state γ2 during one special symbol game).

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors input information from the I/O port circuit 104 and examines magnetic detection signals from the magnetic sensor, open/short circuit power supply abnormality signals, radio wave detection signals from the radio wave sensor, and door/frame open signals to determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If an error state is detected, it requests a presentation control command ("error presentation designation command") containing the error information to instruct the presentation control board 200 to present an error state. Although not all components are shown in Figure 19, the door open switch is a detection means for detecting whether the glass frame 3 is open, the frame open switch (door open sensor 2p) is a detection means for detecting whether the front frame 4 is open, and the back set open switch is a detection means for detecting whether the back set disc is open. The magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting fraudulent activity (so-called cheating).

The main information storage means 180 is configured to temporarily store information necessary for controlling the progress of games, such as random number information obtained in special symbol games and normal symbol games, information on the activated balls for special and normal symbol games, information on the game status (probable hit state, time-saving state, easy-to-score state) related to special symbol games and normal symbol games, information on the variation pattern selection state, information on the result of the win/loss lottery (jackpot, small hit, loss), information on the stopped symbols and variation patterns related to special and normal symbols, information on special games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of times opened per round of play), etc.), status information indicating the operating status of the special symbol display devices 171, 172, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric device 642, and information on performance control command data, and is provided with a designated memory area for storing each piece of information.

When a command transmission request is received, the command transmission/reception means 190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the performance control board 200 via a parallel transmission method. Each performance control command consists of two bytes, including one byte of MODE data and one byte of EVENT data. To distinguish between MODE data and EVENT data, the seventh bit of the MODE data is set to "1" and the seventh bit of the EVENT data is set to "0". When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output for each of the MODE data and EVENT data.

The performance control board 200 can receive MODE data and EVENT data upon receiving the strobe signal output in this manner. As a general rule, the performance control commands generated by each process are transmitted one command at a time per interrupt cycle, with MODE data and EVENT data transmitted in the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The setting change means 195 executes a "setting change process" to change the game settings. When the front frame 4 is in the open state (the door open sensor 2p detects that the door is open) and the setting key switch 100q is in the on state, the setting change means 195 transitions to the setting change state described above when the power switch 600q is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 400q.

When the setting change means 195 transitions to the setting change state, it causes the setting display unit 197 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory (e.g., a portion of the RAM storage area provided by the main control RAM 103). The setting display unit 197 displays the setting value, for example, using a 7-segment display provided on the main control board 100. In response to pressing of a specific setting change button, the setting change means 195 changes the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 197 in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → ..., and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value displayed on the setting display unit 197. In this example, the RAM clear switch 400q is used as the setting change button, but another button may be used, or a dedicated button may be provided. When the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting change means 195 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display unit 197.

The setting confirmation means 196 executes a "setting confirmation process" to confirm game settings. When the front frame 4 is in the open state (the door open sensor 2p detects door open), the setting key switch 100q is in the on state, and the power switch 600q is turned on without the RAM clear switch 400q being pressed, the setting confirmation means 196 transitions to the setting confirmation state described above.

When the setting confirmation means 196 transitions to the setting confirmation state, it displays the setting values stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 197. However, unlike the setting change means 195 described above, the setting confirmation means 196 does not change the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 197, nor does it change the setting values stored in the setting memory, even if a setting change button (e.g., RAM clear switch 400q) is pressed. Then, when the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting confirmation means 196 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 197.

The setting value data managed in the setting memory may instead be numeric values "0" through "5" rather than numeric values "1" through "6." In this case, setting value "0" may correspond to setting 1, setting value "1" to setting 2, setting value "2" to setting 3, setting value "3" to setting 4, setting value "4" to setting 5, and setting value "5" to setting 6. Using "0" as the normal value for setting value data simplifies the RAM clearing process in the event of an abnormality, since resetting the setting value data to the initial value "0" through RAM clearing in the event of a RAM abnormality will not result in an abnormality. Another advantage is that when using setting value data to perform a lottery, such as selecting different tables or data for each setting value in a look-ahead process, the offset process for that selection can be simplified. For example, when using setting value data values "1" through "6," additional processing, such as subtracting 1 from the starting address, is required to use these values directly as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used as is as the offset data. When numerical values "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the setting change means 195 and the setting confirmation means 196 may display the numerical value of the setting value data as is on the setting display unit 197, or may display a numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the setting value data on the setting display unit 197. In the latter case, the numerical data "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, making the display easy to understand for the gaming machine administrator.

Figure 21 is a functional block diagram showing an example of the functions of the presentation control board 200 in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. The presentation control board 200 includes a presentation lottery random number generation means 210, a presentation integration means 220, a lamp presentation control means 230, a role-playing device presentation control means 240, an error presentation control means 250, a presentation control information storage means 260, and a command transmission/reception means 270. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the presentation control board 200 is a functional representation of hardware such as a presentation control CPU 201, a presentation control ROM 202, a presentation control RAM 203, and electronic circuits arranged on the presentation control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the presentation control ROM 202.

The effect lottery random number generating means 210 is equipped with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) through program processing by the effect control CPU 201. These random number counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers in software. These software random numbers include pre-reading notice lottery random numbers used to determine whether or not a pre-reading notice effect will be executed, pre-reading notice pattern random numbers used to select a pre-reading notice pattern, decorative pattern random numbers used to select the stopping pattern of decorative patterns, variable effect pattern random numbers used to select a variable effect pattern for decorative patterns, pre-reading notice pattern random numbers used to select a pre-reading notice pattern, jackpot effect pattern random numbers used to select a jackpot effect pattern, consecutive win effect lottery random numbers used to determine whether or not a consecutive win effect will be executed in a reserved bet, and consecutive win effect pattern random numbers used to select a consecutive win effect pattern for a reserved bet. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the effect control main processing described below. For convenience, the random numbers used in each lottery are given names, but it is also possible to have a common random number.

The performance control means 220 includes a performance mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a preview notice control means 223, a decorative pattern determination means 224, a variable performance determination means 225, a preview notice performance determination means 226, and a jackpot performance determination means 227.

The pending information display control means 222 has a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls for the first special pattern, and a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls for the second special pattern. When the reserved information display control means 222 receives a pattern memory number command from the main control board 100, it updates the values of the first reserved ball number counter and the second reserved ball number counter based on the information on the number of activated reserved balls included in the pattern memory number command. Then, based on the values of the first reserved ball number counter and the second reserved ball number counter, the pending information display control means 222 controls the display of a number of reserved images corresponding to the number of activated reserved balls for the first special pattern and a number of reserved images corresponding to the number of activated reserved balls for the second special pattern on the reserve display unit of the performance display device 70. In the normal display mode, when a special-pattern activated reserved ball appears, a white reserved image is displayed. However, when the reserved change pre-reading preview effect described below is executed, the reserved image that is the subject of the pre-reading preview can change from the normal display mode (display color) of "white" to one of the following special display modes (display colors): "blue," "green," "red," or "rainbow." The four special display modes are related to the reliability of the lottery result being a jackpot (referred to as "jackpot reliability"), with the jackpot reliability increasing by one level in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "rainbow." In this embodiment, when the reserved image changes to "rainbow," a jackpot is confirmed for the activated reserved ball that is the pre-reading target. Note that in the reserved change pre-reading preview effect, the change in the display mode of the reserved image may be expressed by a shape or pattern rather than a display color.

When the pre-reading notice control means 223 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it determines by lottery whether to execute the pre-reading notice. The pre-reading notice control means 223 distinguishes between information on the pre-determination results for the first special symbol and information on the pre-determination results for the second special symbol, and temporarily stores up to a predetermined maximum number (four) of each in the pre-reading information storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 so that it is linked to the ball entry order of the activated reserved balls. This pre-reading information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved memory area of the main control board 100, and is provided with a reserved 1 memory area (first reserved memory area), a reserved 2 memory area (second reserved memory area), a reserved 3 memory area (third reserved memory area), and a reserved 4 memory area (fourth reserved memory area) in the order of ball entry into each starting port 61, 62. Each reserved memory area can store a set of information on the pre-determination results of whether the ball will be successful, the pattern preliminary determination results, and the variation pattern preliminary determination results.

When determining whether to execute a pre-reading notice, the pre-reading notice control means 223 executes a pre-reading judgment (also referred to as a "pre-reading judgment") for the activated reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice, based on the results of a preliminary judgment by the main control board 100. In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice includes, in addition to the previously described reserve change pre-reading notice, a so-called continuous pre-reading effect that predicts the possibility of a jackpot win or the occurrence of a reach effect over multiple consecutive display changes of decorative symbols. If it is determined that a pre-reading notice effect (continuous pre-reading effect) can be executed, the pre-reading notice command information (the result of the preliminary judgment) and the pattern memory count command information (the number of existing activated reserved balls) from the main control board 100 are analyzed, and a pre-reading notice effect pattern is determined by lottery over multiple consecutive display changes for the activated reserved ball (referred to as a "trigger hold") that will trigger the current pre-reading notice effect. There are various variations of pre-reading notices, such as reserve change pre-reading notice effects, chance eye pre-reading notice effects, and background change pre-reading notice effects. Another type of pre-reading feature is the in-reserve consecutive win display, which suggests or notifies the player of the possibility of a working reserved ball that will result in a jackpot when a jackpot is being played or when a variation that will result in a jackpot is being executed.

Figure 26 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern pre-reading judgment table. The fluctuation pattern pre-reading judgment table shown in Figure 26 is a judgment table used in pre-reading judgment by the pre-reading notice control means 223, and the pre-reading type (A to D) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern of each fluctuation determined using the special symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 25, etc.

According to Figure 26, pre-reading type A (non-pre-reading) is selected from fluctuation patterns that are not subject to pre-reading (fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3, PH5-1, and PH5-2 according to Figure 25). When pre-reading type A is selected, the pre-reading effect for that fluctuation will not be executed.

Here, the selection rate of non-reach A, which is not subject to pre-reading in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) of Figure 25, is 750/1000 regardless of the number of reserved symbols, when the total of fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, and PH1-3 is calculated, which matches the selection rate of pre-reading type A in Figure 26. In other words, in this example, when a non-reach A fluctuation pattern is determined during normal play (first special symbol), the pre-reading effect for that fluctuation is never executed, and all pre-reading judgment results are ID = 0. Also, in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) of Figure 25, only non-reach A is set so that the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern varies depending on the number of reserved symbols. For this reason, in this example, it can be said that within the range of random number values where a fluctuation pattern whose selection rate depends on the number of reserved symbols is selected, all pre-reading judgment results are ID = 0.

Prediction type B (weak prediction) is selected from the fluctuation patterns determined for non-reach (fluctuation patterns PH1-4, PH1-5) targets of prediction during normal play, or N-reach (fluctuation pattern PH6) during a special bonus. When prediction type B is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) prediction effect with a low expectation is executed for that fluctuation.

Prediction type C (medium predictive reading) is selected from the variation patterns determined for N Reach (variation pattern PH2) during normal play, or N Reach B or SP Reach B (variation patterns PH6, PH7) during special play. When predictive type C is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) predictive performance with a medium degree of expectation is executed for that variation.

Prediction type D (strong prediction) is selected from the variation patterns determined for SP Reach or higher during normal play (variation patterns PH3, PH4), or SP Reach D during a special bonus (variation pattern PH8). When prediction type D is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) prediction effect with a high degree of expectation is executed for that variation. Note that prediction effects with different degrees of expectation can be executed depending on prediction types B, C, and D by using different lottery tables for the prediction effect according to the ID of the prediction determination result on the main control board 100, or by changing the prediction effect to a higher-ranking one than the prediction effect that was won using the same table.

In the above example, the variable pattern prediction judgment table in Figure 26 was shown as a common table for normal play and special bonus play, but this embodiment is not limited to this. Different tables may be prepared for normal play and special bonus play, and different tables may be prepared for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Furthermore, a table may be prepared for predicting the variable additional patterns described below.

The presentation mode control means 221 controls the transition of presentation modes based on game state designation commands from the main control board 100, ensuring consistency with the game state and variation pattern selection state managed by the main control board 100. In this embodiment, the three presentation modes include normal presentation mode α, probability variation presentation mode β, and special presentation mode γ. Even if the special symbol variation pattern instructed by the main control board 100 is the same, the variation presentation pattern (described in detail below) that specifies the specific content of the symbol variation presentation is set to be different for each presentation mode. The presentation display device 70 displays a presentation mode notification image (in this embodiment, a background image that displays behind the decorative symbols) that corresponds to the currently active presentation mode. This background image is set to be different for each presentation mode, so the player can recognize which presentation mode they are currently in from the type of background image.

An overview of each presentation mode follows. First, normal presentation mode α is set when the low-probability normal variation state α is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100, and a "normal background" is displayed as the background image. Probability variable presentation mode β is set when the high-probability shortened variation state β is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100, and a "probability variable background" is displayed as the background image. Special presentation mode γ is set when the high-probability special variation state γ is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100. This special presentation mode remains in effect for a limited period of four times immediately after the end of special play, and transitions to probability variable presentation mode β once this limited period has elapsed. If a consecutive win presentation occurs in the reserved mode during special play, a "special background" is displayed as the background image. On the other hand, if a consecutive win presentation does not occur in the reserved mode during special play, i.e., if a continuous win presentation is not being executed, the "probability variable background" common to the probability variable presentation mode is displayed as the background image.

The decorative symbol determination means 224 determines the final combination of decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) by lottery based on the information (variation pattern information, character effect number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. In this embodiment, three symbol rows containing multiple types of decorative symbols are configured. These decorative symbols are formed by identification elements consisting of numbers or letters, for example. In this embodiment, a total of 10 types of identification elements are set, including the numbers "1" to "9" and the letter "S." Each decorative symbol is displayed in a cyclical manner in the left display area, middle display area, and right display area, respectively, in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "8" → "9" → "S" according to the arrangement of the symbol rows.

The decorative symbol determination means 224 holds multiple types of stopping symbol pattern tables that are referenced when determining the stopping symbol combinations (also called "stopping symbol patterns") of decorative symbols by lottery. These multiple types of tables include a stopping symbol pattern table for jackpots, a stopping symbol pattern table for small jackpots, a stopping symbol pattern table for close misses, and a stopping symbol pattern table for non-close misses. The stopping symbols of decorative symbols are formed as combinations of three symbols, including "stopping symbols indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol)" and "stopping symbols indicating a miss (miss symbol)." The jackpot symbol indicating a specific jackpot (probable jackpot) is a stopping combination of three symbols with the same odd numbers (e.g., "7-7-7"). The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable jackpot) is a stopping combination of three symbols with the same even numbers (e.g., "2-2-2"). A losing symbol is a combination of stop patterns in which at least one of the three symbols is a different number from the others (e.g., "1, 3, 8"). Among the losing symbols, a reach-miss symbol is a combination of stop patterns in which the left and right symbols match, but only the center symbol is shifted forward or backward by several frames (e.g., "3, 1, 3"). Note that a "small win (small win symbol)" or a jackpot symbol, such as a 2R jackpot symbol, may result in a predetermined stop pattern combination, such as "3, 5, 7." In this embodiment, "S, S, S" is provided as a special jackpot symbol to definitively indicate a consecutive win within the reserved lottery. When it is determined to execute a consecutive win within the reserved lottery effect and consecutive win effect pattern PA2 is selected, the decorative symbol determination means 224 replaces the normal jackpot symbol (e.g., "3, 3, 3") with the special jackpot symbol (e.g., "S, S, S").

The variable effect determination means 225 determines a variable effect pattern that specifies the variable process (performance process) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to its stop, based on information (variation pattern information) included in the variable start command from the main control board 100. In this embodiment, the symbol variable effect (reach effect) that occurs after a reach display includes a reach effect with simple performance content (normal reach effect) and a reach effect with a progressive performance content (super reach effect). The variable effect determination means 225 holds multiple variable effect pattern tables that are referenced when selecting a variable effect pattern, and selects a variable effect pattern table from these multiple variable effect pattern tables that corresponds to the variable effect pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the variable effect pattern table, the variable effect pattern random number value and the variable effect pattern are associated according to the result of the special symbol variable pattern lottery (i.e., the reach type). Here, the main control board 100 determines a basic pattern of symbol change (e.g., "Normal Reach A," "Super Reach A," etc.) as a change pattern, while the effect control board 200 determines a detailed pattern of symbol change (e.g., "Normal Reach A1, A2, A3...," "Super Reach A1, A2, A3...") that defines a detailed scenario for the effect display process based on the basic pattern as a change effect pattern. In this way, the decorative symbol change effect pattern defines the decorative symbol change display mode, i.e., the scenario for the series of effect display processes from the start to the end of the decorative symbol change, and also specifies the timing for the occurrence of preview effects at each stage during the display process as a time schedule. The stopping order for the decorative symbols is predetermined for each change effect pattern. In this embodiment, the order is generally left → right → center. However, in the case of a short-time fluctuation pattern, the left, middle, and right symbols can be stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a specific fluctuation pattern, the symbols can be stopped in the order left → middle → right. In this case, if the stopping order is not in accordance with the above principle (left → right → middle), the likelihood of a jackpot tends to be relatively higher.

The preview effect determination means 226 determines a preview effect pattern that specifies the content of the preview effect to be executed at each stage of the decorative pattern change process in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern described above. Preview effect patterns include effect patterns that temporarily or gradually display images of specific characters, animations, etc., effect patterns that output specific sounds, and effect patterns that operate movable parts. Preview effects are executed in parallel with the display of decorative pattern changes and provide a preview indication that the pattern change will stop in a jackpot state and there is a high probability of a jackpot. Preview effects include preview effects that are executed before a reach state occurs (including when a reach state occurs) during the decorative pattern change process, and preview effects that are executed after a reach state occurs. Each preview effect has a different jackpot reliability, and generally, preview effects that are displayed after a reach state occurs have a relatively higher jackpot reliability than preview effects that are displayed before a reach state occurs. The preview performance determination means 226 holds preview performance pattern tables for each type of preview performance, which are referenced when selecting a preview performance pattern, and selects a preview performance pattern table corresponding to the type of preview performance that will occur in accordance with the scenario of the variable performance pattern. The preview performance determination means 226 references the preview performance pattern table selected above and selects one of multiple preview performance patterns by lottery based on the preview performance pattern random number value obtained from the performance lottery random number generation means 210. Specific preview performance patterns available include a comment preview performance pattern, a background preview performance pattern, an SU (step-up) preview performance pattern, a group preview performance pattern, a cut-in preview performance pattern, and a movable role preview performance pattern. This preview performance is basically performed by executing one or more preview performances in accordance with the variable display of decorative symbols on the performance display device 70. Therefore, even if the variable display of decorative symbols is based on the same variable performance pattern, a variety of performance styles can be generated by combining one or more preview performances.

The jackpot presentation determination means 227 determines the content of the jackpot presentation (jackpot presentation pattern) that notifies the player that a special game is in progress. The jackpot presentation includes a start demo presentation that notifies the player that a special game is in progress, a round presentation that notifies the player that a round game is in progress, and an end demo presentation that notifies the player that a special game has ended. When the jackpot presentation determination means 227 receives a jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, it determines the jackpot presentation pattern (start demo presentation pattern, round presentation pattern, end demo presentation pattern) based on the jackpot type information stored in the presentation control information storage means 260. This jackpot presentation pattern includes a jackpot start demo presentation time, a round presentation time (presentation time according to the opening pattern of the large prize opening 64), and a jackpot end demo presentation time that are set according to the jackpot type, and a series of presentation contents are set along that time axis. The jackpot presentation determination means 227 executes a start demo presentation in accordance with the jackpot presentation pattern when it receives a jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, executes each round presentation when it receives a round presentation designation command, and executes an end demo presentation when it receives a jackpot end demo command.

Here, in a normal jackpot start demo presentation, for example, the words "Jackpot Start" are displayed on the screen, announcing the start of the special game. In a normal round presentation, for example, the number of rounds currently being played and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the screen, along with various images (animated images, etc.) that add excitement to the special game. In a normal jackpot end demo presentation, for example, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed on the screen, announcing the end of the special game.

As described above, the performance control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined performance content (prediction performance pattern, consecutive win performance pattern, variable performance pattern, advance notice performance pattern, stopping symbol pattern, jackpot performance pattern, etc.), and stores these in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260.

The lamp performance control means 230 controls the lighting and light color of the performance lamps according to the performance content set by the performance management means 220. The lamp performance control means 230 holds multiple types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the performance lamps 10, 25 (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 25), reads out the lamp data corresponding to the determined performance pattern, and transmits this lamp control signal (lamp data) to the lamp connection board 91.

The reel performance control means 240 controls the drive of each movable reel in accordance with the performance content set by the performance management means 220. The reel performance control means 240 holds multiple types of drive data for controlling the drive of the movable reels, and transmits drive control signals (drive data) corresponding to the determined performance pattern to the motor driver 92.

The error presentation control means 250 is configured to determine an error presentation pattern when it receives an error presentation designation command from the main control board 100, and to notify the user that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine in accordance with that error presentation pattern.

The performance control information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store information on decorative patterns, variable performance patterns, preview performance patterns, control commands, etc., and is provided with designated storage areas for storing each piece of information. For example, the command storage area includes a performance control command buffer for storing performance control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, and an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from the image control board 300. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a designated number of performance control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission/reception means 270 is configured to receive performance control commands transmitted from the main control board 100 upon receiving the strobe signal that is also output, and to store these performance control commands in a performance control command buffer. Specifically, the command transmission/reception means 270 executes a reception interrupt process for the performance control command in response to an interrupt that is generated upon receiving a strobe signal from the main control board 100, and acquires various performance control commands during this reception interrupt process. Details of this reception interrupt process for the performance control command will be described later. Note that when the command transmission/reception means 270 receives a strobe signal, it executes the reception interrupt process for the performance control command with priority over other interrupt processes.

The command transmission/reception means 270 transmits image control commands stored in the performance control information storage means 260 to the image control board 300, for example using a serial communication method, to instruct the execution of the performance content (variable performance pattern information, preview performance pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the performance control means 220. As a general rule, the image control commands are transmitted at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this embodiment) in the order set in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260.

As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes the various image control commands sent from the performance control board 200, and causes the performance display device 70 to display a changing performance image including decorative patterns in accordance with the scenario of the changing performance pattern, and also displays preview performances superimposed on the changing pattern performance at each stage of the changing display process. Furthermore, the command transmission/reception means 270 receives the ACK command sent from the image control board 300 and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

<Processing on the main control board>
27 to 48 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the operation processing on the main control board 100. The operation processing on the main control board 100 side mainly includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
27, 28, and 29 are flowcharts each showing an example of main control side main processing executed on the main control board 100. In this main control side main processing, a security check of the main control CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, and then a main control program is started, and processing is executed by this main control program. Note that in the following explanation, the subject of each processing may be omitted as appropriate.

First, as the initial settings required when powering on, the stack pointer is set to the top address as the initial value of the stack area (step S1), and access to the main control RAM 103 is permitted (step S2). Next, a vector table is set that stores the top address of the main control program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs (step S3), and initial values are set in the internal registers of the main control CPU 101 (step S4).

Next, the main control CPU 101 checks the operating state of the setting key switch 100q (step S5). If the setting key switch 100q is on (YES in step S5), it checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch 400q (step S6). If the RAM clear switch 400q is on in step S6 (YES in step S6), it executes a setting change process (step S7). Details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to Figure 30, but after the setting change process is complete, it proceeds to step S13. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is off in step S6 (NO in step S6), it executes a setting confirmation process (step S8). Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to Figure 31, but after the setting confirmation process is complete, it proceeds to step S10.

If the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state in step S5 (NO in step S5), the main control CPU 101 checks the operation state of the RAM clear switch 400q (step S9). If the RAM clear switch 400q is in the ON state in step S9 (YES in step S9), the process proceeds to step S13 to perform a normal RAM clear process that does not involve a setting change. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is in the OFF state in step S9 (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S10 without performing any special process.

In step S10, the main control CPU 101 reads the value of the power-off information flag and determines whether information indicating a normal power-off has been saved (step S10).

If information indicating normal power-off is stored, a checksum is calculated for a specified area of main control RAM 103 (step S11). It is determined whether this checksum is 0, i.e., whether the checksum is normal (step S12). Note that the checksum calculated at power-on includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described below, so if the data has been backed up correctly, the checksum at power-on will be "0". In this way, it is determined at power-on whether the information stored in main control RAM 103 before power-off has been backed up correctly.

If the checksum is normal in step S12 (YES in step S12), the process proceeds to step S16, described below, to restore the state before power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal in step S12 (NO in step S12), or after the setting change process in step S7 is completed, all areas of the main control RAM 103 that are the subject of the initialization process are cleared to zero (step S13). Note that the initialization process in step S13 does not clear specific RAM storage areas to zero. For example, the setting values stored in the setting memory are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process in step S7 are retained.

Next, power-on initialization data is set in the main control RAM 103 (step S14). Next, a performance control command ("performance initialization command") is requested from the performance control board 200 to initialize the performance display device 70, performance lamps 10 and 25, etc. (step S15).

Next, in the power failure recovery setting process, the main control RAM 103 sequentially sets normal power-on information, initializes various errors, and initializes communication with the payout control board 400 (step S16). Here, normal power-on information is set by storing normal power-on data in the power failure information flag to confirm that power was turned on correctly, and turning off the power failure confirmation flag to initialize the power failure information. Next, the data transfer source address, data transfer destination address, and number of transfer bytes are set, and the number of transfer bytes of data is transferred (step S17). The value of the special symbol game status at the time of power failure is read, and power failure recovery processing related to special symbol gameplay is executed (step S18).

Next, a request is made to send a presentation control command ("power failure recovery command") for when the main control board 100 and presentation control board 200 are powered back on (step S19). This power failure recovery command contains information about the communication line inspection, the activation status of the special symbol, the number of probability changes, the number of time-saving events, the number of times the ball is likely to score, the change pattern selection status, and the error status. Any command requests not yet sent before the power failure are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, information about the number of activation pending balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of the power failure is read, and a presentation control command including this information about the number of activation pending balls is requested (step S20).

Next, a reset setting is performed to return the normal electric device 622 to the state it was in before the power was cut off (e.g., the second start opening 62 is open) (step S21). Furthermore, a reset setting is performed to return the special electric device 642 to the state it was in before the power was cut off (e.g., the large prize opening 64 is open) (step S22). Next, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the activation state of the special symbol probability fluctuation function in the event of a power cut is set (step S23). The special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the activation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (step S24). Next, an interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the timer interrupt process from occurring (step S25). Clear word 1 ("55H") is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (step S26).

Next, to determine whether a power outage has occurred, the value of the power outage confirmation flag is read to determine whether a power outage has occurred (step S27). If a power outage has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (step S28). This initial value random number update process updates the initial value random number for a normal symbol, the soft initial value random number for a special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number for a special symbol. Specifically, the value of each counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value set for each random number, it is reset to the minimum value of "0."

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur (step S29), and processing returns to the interrupt prohibition processing described above (step S25), where the loop processing from steps S25 to S29 is repeatedly executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed periodically at a predetermined cycle, and the processing from steps S25 to S29 is repeated using the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing. If an interrupt request is made while interrupts are prohibited, the timer interrupt processing will be initiated when interrupts are permitted in step S29. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is on in step S27, i.e., if a power outage has occurred, processing proceeds to step S30, where the power-off processing described below is executed.

Next, as part of the power-off processing (steps S30-S36), first, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (step S30). Next, it is determined whether the contents of the power-off information flag indicate normal power-on data (step S31). If the power-on information indicates normal power-on, the power-off information flag is set to normal power-off data (step S32). On the other hand, if the power-on information does not indicate normal power-on, the power-off information flag is set to abnormal power-off data (step S33), and processing proceeds to step S36.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a specified area of the main control RAM 103 (excluding the checksum area) (step S34). The complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the resulting value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the main control RAM 103 (step S35). Next, access to the main control RAM 103 is prohibited (step S36), and the process is repeated until the power is cut off.

<Settings change process>
Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The series of processes shown in Fig. 30 shows in detail the setting change process of step S107 in Fig. 27, and is executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

As shown in Figure 30, the main control CPU 101 first checks whether the value in the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored is normal (step S101). If the setting memory value is not normal in step S101 (NO in S101), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S102). Specifically, for example, if "1" to "6" are used as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and if "0" to "5" are used as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. After processing step S102, the process proceeds to step S103. On the other hand, if the setting memory value is normal in step S101 (YES in S101), the process skips step S102 and proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the system transitions to a setting change state. The setting values stored in the setting memory are then displayed on the setting display unit 197 (step S104).

Next, it is checked whether a change has been made using a setting change button (e.g., RAM clear switch 400q) (step S105). If a change has been made using the setting change button (YES in step S105), the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 197 are updated, and the setting values stored in the setting memory are also updated (step S106). If no change has been made using the setting change button (NO in step S105), the processing of step S106 is skipped.

Next, it is confirmed whether the operation state of the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state (step S107). If the determination in step S5 of FIG. 27 is NO and the setting key switch 100q remains in the ON state (NO in step S107), the process returns to step S104 and repeats. On the other hand, if the setting key is returned to its original position and the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state (YES in step S107), the setting display unit 197 is turned off to make the setting value invisible (not displayed) (step S108), and the process returns. As mentioned above, after the return, the process of step S13 in FIG. 27 is performed.

<Settings confirmation process>
Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The series of processes shown in Fig. 31 are a detailed description of the setting confirmation process of step S108 in Fig. 27, and are executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

According to Figure 31, first, the main control CPU 101 displays the setting values stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 197 (step S111).

Then, the main control CPU 101 checks whether the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state (step S112). If the setting key switch 100q remains ON after determining NO in step S5 of FIG. 27 (NO in step S112), the process returns to step S111 and repeats, continuing to display the setting value. On the other hand, if the setting key is returned to its original position and the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state (YES in step S112), the setting display unit 197 is turned off, making the setting value invisible (non-display) (step S113), and then returns. As mentioned above, after returning, the process of step S10 of FIG. 27 is performed.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the first step, frame opening, is included as a condition for transitioning to the setting change process and setting confirmation process described above, in order to enhance security. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 27, when the operation state of the setting key switch 100q is determined to be on (YES in step S5) in step S5, the state of the frame open switch (door open sensor 2p) is also checked, and only if the frame is in an open state (door open) does the machine proceed to step S6. Even if the setting key switch 100q is in the on state in step S5, if the frame is not in an open state (door closed), this indicates a suspected fraud or abnormality. Therefore, the machine does not proceed to step S6, which proceeds to the setting change process (step S7) or setting confirmation process (step S8), but waits until the setting key switch 100q is in the off state. If it is switched to the off state, the machine proceeds to step S9.

<Main control side timer interrupt processing>
Next, the relationship between the various figures for explaining the main control timer interruption processing will be described. First, FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the timer interruption processing executed in the main control board 100. FIGS. 34 and 35 are flowcharts showing details of the start gate monitoring control processing shown in FIG. 32. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control processing shown in FIG. 33, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring processing shown in FIG. 36. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control processing shown in FIG. 33. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the general special symbol control processing shown in FIG. 39. FIGS. 41 to 45 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol variation start processing, special symbol variation processing, and special symbol stop symbol display processing shown in FIG. 40. FIGS. 46 to 48 are flowcharts showing details of the special electric device control processing shown in FIG. 33.

First, the timer interrupt process shown in Figure 32 is executed by interrupting the main control main process when a timer interrupt occurs in response to a clock pulse from the CTC circuit mentioned above at regular intervals (for example, every 4 ms). Note that the terms "condition device" and "continuous device for operating special features" used below refer to conceptual control devices. A "condition device" operates when a jackpot occurs in a special symbol game, and a "continuous device for operating special features" can operate a "special electric feature" multiple times in succession.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main control CPU 101 (data used during main control main processing) are saved to the stack area of the main control RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation conditions are set (step S51). Next, the interrupt operation condition setting value is set in the interrupt control register (step S52). Next, clear word 2 is set (step S53).

Next, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (step S54). At this time, clear word 1 and clear word 2 are written in sequence to the WDT clear register of the main control CPU 101 within the preset timeout period, clearing and restarting the watchdog timer. In other words, when the main control CPU 101 is executing the main control program normally, clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, clearing and restarting the watchdog timer before it times out. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input processing is executed (step S55). In this input processing, information on the various switches connected to the main control board 100, except for the RAM clear switch, is read. That is, input information is read from the first start gate switch 161, second start gate switch 162, activation gate switch 163, large prize gate switch 164, and out ball detection switch 167, as well as the door open switch, frame open switch, back set open switch, magnetic sensor, and radio wave sensor (not shown), and their status is determined before this detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (step S56). In this various random number update process, normal symbol variation pattern random numbers and special symbol variation pattern random numbers that do not use initial value random numbers are updated. For normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0". On the other hand, for special symbol variation pattern random numbers, a predetermined value (e.g., 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the result of the subtraction is less than 0, a predetermined value (e.g., 50,000) is added to the subtraction result.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (step S57). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0". When the counter value has completed one cycle (when it has reached the value set as the initial value), the value of the initial value random number corresponding to the random number value at which the counter value has completed one cycle at that time is set as the new initial value.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (step S58). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value predetermined for each random number, it is reset to the minimum value of "0."

Next, a timer subtraction process is executed (step S59). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used to control the game operation of the gaming machine are subtracted and updated. Note that these timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the special symbol display devices 171, 172, a timer for controlling the operation pattern of the special electric device 642, and timers used for various controls such as normal symbols and normal electric devices.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (step S60). In this second start port validity period setting process, the winning validity period and winning invalidity period for the second start port 62 are determined, and the validity period data or invalidity period data for the second start port 62 is set as the result of this determination.

Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (step S61). In this winning monitoring process, a switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed based on the detection information of the first start gate switch 161, second start gate switch 162, operating gate switch 163, special prize gate switch 164, general prize gate switch 166, and out ball detection switch 167 in the input process described above (step S55). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, a request is made to send a performance control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (step S62). This prize ball control process determines whether the winning prize is valid or invalid, sends a payout control command to the payout control board 400 to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning prize, and performs a communication test with the payout control board 400 by monitoring data received from the payout control board 400.

Next, the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process is executed (step S63). This normal symbol activation gate monitoring process monitors the passage of game balls through gate 63, and if it is determined that a game ball has passed through gate 63, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is obtained as activation pending ball information, the number of activation pending balls is updated up to a maximum of four, and the random number related to the normal symbol lottery is stored.

Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (step S64). In this normal symbol control processing, a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 175 or normal electric device 622 are executed, and depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, normal symbol changing processing, normal symbol stop symbol display processing, normal electric device operation processing, normal electric device operation end demo processing, etc. are executed. Note that in the normal symbol changing processing, normal symbol display pattern number data is created (updated) to display the normal symbol changing or confirmed.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (Step S65). In this normal symbol change start monitoring process, the operating status of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol change start conditions are met, one of the normal symbol activation pending balls is consumed, and the following steps are performed in order: determining whether the normal symbol is correct, determining the symbol, determining the change pattern, setting the change time, etc.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (step S66). This start port monitoring control process monitors the entry of game balls into the first start port 61 and the second start port 62, and when a game ball is detected to have entered, command requests are sequentially made to the performance control board 200, including commands containing information necessary for the performance control board 200, such as updating the number of reserved balls, storing random numbers related to the special symbol lottery, pre-determination for advance notice and the number of symbols stored, etc.

Next, special symbol control processing is executed (step S67). In this special symbol control processing, a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 171, 172 are executed depending on the value of the special symbol game status, such as special symbol change start processing (see step S420 in FIG. 40 described later), special symbol change processing (see step S430 in FIG. 40 described later), and special symbol stop symbol display processing (see step S440 in FIG. 40 described later).

Next, the special electric device control process is executed (step S68). In this process, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big win" or "small win," the operation process related to the special electric device 642 is executed in the following order: setting the start and end of operation of the special electric device 642, updating the opening time and number of times the big prize opening 64 is opened, setting the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function, setting the start of operation of the fluctuation time reduction function, setting the fluctuation pattern selection status, etc.

Next, the special prize opening valid period setting process is executed (step S69). In this special prize opening valid period setting process, the special prize opening 64's valid prize period and invalid prize period are determined, and the special prize opening 64's valid period data or invalid period data is set as the result of this determination.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring and control process is executed (Step S70). In this special symbol change start monitoring and control process, if there is a reserved activation ball for the first special symbol or second special symbol, one reserved ball is consumed, and the following steps are performed in order: request a command for the number of symbols stored, determine whether the special symbol is a hit or miss, determine the symbol of the special symbol, determine the probability variation function, determine the time reduction function, set the activation pattern of the special electric device, and set the demo performance time.

Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (step S71). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information from the input process described above (step S55), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the open/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame open signal, etc. are sequentially inspected to determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If an error state is detected, a presentation control command ("error presentation designation command") containing the error information is generated to request the presentation control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (step S72). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, if the ON signal of the winning detection switch is detected continuously for a predetermined period of time or longer, a ball passing time abnormality is set, a performance control command ("error performance designation command") containing the error information is requested, and a security signal is requested to be output to an external terminal.

Next, the game status display process is executed (step S73). This game status display process creates display data such as the number of times the special electric device 642 has been activated in succession (prescribed number of rounds), the number of activated balls for normal and special symbols, and other information. Display data is also created to display information about the error state detected in the abnormality detection process described above on the status indicator light on the main control board 100.

Next, the steering wheel state signal inspection process is executed (step S74). In this steering wheel state signal inspection process, the steering wheel state signal is inspected.

Next, LED output processing is executed (step S75). In this LED output processing, display data created by the special symbol control processing (step S85), abnormality detection processing (step S89), and game status display processing (step S73) described above is output to the special symbol display devices 171, 172, the normal symbol display device 175, the special symbol hold lamps 173, 174, the normal symbol hold lamp 176, the status indicator lamp on the main control board 100, etc., in order to display special and normal symbols, the number of reserved balls, the number of consecutive activations of the special electric device, and errors, and the displays on these various display devices are initialized.

Next, a launch control signal output process is executed (step S76). In this launch control signal output process, if no communication abnormality or disconnection/short circuit/power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to permit the launch of game balls, whereas if a communication abnormality or disconnection/short circuit/power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of game balls.

Next, the test signal output process is executed (step S77). In this test signal output process, various test data are created and then an error check process is performed. If an error is detected as a result, the various test data are output to each test signal output port.

Next, solenoid output processing is executed (step S78). In this solenoid output processing, excitation signals are output to the electric role solenoids 123 and 124 based on the control data acquired in the normal symbol control processing (step S82) and the special electric role control processing (step S86) to activate the normal electric role 622 and the special electric role 642.

Next, a performance control command transmission process is executed (step S79). In this performance control command transmission process, as described above, the performance control commands stored in the ring buffer specified by the pointer are read out for each MODE data and EVENT data from among the performance control commands stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180, and are transmitted to the performance control board 200 as described below.

Next, an external information output process is executed (step S80). In this external information output process, the gaming machine's operating status information is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer or data counter via the external terminal board.

Next, the saved register contents are restored, and the main control CPU 101 is set to an interrupt-enabled state (step S81). This ends the main control timer interrupt processing, and the main control CPU returns to the main control main processing, which is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a drop in supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main control main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power outage confirmation flag. After returning to the original processing, the previously described power outage processing (steps S27 to S33) is executed.

<Special symbol game processing>
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be explained. The processes related to the special symbol game include the above-mentioned start gate monitoring control process (step S84), special symbol control process (step S85), special electric device control process (step S86), and special symbol variation start monitoring control process (step S88).

<Start port monitoring control process>
34, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 61 (step S201). If a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 61, it is determined whether or not the number of activation balls for the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of four (step S202).

If the number of activated balls for the first special symbol is less than four, the following random numbers are obtained as lottery random numbers for the first special symbol game: a random number value for the special symbol, a random number value for the symbol for the special symbol, and a random number value for the special symbol variation pattern. These random number values are stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of ball entry (step S203). The number of activated balls for the first special symbol is updated by adding 1 to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter (step S204), and the winning check for the first starting port 61 is completed.

Next, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second start opening 62 (step S205). If a game ball has entered the second start opening 62, it is determined whether the number of activated balls for the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of four (step S206). If the number of activated balls for the second special symbol is less than four, the random number value for the special symbol, the random number value for the symbol for the special symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol variation pattern are obtained as the lottery random numbers for the second special symbol game, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of ball entry (step S207). To update the number of activated balls for the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter is incremented by one (step S208), and the winning check for the second start opening 62 is completed.

Next, it is determined whether the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern has been updated, i.e., whether the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern has been increased in step S204 or step S208 (step S209). If the number of pending activation balls has been updated (step S209), a symbol memory number command containing information on the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern and the second special pattern is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is checked to determine whether it is time for a pre-determination (step S211). If it is time for a pre-determination (step S211), the random number value for the special symbol win is read from the win random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and a pre-determination of whether it is a win or a loss is performed (step S212). A pre-determination command containing information on the pre-determination result (win/loss pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S213).

The random number value of the special symbol winning pattern is read from the winning pattern random number buffer in the reserved n memory area, and a preliminary pattern determination is made (step S214). A pattern preliminary determination command containing information on the preliminary determination result (pattern preliminary determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S215). Furthermore, the random number value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is read from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n memory area, and a preliminary fluctuation pattern determination is made (step S216). A fluctuation pattern preliminary determination command containing information on the preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern preliminary determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S217).

<Special symbol variation start monitoring control process>
In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (step S88) shown in Figure 36, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310) described below is executed for the special symbol side of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that satisfies the variation start condition. Note that, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, as described above, as an example, the process on the second special symbol side is executed preferentially.

First, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is occurring (step S301). Next, it is determined whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, i.e., whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting to change)" (step S302).

Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved activation balls for the second special pattern is "0" (step S303). If the number of reserved balls is not "0," it is assumed that the condition for starting the change of the second special pattern is met, and after setting the address of the second special pattern change start monitoring table (the addresses of various tables used in subsequent processes and the address of the RAM storage area) (step S304), the process proceeds to the special pattern change start monitoring process for the second special pattern (step S310). In other words, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved activation ball for the second special pattern, the reserved activation ball for the second special pattern is consumed first, regardless of whether there is a reserved activation ball for the first special pattern. Details of this special pattern change start monitoring process will be explained below using Figures 37 and 38.

On the other hand, if the number of pending activation balls for the second special symbol is "0," it is determined whether the number of pending activation balls for the first special symbol is "0" (step S305). If the number of pending balls is not "0," it is assumed that the condition for starting the change of the first special symbol is met, and after setting the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (the addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (step S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process for the first special symbol (step S310).

If the conditions for starting the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not met (steps S301, S302, S305), the special symbol change start monitoring process (step S310) is omitted.

<Special symbol variation start monitoring process>
In the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310), the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in the above-mentioned step S304 or step S306 is referenced to execute the processing of the special symbol side that is the target of this variation start. Note that, since the processing contents are almost the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, unless otherwise specified, the processing will be explained together without distinguishing between the processing for the first special symbol side and the processing for the second special symbol side.

First, as shown in FIG. 37, the number of activated balls on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation is decremented by 1 (step S311). A symbol memory number command containing information on the number of activated balls for the first and second special symbols after the decrement is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S312). Next, the special symbol reservation storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation is accessed, and the random number values for the special symbol, the symbol random number values for the special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number values stored in the earliest reservation storage area (reserve 1 storage area) are read in order. These random number values are transferred to the special symbol hit/miss determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 for use in the special symbol hit/miss determination process (step S320), the symbol determination process (step S330), and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S423 in FIG. 41, described below) (step S313). To update the reserved memory area, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 to reserved 4 memory areas is shifted sequentially to the reserved 1 to reserved 3 memory areas, and the reserved 4 memory area is cleared to zero (step S314).

Next, the special symbol hit/miss determination process is executed (step S320). In the special symbol hit/miss determination process, first, a special symbol hit/miss lottery table is obtained. At this time, if the gaming state is a special symbol probability variable state, a high-probability hit/miss lottery table is obtained, and if the gaming state is a normal state, a low-probability hit/miss lottery table is obtained. Next, a special symbol hit random number value is read from the special symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. By referring to the special symbol hit/miss lottery table, a hit/miss determination of the special symbol is executed based on the hit random number value. A value corresponding to this hit/miss determination result (big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H") is stored as a special symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180.

Next, a pattern determination process is executed (step S330). In the pattern determination process, the stopping pattern of the special pattern, the type of pattern group, and the character effect number (variable additional pattern information) are determined depending on the result of the win/loss determination. The stopping pattern of the special pattern, the type of pattern group, and the character effect number determined this time are stored in a pattern storage area in the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is determined from a total of 28 patterns based on the combination of the type of pattern group determined (seven patterns of pattern groups A to G) and the operating status of the probability variation function of the special and normal patterns (four patterns: special pattern probability variable on/special pattern probability variable off/normal pattern probability variable on/normal pattern probability variable off). If the result of the win/loss determination is a loss, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination corresponds to a small hit (step S341), and it is also determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination corresponds to a big hit (step S342). If the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S346, whereas if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the process proceeds to step S349.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot, a determination is made as to whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol as the post-special game state based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in step S330 (step S343). That is, if the type of symbol group (jackpot type) indicates a specific symbol, a determination is made to activate the probability fluctuation function, and probability fluctuation activation data (ST count) "64H" is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if the type of symbol group indicates a normal symbol, a determination is made not to activate the probability fluctuation function, and probability fluctuation non-activation data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter (step S344). This determination result is stored in the probability fluctuation determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in step S330, the number of times the variable time reduction function will be activated is determined as the game state after the special game (step S345), and the number of times the electric chute support function will be activated is also determined (step S346). The results of this determination (information on the number of times the variable time reduction function has been activated (hereinafter referred to as "variable time reduction number information") and information on the number of times the electric chute support function has been activated (hereinafter referred to as "easy ball scoring state number information")) are stored in the corresponding time reduction number storage area and easy ball scoring state number storage area of the main information storage means 180, respectively.

Next, based on the type of symbol group (big win type, small win type) determined in step S330, the operation pattern of the special electric device 642 is set (step S347). Specifically, the operation pattern of the special electric device 642 is set to the specified number of rounds for round play (in this embodiment, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, 1.8 seconds), etc.

Next, the variation pattern selection state after the special game ends is set based on the type of symbol group determined in step S330 and the current game state (step S348). While the above explanation illustrates a special variation state determined according to the big win symbol, the variation pattern selection state may also be changed to a special one in step S348 even in the case of a small win. Next, returning to the flow, the special game demo presentation time (win start demo time and win end demo time) is set based on the type of symbol group determined in step S330 (step S349). Next, the special symbol win/loss determination area and special symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the special symbol win/loss determination process (step S320) and the symbol determination process (step S330) are cleared (step S351). The special symbol game status of the special symbol that is the target of this change is transitioned from "00H (standby)" to "01H (change start)" (step S351).

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, the special symbol control process (step S85) shown in Fig. 39 will be described. First, it is determined whether the special electric device 642 is not in operation, that is, whether the special electric device play status is "00H (waiting for a win)" (step S401). Next, if the special electric device 642 is not in operation (step S401), it is determined whether the second special symbol play status is not "00H (waiting)" (step S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)", a second special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and RAM storage area addresses) is set (step S403) to execute processing related to the second special symbol, and the process proceeds to general special symbol control processing (step S410). On the other hand, if the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)", a first special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and RAM storage area addresses) is set (step S404) to execute processing related to the first special symbol, and the process proceeds to general special symbol control processing (step S410).

In the general special symbol control processing described below, the processing of the special symbol that is the subject of this change is carried out using the first or second special symbol control table set in step S403 or step S404 described above. However, since the processing method is the same for both the first and second special symbol sides, unless otherwise specified, the processing will be described together without distinguishing between the processing of the first special symbol side and the processing of the second special symbol side. Details of this general special symbol control processing will be given later.

<Special symbol control general-purpose processing>
In the general special symbol control process (step S410) shown in FIG. 40, branching processes (steps S411 to S414) are executed to transition to a process corresponding to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H"). First, it is determined whether the special symbol game status of the special symbol to be changed this time is 0 (step S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (step S411), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (change started)" (step S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H", the process transitions to the special symbol change start process (step S420). Details of this special symbol change start process will be explained later using FIG. 41. On the other hand, if the special symbol game status is not "01H" in step S412, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (step S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H", the process proceeds to special symbol variable processing (step S430). Details of this special symbol variable processing will be explained later using FIG. 42. If the special symbol game status is not "02H" in step S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (stopped symbol is being displayed)" (step S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H", the process proceeds to special symbol stopped symbol display processing (step S440). Details of this special symbol stopped symbol display processing will be explained later using FIG. 43.

<Special symbol variation start processing>
First, as shown in Fig. 41, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning/losing lottery, the winning symbol, the number of reserved symbols, the type of special symbol, and the variation pattern selection state (step S421). Next, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (step S422). With reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value (step S423).

Next, a change time corresponding to the currently selected change pattern is set (step S424). To set the start of special symbol change, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 155 (step S425), and a change start command is generated for the performance control board 200 (step S426). As the change start command, a change pattern designation command and a symbol designation command are generated in order to start the symbol change performance in the performance display device 70, and these are stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

Next, the contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used to determine the fluctuation pattern are cleared (step S427). The special symbol game status is transitioned from "01H (fluctuation started)" to "02H (fluctuation in progress)" (step S428).

<Special pattern change processing>
First, as shown in Fig. 42, in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed (step S431). In this display pattern number switching process, the display pattern number data of the special symbol is updated at every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 in an LED output process (step S76) in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner or a fixed manner, and a display indicating that the special symbol is being changed is executed by flashing a specific display unit on the special symbol display device during the variable display at every predetermined switching time, or by sequentially lighting up individual LEDs of the display unit.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)," i.e., whether the special symbol variation time has expired (step S432). If the special symbol variation time has expired, the stop symbol of the special symbol to be displayed as confirmed is set on the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 (step S433). Next, a variation stop command is generated to instruct the performance control board 200 to display the decorative symbol as confirmed, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S434).

Next, the special symbol game timer is set to "125," which corresponds to 500 ms as the confirmed display time (step S435). Note that the "confirmed display time" is the time required for the stopped symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol when the special symbol stops changing. The special symbol game status is transitioned from "02H (changing)" to "03H (stopped symbol displayed)" (step S436).

<Processing during display of special symbol stop symbol>
43, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)," i.e., whether the fixed display time of the special symbol (stopped symbol) has expired (step S441). If the fixed display time of the special symbol has expired, the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying stopped symbol)" to "00H (standby)" (step S442).

Next, it is determined whether the hit/miss determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180 is jackpot data "55H" (step S443). If the hit/miss determination data is jackpot data, the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (step S444), the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function is stopped (step S445), and the operation of the electric chute support function is stopped (step S446), in that order.

Next, as part of the special game start demo setting process, the start demo display time is set and a presentation control command (jackpot start demo command) is generated to instruct the start demo presentation to begin (step S447). Next, the number of times the variable pattern selection state has been executed (variable pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (step S448). The special electric device play status is transitioned from "00H (waiting for win)" to "01H (special game)" (step S449). The win/loss determination flag is set to "00H" to clear the contents (step S450).

On the other hand, if the hit/miss determination data is not jackpot data (step S443), it is determined whether the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol is in operation (step S451). As shown in FIG. 44, if the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol is in operation (step S451), the probability fluctuation count counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated this time (step S452). Next, it is determined whether the probability fluctuation count counter is zero (step S453). If the probability fluctuation count counter is zero, the operation of the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol is stopped (step S454). On the other hand, if the probability fluctuation count counter after the decrement is not zero, step S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S455.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is in operation (step S455). If the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is in operation, the time reduction counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated this time (step S456). Next, it is determined whether the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). If the time reduction counter is zero, it is determined that the number of times the special symbol time reduction state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is stopped (step S458). On the other hand, if the time reduction counter after decrement is not zero, step S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S459.

Next, it is determined whether the electric chute support function is operating (step S459). If the electric chute support function is operating, the easy-to-score state counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has changed this time (step S460). Next, it is determined whether the easy-to-score state counter is zero (step S461). If the easy-to-score state counter is zero, it is determined that the number of times the easy-to-score state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the electric chute support function is stopped (step S462). On the other hand, if the easy-to-score state counter after the decrement is not zero, step S462 is skipped and the program proceeds to step S463.

Next, the variation pattern selection state count counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (step S463). The variation pattern selection state is updated (step S464). Specifically, the variation pattern selection state count counter in the main information storage means 180 is referenced to determine whether the number of times the current variation pattern selection state has been executed has reached a preset number of terminations, and if so, the state switches to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the number of terminations has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated that includes the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in steps S451 to S464 described above, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S465). The presentation control board 200 then sets and updates the presentation mode based on the information in this game state designation command.

Next, it is determined whether small win data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (step S466). If small win data is stored, the start demo display time is set as the start demo setting process for small win gameplay, and a performance control command (small win start demo command) is generated to instruct the start demo performance to begin (step S467). Next, the special electric device play status is transitioned from "00H (waiting for win)" to "02H (small win gameplay)" (step S468). The win/loss determination flag is set to "00H" to clear the contents (step S469).

On the other hand, if the small win data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag, i.e., if the loss data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, steps S467 to S469 are omitted. Note that if the special symbol determination flag is loss data, the process of clearing the contents of the flag is not performed because the loss data "00H" is originally stored in the special symbol determination flag.

<Special electric device control processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the special electric device play status is "01H (special game: jackpot)" (step S501). If the special electric device play status is "01H", special game processing is executed in the subsequent processing. In this special game processing, it is first determined whether the special electric device 642 is in operation (step S502). If the special electric device 642 is not in operation, it is determined whether it is time to start operating the special electric device 642 (step S503). The operation start time of the special electric device 642 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric device 642 starts in each round of play.

If it is time for the special electric device 642 to start operating, a performance control command (round performance designation command) is generated to start the round performance, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S504). The performance control board 200 executes the round performance corresponding to each round of play during the special game based on the information in this round performance designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). The operation of the special electric device 642 is initiated (step S505), and steps S506 to S510 are executed as processing during the operation of the special electric device 642.

As processing during operation of the special electric device 642, it is determined whether the maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 64 (step S506), and it is also determined whether the operation time (open time) of the special electric device 642 has elapsed (step S507). At this time, if the maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 64 or if the operation time of the special electric device 642 has elapsed, the operation of the special electric device 642 is stopped (step S508). It is determined whether the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 642 has reached a predetermined specified number of rounds (step S509). If the number of consecutive operations has not reached the specified number of rounds, the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 642 is incremented by 1 (step S510).

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 642 has reached the specified number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S511 shown in FIG. 47, where the special game hit end demo setting process sets the end demo display time and generates a presentation control command (jackpot end demo command) that instructs the start of the end demo presentation (step S511).

Next, the probability change count information set in step S344 above is stored in the probability change count counter (step S512). The time reduction count information set in step S345 above is stored in the time reduction count counter (step S513). The easy goal scoring state count information set in step S346 above is stored in the easy goal scoring state count counter (step S514).

Next, by referring to the contents of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in step S343, it is determined whether the probability fluctuation count information stored in the probability fluctuation count counter is probability fluctuation function data ("64H") (step S515). If the probability fluctuation count information is probability fluctuation function data, the operation of the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol is initiated (step S516). On the other hand, if the probability fluctuation count information is not probability fluctuation function data (if step S515 is NO), execution of step S516 is omitted.

Next, it is determined whether the variable time reduction count information stored in the time reduction count counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (step S517). If it is variable time reduction function activation data, operation of the variable time reduction function for the special symbol is initiated (step S518). On the other hand, if it is not variable time reduction function activation data, execution of step S518 is omitted.

Next, it is determined whether the easy-to-score state count information stored in the easy-to-score state count counter is electric chute support function activation data (data other than "00H") (step S519). If it is electric chute support function activation data, the electric chute support function is activated (steps S520 to S522). That is, the normal symbol probability variation function is activated (step S520), the normal symbol variation time reduction function is activated (step S521), and the opening extension function of the normal electric device 622 is activated (step S522), in that order. On the other hand, if it is not electric chute support function activation data, steps S520 to S522 are omitted.

Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in step S347 (step S523). Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated, including the post-special game game state information and variation pattern selection state information set in steps S512 to S523, and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S524). The presentation control board 200 sets the post-special game presentation mode based on the information in this game state designation command. The special electric device game status is transitioned from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for win)" (step S525).

On the other hand, if the special electric device play status is not "01H" (step S501), the process proceeds to step S530, where it is determined whether the special electric device play status is "02H (special play: small win play)" (step S530). If the special electric device play status is "02H", small win play processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

In the small win game processing, first, it is determined whether the special electric device 642 is in operation (step S531). If the special electric device 642 is not in operation, operation of the special electric device 642 begins (step S532). On the other hand, if the special electric device 642 is in operation, execution of step S532 is omitted.

Next, as processing during operation of the special electric device 642, it is determined whether the maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 64 (step S533), and it is also determined whether the operation time (open time) of the special electric device 642 has elapsed (step S534). At this time, if the maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 64 or if the operation time of the special electric device 642 has elapsed, the operation of the special electric device 642 is stopped (step S535).

Next, as part of the end demo setting process for the small win game, the end demo display time is set and a presentation control command (small win end demo command) is generated to instruct the start of the end demo presentation (step S536). Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in step S347 above (step S537). Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated that includes the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in step S537, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S538). This game state designation command is used on the presentation control board 200 side, for example, to determine the trigger for transitioning between presentation modes and to identify the presentation mode to transition to. The special electric device play status is transitioned from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for win)" (step S539).

<Processing on the performance control board>
Next, the processing procedure on the performance control board 200 side will be explained with reference to Figures 49 to 57. Note that, although the main focus below is the performance control program, the main focus will be omitted as appropriate. The processing on the performance control board 200 side includes reset start processing (including performance control side main processing) that is executed when the performance control CPU 201 is reset, such as after power is turned on, performance control side timer interrupt processing that is started at regular intervals, performance control command reception interrupt processing that is executed in response to the receipt of a strobe signal from the main control board 100, lamp performance interrupt processing that is started in response to the arrival of a predetermined occurrence time defined in the time schedule of the variable performance pattern, and image control command transmission interrupt processing that is started in regular intervals.

Each interrupt process (exception process) has a priority level that indicates its priority when multiple interrupt processes occur simultaneously. In this embodiment, the priority levels are assigned in the following order: "Reset start process due to power reset (Fig. 49): highest priority," "Reset start process due to various abnormalities (Fig. 49): highest priority," "Performance control command reception interrupt process (Fig. 57): level 7," "WDT (runaway detection) reset start process (Fig. 49): level 3," "Image control command transmission interrupt process (Fig. 50): level 2," and "Performance control timer interrupt process (Fig. 56): level 1." Note that "Reset start process due to various abnormalities" is initiated, for example, when the performance control CPU 201 executes an invalid command, when the performance control CPU 201 attempts to access an invalid area or by an invalid method, or when an error occurs during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer. While this embodiment illustrates the above multiple types of interrupt processes, other types of interrupt processes may actually exist.

The main processing on the performance control side basically proceeds with all interrupts prohibited, or with all interrupts other than the performance control command reception interrupt prohibited. If the main processing on the performance control side then enters an interrupt-enabled state, the main processing is suspended and each interrupt processing is executed. When a request for another interrupt processing occurs during the execution of each interrupt processing (multiple interrupts occur), the interrupt request is generally permitted if it has a higher priority than the currently executing interrupt processing. However, if the interrupt processing has a lower priority than the currently executing interrupt processing or the same priority level as the currently executing interrupt processing, the interrupt request is prohibited. In other words, each interrupt processing proceeds with other interrupts of the same or lower priority level prohibited. Each interrupt processing returns to the main processing on the performance control side with all interrupts permitted. The priority (priority level) of such interrupt causes is determined by the register settings of the interrupt controller described above.

<Reset start processing>
49 is a flowchart showing an example of the reset start process of the performance control board 200. This reset start process is started by resetting when the power is turned on, resetting due to various abnormalities, or resetting due to WDT (when a runaway is detected), and after a security check of the performance control CPU 201 is performed, the program starts and processing from step S801 onwards begins.

First, as an initial setting required when powering on, the stack pointer is set to the top address as the initial value of the stack area (step S801). All interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are complete (step S802).

Next, as basic hardware settings, initial values are set in the built-in registers provided in the performance control CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (step S803). Furthermore, the memory area in the performance control RAM 203 is initialized (step S804). Here, initial values are set for variables with initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by clearing them to 0. The performance control CPU 201 appropriately deploys the control program stored in the performance control ROM 202 to the performance control RAM 203.

Next, all interrupts other than the interrupt process for receiving the performance control command are prohibited (step S805). Next, a process is executed to set the type of error that should be enabled for that model from the various errors that have been set in advance for each model (step S806). Furthermore, a light-off request is issued to turn off all performance lamps 10 and 25 (frame lamp 10, board lamp 25) (step S807). A watchdog timer is activated to monitor for runaway of the performance control CPU 201 (step S808).

Next, the performance control side main processing is executed (step S809). Details of this performance control side main processing are explained using Figure 50. Note that once the performance control side main processing is entered in the aforementioned step S809, it is not normally possible to return to the reset start processing. However, in the unlikely event that a program bug or similar occurs and the system returns to this reset start processing, the system will transition to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced compared to normal operation.

<Main processing on the performance control side>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing details of the performance control side main processing (step S809) shown in FIG.

First, the main processing on the performance control side obtains the address (the starting address where the performance control program is deployed) to start checking whether the performance control program is correctly deployed in the performance control RAM 203 (step S811). Next, all interrupts are permitted, i.e., various interrupt processes are permitted to be started (step S812).

Next, the device initialization operation is performed (step S813). This initialization operation is performed only once when the gaming machine is powered on (when the reset begins), and is performed for the purpose of confirming the position information required to control the operation of the movable parts using devices such as motors and solenoids. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable parts return to their pre-set initial position (reference position).

Next, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart it (step S814). At this time, if the performance control CPU 201 is executing the performance program normally, a specified clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the performance control CPU 201 within a preset timeout period, clearing and restarting the watchdog timer. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input port check processing is executed (step S815). In this input port check processing, the reading of the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) is monitored each time an interrupt occurs during the port input/output processing (step S1112) in the performance control timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 56), which will be described later. After multiple (e.g., four) monitoring sessions, if the input port status is all "1", the signal level is changed to "1 (H level)". If the input port status is all "0", the signal level is changed to "0 (L level)". If the input port status is anything other than this, the signal level is not changed (this determines the input signal).

Next, the error presentation management process is executed (step S816). This error presentation management process initiates error presentations using various devices based on the error presentation pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). Furthermore, the error presentation management process sets an initial value (error presentation time) in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error presentation. This error management timer is updated and decremented every 16 ms in the error management timer update process (step S1120) of the presentation control timer interrupt process. If the error management timer times out, the error presentation is terminated.

Next, the effect button monitoring and control process is executed (step S817). In this effect button monitoring and control process, if a button preview effect is incorporated during the pattern change, the input state of the effect button 15 during the valid operation time is monitored, and the effect content corresponding to the input state of the effect button 15 is determined from multiple effect contents pre-set according to the button preview effect. The button input operation by the player itself is monitored in the port input process (step S1112) in the effect control timer interrupt process described below, and the effect button monitoring and control process determines whether a flag indicating a valid button operation or a flag for effect switching is set, and controls the execution of the effect based on the button press.

Next, a preview lottery management process is executed (step S818). In this preview lottery management process, a preview performance pattern (preview performance number) that defines the content of the preview performance that occurs at each stage of the decorative pattern fluctuation process is determined by lottery in accordance with the scenario of the fluctuation performance pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). The preview performance number determined here is temporarily stored in the preview performance number storage area of the performance control information storage means 260. An image control command is generated to specify this preview performance number to the image control board 300, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the performance control information storage means 260. At this time, if a role preview performance pattern (role preview performance number) is selected as the preview performance pattern, a role request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable role object is identified in the subsequent device management process (step S819). In this embodiment, rather than drawing lots for all of the multiple preview effects (preview effect patterns) that occur within one decorative pattern change within a single main loop, in order to improve the efficiency of the main loop processing, the preview effects are divided into periods when they occur (for example, the change start stage, the reach occurrence stage, the change stop stage, and when the effect button 15 is operated effectively), and drawn across multiple main loop processing. In this case, for preview effects that occur at the decorative pattern change start stage, they must be synchronized with the start of the decorative pattern change (the image control command must be sent immediately), so the drawing is carried out within the main loop processing described above.

Next, the device management process is executed (step S819). In this device management process, if a request for device operation (lamp request, prop request) is received in the command analysis process (step S820) described below, the device management process identifies the pattern data corresponding to the prop number (lamp prop number, prop preview prop number) from among the multiple types of pattern data (lamp patterns, drive patterns) stored in the performance control ROM 202, and begins control of the target device. The lamp pattern data for the performance lamps 10 and 25 contains lamp data associated with each frame time (16 ms, the time required to update one image frame) as schedule data. In this embodiment, one frame time corresponds to the time required to process one frame when the performance display device 70 is drawing at approximately 60 frames per second (approximately 60 fps). Similarly, the drive pattern data for the movable props contains drive data associated with each interrupt period (1 ms) as schedule data. As a result, in the performance control timer interrupt process described below, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals, causing the target device to begin operation. Meanwhile, in the performance control timer interrupt process described below, when the output of all control data (lamp data, drive data) is complete, the performance lamps 10 and 25 are turned off, or the operation of the movable props is stopped, and control of the target device is terminated.

Next, a command analysis process (step S820) is executed. This command analysis process monitors whether a performance control command is stored in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260, and if a performance control command is stored, this performance control command is read out and performance control processing corresponding to the type of this performance control command is executed. Details of this command analysis process will be explained later using Figure 51.

During the loop processing of the main effect processing for the current cycle, it is determined whether or not analysis of the effect control command (hereinafter referred to as "command analysis") has been performed (step S821). If command analysis has been performed, the process returns to step S814, and steps S814 to S821 are repeatedly performed. On the other hand, if command analysis has not been performed, an effect lottery random number update process is performed (step S822). This effect lottery random number update process updates effect lottery random numbers such as the pre-reading notice lottery random number, decorative pattern random number, variable effect pattern random number, and notice effect pattern random number. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value.

<Command analysis process>
Fig. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (step S820) shown in Fig. 50. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the performance control command held in the output port of the main control board 100 has been taken into the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 as shown below, and if the performance control command has been taken in and stored, it executes a performance control process corresponding to the type of this performance control command.

First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S831). If a game state designation command is stored, the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (step S832). In this effect state transition process, a process to transition the effect mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command. Details of this effect state transition process will be explained later using Figure 52.

Next, it is determined whether a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 (step S833). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol memory count command and a pre-determination command. If such a hold-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the hold information management process (step S834). In this hold information management process, the symbol memory count command or pre-determination command is read from the performance control information storage means 260, and a pre-reading determination is made based on the information from the pre-determination result, as well as processing to update the number of hold images displayed and the display mode (display color, etc.) displayed on the hold display section (not shown) of the performance display device 70.

Next, it is determined whether a pattern change-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S835). Here, the pattern change-related command includes a change start command and a change stop command. If a pattern change-related command is stored, the process proceeds to a change effect content determination process (step S836). In this change effect content determination process, if the received pattern change-related command is a change start command, a process is executed to start the pattern change effect, and if the received pattern change-related command is a change stop command, a process is executed to end the ongoing pattern change effect. Details of this change effect content determination process will be explained using Figure 53 below.

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S837). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demo effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demo effect command. If a jackpot effect-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (step S838). In this jackpot effect content determination process, processing is carried out to execute the start demo effect, round effect, and end demo effect. Details of this jackpot effect content determination process will be explained later using Figures 54 and 55.

Next, it is determined whether or not a small win effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S839). Here, small win effect-related commands include a small win start demo effect command and a small win end demo effect command. If a small win effect-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the small win effect content determination process (step S840). In this small win effect content determination process, processing is carried out to execute the small win start demo effect and the small win end demo effect.

Next, it is determined whether an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S841). If this error effect designation command is stored, the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (step S842). In this error effect content determination process, the error effect designation command is read from the effect control information storage means 260, and an error effect pattern for notifying an error state is determined by the image displayed on the effect display device 70, the light emission mode of the effect lamps 10 and 25, etc.

If no effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S831, S833, S835, S837, S839, or S841, the command analysis process is terminated. The loop process of the effect control main process (steps S814 to S822) is synchronized with the image display cycle (1 frame = 16 ms) of the image control CPU 301, so the command analysis process of step S821 and the effect lottery random number update process of step S822 are repeatedly executed, and if 16 ms is exceeded, the process returns to step S814.

<Rendering state transition processing>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the rendering state transition process (step S832) shown in FIG.

First, the game state designation command from the main control board 100 is analyzed, and information regarding the variation pattern selection state contained in the command is obtained (step S901). Next, based on the information regarding the variation pattern selection state obtained in step S901, it is determined whether a trigger for transitioning to a presentation mode has arrived (step S902). If a trigger for transitioning to a presentation mode has arrived, a transition to a specified presentation mode is set in step S903 and subsequent steps. The triggers for transitioning to a presentation mode are generally linked to the activation of the probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chute support function after the end of a special game, as well as the transition trigger for the variation pattern selection state. For example, this occurs when a special game ends or when the number of times the variation pattern selection state has ended is reached. The number of times the variation pattern selection state has ended is the number of times the special symbol has changed.

First, it is determined whether the destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state managed by the main control board 100 is the low-probability normal fluctuation state α (step S903). If the destination is the low-probability normal fluctuation state α, the normal fluctuation mode Mα is set as the destination of the transition of the presentation mode (step S904). Upon transition to this normal fluctuation mode Mα, a normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the presentation control information storage means 260 (step S905). In the normal fluctuation mode Mα, a normal background image representing, for example, a "wildness" is displayed on the presentation display device 70 from the next pattern fluctuation. On the other hand, if the destination is not the low-probability normal fluctuation state α (step S903), it is determined whether the destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β (step S906). If the destination is the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β, the guaranteed variable fluctuation mode Mβ is set as the destination of the transition of the presentation mode (step S907). When the game transitions to this probability variation mode A, a probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S908). In probability variation mode Mβ, from the next symbol change, a probability variation background image representing, for example, a "fortress" is displayed on the effect display device 70.

If the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is not the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β (step S906), it is determined whether the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high-probability special fluctuation state γ (step S909). If the transition destination is the high-probability special fluctuation state γ, the special fluctuation mode Mγ is set as the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state (step S910). Next, it is determined whether the special continuous fluctuation flag in the fluctuation control information storage means 260 is ON (step S911). The special continuous fluctuation flag is a flag that is ON when a special continuous fluctuation is executed. If the special continuous fluctuation flag is ON, a special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the fluctuation control information storage means 260 (step S912). In the special fluctuation mode Mγ, a special background image representing, for example, a "starry sky" is displayed on the fluctuation display device 70 from the next pattern fluctuation. On the other hand, if the special continuous fluctuation flag is OFF, a probability fluctuation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the fluctuation control information storage means 260 (step S913). In special effect mode Mγ, a variable probability background image (substantially the same background image as in variable probability effect mode Mβ) representing, for example, a "fortress" is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol change. Next, an image control command is generated to instruct the display of the effect content (background image) determined in this process, and this is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S921). In addition, there are also changes in the effect mode that are determined by the effect control board 200, rather than based on the game state of the main control board 100. For example, when the normal game state (low probability/low base) on the main control board 100 has continued for a predetermined number of times, when a pre-reading lottery for executing a special effect mode is won, or when a timer value or RTC circuit measuring the elapsed time since power-on has determined that a predetermined time has arrived, a special effect is executed.

<Variable performance content determination process>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the details of the variable presentation content determination process (step S836) shown in FIG.

First, it is determined whether a fluctuation start command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S931). If a fluctuation start command is stored, the contents of this fluctuation start command (fluctuation pattern designation command, variable additional symbol information designation command, character effect number designation command) are analyzed, and information contained in the contents of this command indicating the result of the winning/losing lottery, symbol group, fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), game status, etc. is obtained (step S932). This obtained information is stored in the fluctuation effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260.

Next, a variable presentation pattern selection process is executed (step S933). In this variable presentation pattern selection process, a variable presentation pattern table is obtained based on the variable presentation pattern information obtained in step S932 and the presentation mode set in the presentation state transition process in step S832. A variable presentation pattern random number value is obtained from the presentation lottery random number generation means 210, and one of the variable presentation patterns is selected by lottery from among multiple variable presentation patterns. The variable presentation pattern constitutes a scenario for the presentation display process that specifies the variation mode of the decorative symbols, the type and occurrence time of reach presentations, and the type and occurrence time of preview presentations. The variable presentation pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variable presentation pattern storage area of the presentation control information storage means 260. A lamp presentation number corresponding to the selected variable presentation pattern number is requested, and this requested lamp presentation number is set in the lamp request storage area of the presentation control information storage means 260.

Next, a decorative symbol stopping symbol selection process is executed (step S934). In this decorative symbol stopping symbol selection process, the final decorative symbol stopping symbol combinations (left symbol, center symbol, right symbol) are determined by lottery based on the symbol group information and variation pattern information acquired in step S932. The decorative symbol combination numbers determined here are temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the performance control information storage means 260.

Next, the pre-read information storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 is updated by shifting the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 memory area to the reserved 4 memory area to a lower reserved memory area, and clearing the reserved 4 memory area to zero (step S935).

Based on the effect information acquired in steps S933 to S935, an image control command (variation effect start command) required to start the decorative pattern variation is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S939).

On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command is not stored (step S931), it is determined whether a fluctuation stop command is stored in the performance control information storage means 260 (step S940). If a fluctuation stop command is stored (step S940), the contents of the fluctuation stop command are analyzed, and the pattern stop information contained in the contents of this command is obtained (step S941). An image control command (fluctuating performance stop command) required to stop the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 (step S942).

<Jackpot performance content determination process>
54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the details of the big win presentation content determination process (step S836) shown in FIG.

First, it is determined whether a start demo command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1001). If a start demo command is stored, the contents of the start demo command are analyzed, and information indicating the type of jackpot, etc., contained in the contents of this command is obtained (step S1002). This obtained information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, a consecutive win counter for counting the number of consecutive wins is updated (step S1003). Specifically, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot (referred to as a "first win"), the consecutive win counter is set to "1", and if it is a consecutive win, the consecutive win counter is incremented by "1".

Next, a jackpot presentation pattern selection process is executed to determine the contents of the jackpot presentation pattern (start demo presentation pattern, round presentation pattern, end demo presentation pattern) (step S1004). In this jackpot presentation pattern selection process, a jackpot presentation pattern table (not shown) is obtained, and a jackpot presentation pattern random number value is obtained from the presentation lottery random number generation means 210, and one of the jackpot presentation patterns is determined by lottery from among multiple jackpot presentation patterns. The jackpot presentation pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the jackpot presentation pattern storage area of the presentation control information storage means 260. This jackpot presentation pattern number includes, for example, a start demo pattern number, a round presentation pattern number, and an end demo pattern number.

Next, a process for determining whether a consecutive win effect will occur within the reserved balls is executed (step S1005). In this process, if there is a reserved ball that will result in a jackpot in the game state after the jackpot ends (particularly in a special probability game state) within the reserved balls that exist when the jackpot game is executed, a determination is made as to whether a consecutive win effect within the reserved balls can be executed, and if it is determined that a consecutive win effect will be executed within the reserved balls, a special consecutive win effect flag is turned on and a consecutive win effect pattern is selected.

Next, the jackpot effect replacement process is executed (step S1006). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when a consecutive win effect (special consecutive win effect) is executed within the reserved ball, the normal start demo effect pattern and the normal end demo effect pattern are replaced with a special start demo effect pattern and a special end demo effect pattern. Note that in this embodiment, the target of the pre-reading judgment in the consecutive win effect within the reserved ball is the subsequent activated reserved ball that exists at the start of the special game (at the end of the corresponding variation) when the preceding activated reserved ball results in a jackpot. Therefore, even if the activated reserved ball generated during the special game is a specific reserved ball, the consecutive win effect determination process within the reserved ball (step S1005) and the replacement process (step S1006) are not executed. However, if a specific reserved ball occurs during the special game, the consecutive win effect determination process within the reserved ball and the replacement process may be executed even during the special game, and the jackpot effect data set at the start of the special game may be replaced.

The start demo effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 above is transferred to the start demo effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, and the start of the start demo effect is set (step S1007).

Next, it is determined whether a round effect designation command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1011). If a round effect designation command is stored (step S1007), the contents of the round effect designation command are analyzed, and information indicating the number of rounds and the number of wins into the special prize opening 64 included in the contents of this command is obtained (step S1012). This obtained information is stored in a jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, based on the information obtained in step S1012, the round number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1013), and the special prize number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1014). In this embodiment, since 14 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball enters the special prize opening 64, the number of prize balls won is calculated by multiplying the number of wins into the special prize opening 64 by 14.

Next, it is determined whether the pseudo count flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1015). The pseudo count flag is a flag that is turned on when a pseudo count effect is executed, in which the number of rounds and the number of prize balls won in the previous special game are added to the number of rounds and the number of prize balls won in the subsequent special game and announced. If the pseudo count flag is on, that is, if a round effect (pseudo count effect) is scheduled to be executed for the subsequent jackpot, a round number pseudo addition process is executed (step S1016). In this round number pseudo addition process, the number of round games executed in the previous special game (number of rounds: 10R) is added to the number of round games executed (number of rounds: 1R to 10R) stored in the round number counter. As a result, the first round of round play in the subsequent special game is announced as the 11th round of round play in the special consecutive effect.

Next, a pseudo-addition process for the number of prize balls acquired is executed (step S1017). In this pseudo-addition process, the number of prizes entered into the large prize slot in the previous special game is added to the number of prizes stored in the large prize counter. As a result, in the special consecutive presentation, the number of prize balls acquired in the subsequent special game is announced as the total number of prize balls acquired in the previous and subsequent special games.

The round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 above is transferred to the round effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, along with the values of the round number counter and the jackpot number counter, to set the start of the round effect (step S1018).

Next, it is determined whether an end demo command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1021). If an end demo command is stored, the contents of the end demo command are analyzed, and the information contained in the contents of this command is obtained (step S1022). This obtained information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, it is determined whether the special consecutive effect flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1023), and it is determined whether to execute a consecutive win effect within the reserve. If the special consecutive effect flag is on, the value of the round number counter (number of rounds) and the value of the big prize number counter (number of big prizes) are temporarily stored in the jackpot memory area ahead of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1024). This is because, if the current jackpot corresponds to a previous jackpot in a special consecutive effect, the final number of rounds and number of jackpots from the previous jackpot are intended to be used in the pseudo-addition process (steps S1016 and S1017) in the subsequent jackpot effect, and are therefore stored as recorded information for the previous special game. Therefore, in the pseudo-addition process in steps S1016 and S1017, the values (number of rounds and number of jackpots) stored in the previous jackpot memory area are added. Next, the round number counter and jackpot number counter in the effect control information storage means 260 are cleared (steps S1025 and S1026).

Next, it is determined whether the pseudo count flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1027). If the pseudo count flag is on, the pseudo count flag is turned off (step S1028). Next, it is determined whether the reserved consecutive win effect flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1035). If the reserved consecutive win effect flag is on, the reserved consecutive win effect flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is turned off (step S1036).

Next, the end demo effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 above is transferred to the end demo effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, setting the start of the end demo effect (step S1037). Based on the effect information acquired in steps S1005, S1007, S1018, and S1037 above, an image control command required for the jackpot effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1038).

<Timer interrupt processing on the performance control side>
56 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing on the performance control side. This timer interrupt processing is started by a clock pulse at regular intervals and is executed to interrupt the main processing on the performance control side described above.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the performance control CPU 201 are saved to the stack area of the performance control RAM 203, and then the processing from step S1111 onwards is executed sequentially. During this timer interrupt processing, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher, such as performance control command reception interrupts from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupts, are permitted (step S1111).

Next, port input/output processing is executed (step S1112). In this port input/output processing, input processing of input data and output processing of output data are executed using the I/O port circuit 204. In the input processing, various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 are read and stored as input information. On the other hand, in the output processing, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the performance control information storage means 260 are read and output from the I/O port circuit 204.

Next, device control data output processing is executed (step S1113). In this device control data output processing, drive data for a predetermined time period is read from the drive pattern data identified in the device management processing (step S819) described above, and set in the drive data storage area of the performance control information storage means 260. The drive data set in this processing is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt period. Once the drive data is set in this processing, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in this device control data output processing, the drive data is switched every interrupt period (1 ms) in accordance with the drive pattern data.

Next, a performance timer update process is executed (step S1114). In this performance timer update process, the values of various performance timers used to control performance operation are updated by subtracting them at an interrupt period (e.g., 1 ms). Performance timers include a timer for managing the variable time of decorative symbols and a timer for managing the timing of preview performance occurrences. These performance timers manage the time schedule for the variable performance pattern, and manage the timing of the operation of movable parts and the lighting of performance lamps 10 and 25 on this time axis. The performance timers are also used in the device control data output process (step S1113) and lamp data update process (step S1118) within this performance control timer interrupt process.

Next, the button control timer update process is executed (step S1115). The value of the valid time management timer, which manages the valid operation time of the effect button 15, is updated by subtracting it at the interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The valid operation time is the time during which operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

Next, the task control counter update process is executed (step S1117). In this task control counter update process, the task counter value ("0" to "15") is updated at each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the task counter value is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the task counter value is "15", it is reset to "0". In other words, this task counter can have a cyclic cycle of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processes) are assigned corresponding to the updated task counter value, and various processes such as the lamp control task (lamp data update process in step S1118), runaway monitoring task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in step S1119), and error management task (error management timer update process in step S1120) are executed depending on the task counter value. In this embodiment, of the task counter values ("0" to "15"), one value is assigned to the lamp control task, the other two values (values spaced 8 ms apart from each other) are assigned to the runaway monitoring task, and one value is assigned to the error management task (description of the other tasks is omitted). As mentioned above, the task counter circulation period is set to 16 ms to match the minimum unit of 16 ms for switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25. This minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25 corresponds to one frame time of an image frame, achieving synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

Next, the lamp data update process is executed (step S1118). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined period of time is read and set from the lamp pattern data identified by the device management process (step S819) described above. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the smallest unit of switching control for the performance lamps 10 and 25. Once the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output to the lamp connection board 91 via serial transfer from the output port (serial port). This lamp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process and is achieved by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmit buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serializes the lamp data in the transmit buffer on a byte-by-byte basis and outputs it to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmit buffer is empty, resulting in the output of all lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmit buffer. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output by serial transfer to the lamp connection board 91. Note that this lamp data update process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating the lamp control task) in the task control counter update process (step S1117) described above (i.e., it is executed every 16 ms).

Next, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (step S1119). This image CPU runaway monitoring processing monitors the toggle signal input from image control board 300. If the toggle signal does not change continuously for 800 to 1600 ms (approximately 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that image control CPU 301 of image control board 300 is running out of control, and a reset signal is sent from performance control board 200 to image control board 300. This causes image control board 300 to execute a specified reset process when image control CPU 301 enters a reset state. Note that a toggle signal is a signal with a waveform that alternates between H level and L level every frame time. Note that this image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed when the task counter value reaches a specified value (a value indicating the image monitoring task) in the task control counter update processing described above (step S1117).

Next, error management timer processing is executed (step S1120). In this error management timer processing, the value of the error presentation timer for managing the error presentation time, which was set in the error presentation management processing (step S817) described above, is decremented and updated. Note that this error management timer processing is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating the error management task) in the task control counter update processing (step S1117) described above. After enabling all interrupts and restoring the contents of the saved registers, the presentation control timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the original state before the interrupt occurred.

<Image control command transmission interrupt processing>
57 is a flowchart showing an example of an interrupt process for transmitting an image control command. This interrupt process for transmitting an image control command occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

In this image control command transmission interrupt process, the image control command buffer in the performance control information storage means 260 is first checked (step S1131). Next, a read pointer is obtained from the image control command buffer (step S1132), and it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (step S1133). Whether an image control command is stored can be confirmed, for example, using the read pointer and write pointer. If the read pointer and write pointer match, no image control command is stored. If an image control command is stored (step S1133), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (step S1134). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit (not shown) specified as the output destination (step S1135). This causes the image control command to be serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (the command data stored in the aforementioned step S1135) is cleared (step S1136). Next, the read pointer is updated by incrementing it by 1 (step S1137). The transmission interrupt process for the image command will end and the system will return to the original process before the interrupt.

Note that from the above-mentioned <Control Configuration of Gaming Machine> up to this point, the presentation has been explained in the case of mainstream LCD machines, but the above explanation of this embodiment is not limited to LCD machines and can also be applied to gaming machines equipped with other presentation display means (for example, drum-type presentation display devices, etc.).

＜1. Advance explanation of the performance＞
Hereinafter, the effects executed by the effect control board 200 (particularly the effect control CPU 201) of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the effects that involve image display on the effect display device 70. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 70 mainly displays decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and images of various effects including preview effects, as well as displays the first special pattern and the second special pattern on hold.

First, we will provide a preliminary explanation of some of the points necessary to explain the production.

<1-1. Decorative designs>
In pachinko machine 1, decorative symbols are provided to clearly display the game results indicated by the special symbols to the player. The decorative symbols are displayed on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) by the decorative symbol control of the effect control board 200 while the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner under the special symbol control of the main control board 100. The decorative symbols include at least the normal decorative symbols (main decorative symbols) displayed as the main symbols on the effect display device 70 when the special symbols are stopped, as well as simplified decorative symbols (sub-decorative symbols) displayed in a more simplified form than the normal decorative symbols when the normal decorative symbols are difficult for the player to see. In this description, as an example, the main decorative symbols are composed of three symbols: a left symbol, a center symbol, and a right symbol. After the variable display, they are generally stopped one by one. The game result is indicated by the display mode of the three symbols when they stop changing. For example, if all three symbols stop changing in the same pattern, the game result is a jackpot. On the other hand, the sub-decorative symbols are also composed of three symbols, and the game result is indicated by the display mode of the three symbols when they stop varying, but they differ from the main decorative symbols in that the three symbols stop simultaneously after the display of the variations. The combinations of the stopped symbols of the sub-decorative symbols are the same as the combinations of the stopped symbols of the main decorative symbols.

Note that during the execution of certain effects such as SP reach effects and telop effects (both of which will be described in detail later), at least some machines may be configured to display the main decorative pattern in a smaller size (or display an alternative pattern), or the main decorative pattern may be hidden (and the alternative pattern may not be displayed either), but in such situations the sub decorative pattern will always be displayed in a variable manner.

Figure 58 is a diagram for explaining the display of decorative patterns, etc. on the performance display device. Figure 58 shows the specific display areas for decorative patterns and variable hold icons in the image display area 700 of the performance display device 70.

In the case of Figure 58, three columns of display areas that serve as the changing display areas for the main decorative pattern 710 are provided near the center of the image display area 700 of the performance display device 70, and from left to right, a left pattern 711, a middle pattern 712, and a right pattern 713 are displayed. In the following explanation, the main decorative pattern 710 may be abbreviated to decorative pattern 710. When a pattern is represented by an arrow, such as the middle pattern 712 in Figure 58, this means that the target pattern is currently changing.

Also, as shown in Figure 58, the upper right corner of the image display area 700 is provided with a display area for the sub-decorative pattern 720, which is smaller than the display area for the main decorative pattern 710. The sub-decorative pattern displays a changing pattern while the special pattern is changing and a stationary pattern while the special pattern is stationary. Like the main decorative pattern 710, the sub-decorative pattern displays three changing and stationary patterns. By providing this sub-decorative pattern 720, it is possible to notify the player that the main decorative pattern 710 is changing (in other words, that the winning or losing result has not been determined) even in situations where the player wants to make the main decorative pattern 710 smaller or hide it. For example, in an SP reach effect (details will be described later), when an effect image is displayed in front of the main decorative pattern 710, the effect control board 200 can turn off the display of the main decorative pattern 710, while maintaining the display of the sub-decorative pattern 720. In other words, the sub decorative pattern 720 can be said to be a pattern for display security (to compensate for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710).

It is preferable that the sub-decorative pattern 720 continue to change from the time the special pattern starts to change until it stops. That is, even if the main decorative pattern 710 temporarily stops midway (for example, when a special main decorative pattern 710 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-stop pattern effect described below), it is preferable that the sub-decorative pattern 720 be configured so that it does not temporarily stop midway. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not have a special pattern such as a "NEXT" pattern, and the sub-decorative pattern 720 only stops to confirm the change. Furthermore, it is preferable that the sub-decorative pattern 720 maintains the pattern combination that indicates a loss to the player, whether it is a loss or a win, to prevent the player from mistaking a loss for a jackpot and to prevent the player from noticing a jackpot in advance in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, for example, if the symbol type of the sub-decorative symbol 720 is "1-7," the symbol combination of the sub-decorative symbol 720 is displayed changing as follows: "123" → "234" → ... → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ... Note that a "confirmed stop" refers to the decorative symbol stopping definitively when one special symbol change ends and the special symbol stops (in other words, a stop mode in which there is no further change and the symbol combination of the decorative symbol does not change any more), and a "provisional stop" and a "provisional stop" refer to one or more decorative symbols stopping provisionally with slight fluctuations at a timing prior to the "confirmed stop" during one special symbol change.

Furthermore, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 begin to change from a fixed state, the starting symbol combination for the main decorative pattern 710 (the first symbol combination immediately after the change begins) will be a symbol combination that is one symbol ahead of the symbol combination at the time of the fixed state, whereas the starting symbol combination for the sub-decorative pattern 720 will be a predetermined symbol combination, regardless of the symbol combination at the time of the fixed state. Specifically, for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 begin to change from a fixed state with the symbol combination "243," the starting symbol combination for the main decorative pattern 710 will be "354," whereas the starting symbol combination for the sub-decorative pattern 720 will be fixed at "123" (an example of a default value). For example, if the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 both stop at the fixed pattern combination of "333" and then start to change, the starting pattern combination for the main decorative pattern 710 will be "444", but the starting pattern combination for the sub-decorative pattern 720 will be fixed at "123" (an example of a default value), as in the example described above.

The decorative patterns (main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720) have been described in detail above, but the decorative patterns in this embodiment may also be configured to have the following features (1) to (9) in addition to those described above. By configuring them in this way, the roles of the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative patterns can be clearly differentiated.

(1) The display area of the main decorative pattern 710, which is easier for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720, which is used to guarantee display. This is not limited to situations where the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are fixed and stopped, or situations where the sub-decorative pattern 720 is being displayed in a variable manner immediately after the main decorative pattern 710 has formed a reach state (a reach state that has not yet developed into an SP reach performance, for example, during a normal reach), but is preferably configured in the same way even in situations where the main decorative pattern 710 is displayed as a small pattern and the sub-decorative pattern 720 is being displayed in a variable manner, such as during an SP reach performance.

(2) The display position of the main decorative pattern 710 can be set to different positions depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby achieving a variety of presentations using the main decorative pattern 710 depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill its role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable to display it in the same position regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design burdens. Details of the presentation modes will be described later.

(3) The display mode of the main decorative pattern 710 can be different depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby realizing durability of the presentation by the main decorative pattern 710 depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the main decorative pattern 710 is composed only of numerical patterns (main decorative patterns 710 such as "1," "2," ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the main decorative pattern 710 is composed of a combination of numerical patterns and patterns of ally characters (main decorative patterns 710 such as "1" + "character a," "2" + "character b," ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the sub decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design burdens by configuring it to have the same display format (for example, only numerical patterns) regardless of whether it is the first or second presentation mode.

(4) The display area of the main decorative pattern 710 can be varied (moved or turned into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether or not a normal reach is in progress, whether or not an SP reach is in progress, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the main decorative pattern 710. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable to avoid imposing unnecessary development and design burdens by making the display area not vary (not move or turn into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation.

(5) The main decorative pattern 710 can have its speed of change varied between slow, medium, fast, and ultra-fast depending on the change situation (e.g., whether it is at the start of the change, midway through the change, or about to end the change, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the main decorative pattern 710. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable that the speed of change not be varied depending on the change situation, or that the number of stages in which it is varied be reduced (e.g., only slow and fast), thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design burdens.

(6) The main decorative pattern 710 is temporarily stopped (a temporary stop (provisional stop) while the special pattern is changing, with slight fluctuations) before it is fixed (a stop at the timing when the special pattern stops), and at that time, by temporarily stopping a specific pattern of the main decorative pattern 710 other than a number (for example, a main decorative pattern 710 with the word "Super" written on it, which predicts development into an SP reach effect), it is possible to create a correlation between the effect of the main decorative pattern 710 and other effects. On the other hand, since the sub decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill its role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable not only not to temporarily stop the specific pattern, but also not to temporarily stop it at all, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design burdens.

(7) The main decorative pattern 710 may overlap, i.e., be superimposed on, the display area of other preview effects (e.g., step-up effects, icon change effects due to pre-reading effects (details of each effect will be described later)). In pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned superimposed display is permitted in order to use as much of the image display area 700 of the effect display device 70 as possible to create powerful effects. However, with regard to the sub-decorative pattern 720, in order to compensate for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is desirable to design the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720 so that it does not overlap (is not superimposed on) with the display area of the other preview effects. However, in relation to special preview effects where overlap is unavoidable (e.g., a group preview effect displayed across the entire image display area 700, a stage change effect that is a background preview effect suggesting or announcing a change in the presentation stage, etc.), it is preferable to set the display priority of the sub-decorative pattern 720 higher than the display priority of the special preview effect (i.e., set the sub-decorative pattern 720 to be displayed in front of the special preview effect). Furthermore, it is desirable that the right-hit notification image (an image displayed during a high base state, which prompts the player to aim and fire the game ball at the right-hand game area where the second starting hole 62 (in this embodiment, the second starting hole 62 is located in the right-hand game area) is located) be visible to the player at all times. Therefore, it is desirable to design the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720 and the display area of the right-hit notification image so that they do not overlap (are not superimposed). However, if the display area of the main decorative pattern 710 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720 and the display area of the right-hit notification image may overlap (be superimposed). In such a case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the main decorative pattern 710 lower than that of the right-hit notification image (i.e., set the main decorative pattern 710 so that it is displayed behind the right-hit notification image).

(8) During a special game, the main decorative symbol 710 may display only one symbol instead of a combination of three symbols. For example, if the main decorative symbol 710 is fixed to stop with the symbol combination "777" and a special game is executed, "7" is displayed during the special game. If the main decorative symbol 710 is fixed to stop with the symbol combination "222" and a special game is executed, "2" is displayed during the special game. This allows the player to recognize which main decorative symbol 710 resulted in a jackpot during the special game. As a variant, a single symbol may be displayed during the special game only when a symbol combination of the main decorative symbol 710 corresponding to a highly advantageous jackpot (e.g., "333," "555," "777," etc., indicating a jackpot of 5 rounds or more or a jackpot of 10 rounds) is fixed to stop. The display area displaying the main decorative pattern 710 using one symbol during a special game should preferably be configured so as not to overlap (be superimposed on) other display areas during the special game, including the round display area (the area displaying the round display indicating which round the currently active special game has progressed to), the right-hit display area (the area displaying an image displayed during the special game encouraging the player to aim the game ball at the right-hand game area where the large prize opening 64 (in this embodiment, the large prize opening 64 is located in the right-hand game area) is located), the prize ball acquisition display area (the area displaying the number of prize balls acquired in the currently active special game (one special game)), and the cumulative prize ball count display area (the area displaying the number of prize balls acquired (acquired in consecutive games) in one or more special games, including at least the currently active special game). However, the highlighting may be superimposed on the main decorative pattern 710, in which case the highlighting preferably has a higher display priority than the main decorative pattern 710. Additionally, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not change display during special play, it is preferable that it is not displayed during special play, but it may also be configured to be displayed during special play. When the sub-decorative pattern 720 is displayed during special play, it is preferable that it is configured so that it does not overlap (is not superimposed on) the other display areas during special play, which are the round display area, right-hit display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area, and it is also preferable that it is not superimposed on the highlight display.

(9) In addition to changing (for example, moving from top to bottom in the image display area 700), the main decorative pattern 710 may be displayed with a predetermined action in certain situations, such as when the change starts, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is achieved, or during a temporary stop. The predetermined actions in each of the above situations are referred to as the action at the start of the change, the action at a temporary stop, the action at the achievement of a reach, and the swinging action. Specifically, for example, in the case of a non-reach situation (for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed as "624" at the time of the final stop), the main decorative pattern 710 begins to change by expanding the left, middle, and right patterns 711, 712, and 713, respectively; then, when the left pattern 711 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "6" temporarily stops and continues swinging; then, when the right pattern 713 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "4" temporarily stops and continues swinging; then, when the middle pattern 712 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "2" temporarily stops and swings slightly; then, at the time of the final stop, all of the movements of all the patterns end. In this case, the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not perform any of the above-mentioned actions. Also, in the case of a normal reach (for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are displayed as "212" at the time of the final stop), when the main decorative pattern 710 starts to change, the left pattern 711, middle pattern 712, and right pattern 713 all expand, and then the change begins; then, when the left pattern 711 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "2" pattern temporarily stops, and then continues its swinging motion; then, when the right pattern 713 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "2" pattern temporarily stops, and then continues its swinging motion; then, to indicate that a reach has occurred, the left pattern 711 and the right pattern 713 make a rotating motion, and then continue their swinging motion again; then, when the middle pattern 712 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "1" pattern temporarily stops, and then makes a short swinging motion; then, at the final stop timing, all of the movements of all the patterns end (the middle pattern 712 does not make a rotating motion). In this case, the sub-decorative symbol 720 does not perform any of the above-mentioned operations. Also, when the game develops into an SP reach performance (for example, when the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub-decorative symbol 720 are displayed as "232" at the time of the fixed stop), the main decorative symbol 710 starts to change after performing an operation in which the left symbol 711, the middle symbol 712, and the right symbol 713 all expand at the start of the change, and then, when the left symbol 711 temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and then the "2" symbol temporarily stops and continues to swing, and then, when the right symbol 713 temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation. After that, the "2" symbol temporarily stops and continues to swing, and then the left symbol 711 and the right symbol 713 rotate to notify that it is a reach, and then continue to swing again, and then while the left symbol 711 and the right symbol 713 are swinging, the middle symbol 712 changes (at this time, the middle symbol 712 is expanding and moving from top to bottom, and overlaps with the left and right symbols that were not overlapping (or had a small overlapping rate) until then ( or the overlap rate is high), then the background changes from the normal background to the reach background to execute the SP reach effect, and after the change, all symbols continue to swing for a predetermined time, and then at the fixed stop timing, all of the symbols cease to operate (the middle symbol 712 does not perform any bouncing or rotating operations). In this case, the sub-decorative symbol 720 does not perform any of the above operations. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to add variety to the performance of the main decorative symbol 710. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative symbol 720 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative symbol 710, it is preferable to configure it so that it does not perform any particular operation, thereby avoiding unnecessary burdens on development and design. Furthermore, even between the time when the fluctuation stops and the time when the demo effect (details will be described later) is displayed, the main decorative symbol 710 may be configured to swing after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped, but even in this situation, the sub-decorative symbol 720 does not perform any operation. It is preferable that the sub-decorative symbol 720 does not perform a predetermined action. This configuration can stimulate the player's desire to play even during game standby (when symbols are stopped), and the sub-decorative symbol 720 does not perform a shaking action, thereby ensuring notification that the player is currently waiting to play. In addition, when a demo effect is displayed, the main decorative symbol 710 is hidden, but the sub-decorative symbol 720 may be configured to continue to be displayed. This configuration can ensure that the display of the symbol that is stopped is displayed while emphasizing the screen display due to the demo effect. However, since no game is being played during the demo effect, the sub-decorative symbol 720 may also be hidden. Furthermore, a specific symbol among the main decorative symbols 710 (for example, the "7" symbol in the middle symbol 712) may be configured not to perform a predetermined action (or to have a lower probability of performing a predetermined action) compared to other symbols. The predetermined action may be, for example, the provisional stop action (a bouncing action) described above (particularly when a reach is reached). This is particularly suitable for the "7" symbol in the middle symbol 712 after standing. This configuration can increase the rarity of actions associated with specific symbols. When the main decorative symbol 710 is formed by combining a number symbol with an ally character symbol (such as a main decorative symbol 710 of "1" + "character a," "2" + "character b," ..., or "7" + "character g"), both the number symbol and the ally character symbol will swing in the main decorative symbol 710. However, the swing amplitude (the swing distance; for example, if swinging up and down, the distance between the state where the main decorative symbol 710 is displayed at the top and the state where it is displayed at the bottom) may be varied to achieve a more dynamic swing. In this configuration, the swing amplitude of the number symbol may be made smaller than that of the ally character symbol, or the number symbol may not swing, and only the ally character symbol may swing.

Also, as shown in Figure 58, the bottom edge of the image display area 700 is provided with a display area displaying the current special symbol change (also referred to as the change) and pending changes (also simply referred to as pending) as icons. More specifically, a display area is provided for displaying the change icon, which indicates that the special symbol is currently changing, and a pending icon, which indicates that there is a pending change for which the conditions for starting the change display have not yet been met. For simplicity, the following discussion will omit the second special symbol and only discuss the first special symbol. However, in reality, it can be assumed that the second special symbol will also have a similar configuration to the first special symbol. As shown in Figure 58, a change icon 750 is provided as the icon corresponding to the change, and pending icons 760 (individually, the first pending icon 761, the second pending icon 762, the third pending icon 763, and the fourth pending icon 764, in order of closest to completion of the pending) are provided as icons corresponding to up to four pending changes of the first special symbol. The hold icon 760 displays the hold of the first special symbol in synchronization with the first special symbol hold lamp. In addition, in a low base, when the first special symbol is changing and there is a hold of the first special symbol, the variable icon and hold icon of the first special symbol can be displayed, but even if the second special symbol is changing and there is a hold of the second special symbol, neither the variable icon nor the hold icon of the second special symbol is displayed. In addition, in a high base, when the second special symbol is changing and there is a hold of the second special symbol, the variable icon and hold icon of the second special symbol can be displayed, but even if the first special symbol is changing and there is a hold of the first special symbol, neither the variable icon nor the hold icon of the first special symbol is displayed. As a variant, the variable icons for the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be displayed at both a low base and a high base, unlike the reserved icon for the first special symbol and the reserved icon for the second special symbol. During the SP reach performance, the variable icons and reserved icons may be hidden, or the variable icons may be displayed and the reserved icons may be hidden.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 58, a display area for the reserved number display 770 is provided below the sub-decorative symbol 720 in the upper right corner of the image display area 700. The reserved number display 770 displays the number of reserved variable balls for the first special symbol in small letters using numbers or the like, and is displayed at least during periods when the reserved ball icon 760 is not displayed even though a reserved variable ball exists. For example, in Figure 58, the reserved number display 770 displays "2," which means that the reserved variable ball number for the first special symbol is "2," and corresponds to the first reserved icon 761 and the second reserved icon 762 being lit (blacked out in the figure) in the reserved ball icon 760. Furthermore, as mentioned above, in an actual pachinko machine 1, a display area for displaying the reserved variable ball number is also provided for the second special symbol. Here, both the reserved number display showing the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number display showing the reserved number of the first special symbol may be displayed simultaneously (for example, the reserved number display showing the reserved number of the first special symbol may be displayed in red numbers, and the reserved number display showing the reserved number of the second special symbol may be displayed in blue numbers). Note that the reserved number displays (reserved number display for the first special symbol, reserved number display for the second special symbol) are not hidden even when the reserved number is 0, but are displayed as "0". For example, if the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "3", the reserved number display for the first special symbol will be displayed as "0", and the reserved number display for the second special symbol will be displayed as "3". Furthermore, the reserved number display is always displayed not only while the special symbols are fluctuating but also while the special symbols are stopped (for example, it is always displayed regardless of whether an SP reach effect is being performed or not, and it is always displayed regardless of whether decorative role objects 781 and 782 are in operation or not), but it is desirable that it is not displayed while a special game is being performed or a demo effect is being performed (decorative role objects 781 and 782 are movable role objects as shown in FIG. 71(E) and the like, and details of their operation will be described later in the explanation of FIG. 71(E).). However, the reserved number display may be displayed even while a special game is being performed or a demo effect is being performed, but in that case, since both the variable reserved number of the first special symbol and the variable reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" during the demo effect, the reserved number display of the first special symbol and the reserved number display of the second special symbol will always be displayed as "0" (during the execution of a special game, there may be a variable reserved number just before the special game starts, so a value other than "0" may be displayed). Additionally, while both the first special symbol pending number display and the second special symbol pending number display may be superimposed with the dialogue effects described below, the display priority for the first special symbol pending number display and the second special symbol pending number display is higher. Additionally, neither the first special symbol pending number display nor the second special symbol pending number display will be superimposed with the caption effects described below.

<1-2. Characters appearing in the performance>
In the description of the effects according to this embodiment, the appearance of multiple types of characters may be shown in various specific examples described below. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, a specific effect can be configured to suggest different expectations for the game outcome and game development depending on which character (or combination of characters) appears (also simply referred to as "display") in the effect. Note that even for the same character, the expectations for the game outcome and game development may differ depending on which effect the character appears in. As a specific example, the expectation for the game outcome and game development may be higher (or lower) when a certain character is displayed in a dialogue effect that occurs after a reach is reached, compared to when the character is displayed in a dialogue effect that occurs before the reach is reached. Alternatively, the expectation for the game outcome and game development may be higher (or lower) when a certain character is displayed in a telop effect that occurs after a certain telop effect, compared to when the character is displayed in a telop effect. Therefore, when the characters are different, for example, when character C (see Figure 59) is displayed in a dialogue performance that occurs before a reach is reached, the expected probability of a jackpot is 20%, when character C is displayed in a dialogue performance that occurs after a reach is reached, the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%, when character H (see Figure 59) is displayed in a dialogue performance that occurs before a reach is reached, the expected probability of a jackpot is 5%, and when character H is displayed in a dialogue performance that occurs after a reach is reached, the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%, even if character H has a relatively low expected probability of a jackpot, when comparing the expected probability of a jackpot when character C is displayed in a dialogue performance that occurs before a reach is reached and the expected probability of a jackpot when character H is displayed in a dialogue performance that occurs after a reach is reached, the latter (character H) has a higher expected probability of a jackpot.

Figure 59 shows an example of the relationship between characters that may appear in a presentation and their suggested expectation levels. In Figure 59, each character (character A through character Q (with gaps in numbering)) is divided into "own characters (ally characters)" who, in the context of the presentation, basically contribute to the player's interests, "enemy characters" who are contrary to the player's interests, and "other characters" who are difficult to distinguish from either. Furthermore, the expected expectation levels (suggested expectation levels) for game results and game developments suggested by each character when it appears in a predetermined presentation (and even at a predetermined timing) are set to "none," "low," "medium," "high," and "ultra-high." Here, "ultra-high" refers to an extremely high expectation level (the highest expectation level, which may be a guarantee of a predetermined game result or game development) that is almost certain to result in a favorable outcome for the player for a predetermined game result (e.g., a jackpot or a special jackpot) or game development (e.g., development into a special SP reach presentation or entering a special special state after a jackpot). Note that "low," "medium," and "high" have lower expectations than "ultra-high," and the order of expectations is "high," "medium," and "low." Also, "none" does not suggest any particular expectation; in other words, it does not serve to suggest a predetermined game result (such as a jackpot or a special jackpot) or game development (such as development into a special SP reach presentation or entering a special state after a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player, but rather serves to liven up the presentation, or may mean an even lower expectation than "low."

Note that "Character M" shown in Figure 59 is a so-called mob character that does not have a specific character name, or even if it does have a character name, it does not have any significant meaning in the presentation. As mentioned above, even if the presentation suggests expectations for the game outcome or game development when other characters appear, Character M does not suggest any particular expectations when it appears. Alternatively, as another example, when Character M is displayed, it may be set to suggest a relatively low level of expectations (which may include expectations lower than when no character is displayed).

Furthermore, "Character P" and "Character Q" shown in Figure 59 are premium characters with an extremely low appearance rate compared to other characters (for example, they appear in 0.1% of cases where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, or 0.5% of cases where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot and entry into a special state is guaranteed), and by having the corresponding suggestion expectation rate set to "ultra-high," their mere appearance can provide extremely high levels of excitement to the player, regardless of the presentation.

Of course, the characters shown in Figure 59 are merely examples for the purposes of this explanation, and in reality, more or fewer characters than those shown in Figure 59 may be prepared for presentation purposes. Furthermore, the classification of each character (player character, enemy character, other character) and their correspondence with the expected suggestion level may also be set in various ways.

<1-3. Expectations based on text color>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in various effects (game effects) executed during play, the colors of the text (character colors) displayed on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) can suggest different expectations for the game result or game development. Specifically, for example, in the following description, the following character colors are used, listed in ascending order of suggested expectation: white, blue, yellow, green, red, purple, gold, and rainbow. Of these, white is a commonly used character color and may be considered not to suggest a particular expectation. Rainbow is a special character color that suggests an extremely high and definite expectation (a guaranteed jackpot). Manufacturer patterns, described below, may also be used as character colors. In this case, the following character colors are listed in ascending order of suggested expectation: white, blue, yellow, green, red, purple, gold, manufacturer patterns, and rainbow.

<2. Demonstration Production>
The effect control board 200 can control the execution of various effects that involve image display on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700), and these effects can be broadly divided into standby effects that are executed while the game is in standby mode (which may include a state in which a game ball is being launched into the game area, as long as there is no pending change and control processing related to special symbol changes, special games, etc. is not being executed), and game effects that are executed during game play (for example, while special symbols are changing or during special games). An example of a standby effect is a demo effect. Furthermore, as for game effects, various effects are available, such as text effects (dialogue effects, caption effects), reach effects, pseudo-stop symbol effects (pseudo-consecutive effects), pre-reading effects, step-up effects, etc., as will be described later.

A demo effect is an effect that is executed when certain conditions are met, such as when the effect button 3j or the like is not operated for a certain period of time (e.g., 120 seconds) or the launch handle 12 is not rotated for a certain period of time (e.g., 120 seconds) when the special symbol is not changing and there is no pending change (a situation in which the special symbol remains stopped and there is no pending change), and a specified demo image is displayed on the effect display device 70. Demo images are prepared according to the model of gaming machine, and the theme and content can be determined at the manufacturer's discretion. Furthermore, while the image data used for displaying demo effects on the effect display device 70 is primarily moving images, this does not necessarily exclude still images only or a combination of moving and still images.

<2-1. Examples of demonstration performances>
60 is a diagram showing an example of a screen transition before the start of the demo effect. In FIG. 60, the special symbol is not changing, and there is no change pending.

Figure 60(A) shows the state immediately after the special symbol stops when there is no pending change. In the image display area 700 shown in Figure 60(A), the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub-decorative symbol 720 are displayed stationary without changing. After the state shown in Figure 60(A) continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) or after the effect button 3j is operated, an effect setting adjustment screen is displayed in the image display area 700, as shown in Figure 60(B). The effect setting adjustment screen is a screen for adjusting the settings of predetermined functions through player operation. As a specific example of the effect setting adjustment screen, Figure 60 shows an automatic operation setting (B1) that sets whether or not to automatically process operations on the effect input device (e.g., effect button 3j or second effect button 3k) required by the player during an effect, a volume setting (B2) that sets the volume output in conjunction with the effect, and a light intensity setting (B3) that sets the light intensity of the effect display device 70, etc. The volume setting and the volume setting adjustment screen, and the light intensity setting and the light intensity setting adjustment screen can be displayed even while the special symbols are fluctuating or while a special game is being played. The effect settings may also have a setting function and setting screen for setting the frequency of specific effects. For example, the frequency of effects related to premium characters may be settable. Specifically, the frequency of effects related to premium characters may be settable to one of "0.1% at the time of a jackpot," "10% at the time of a jackpot," "100% at the time of a jackpot," or "100% at the time of a special jackpot (not occurring at a normal jackpot)." The effect setting adjustment screen may not be automatically displayed after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 20 seconds) but may be displayed after the effect button 3j is operated. Furthermore, decorative pattern 710 may be configured to include not only numbers but also characters (for example, character B may have a "7" attached, or character H may have a "2" attached), and in such a configuration, immediately after the fluctuation stops, the display will stop with the numbers and characters combined, and neither the numbers nor the characters will move at all, but after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, the numbers will be erased and the display will change to show only the characters, and the stopped state will be maintained, or both the numbers and characters may move slightly, and the stopped state will be maintained, or the display will change to show the numbers, characters, and even the character's name combined, and the stopped state will be maintained.

Then, if a predetermined time (e.g., 120 seconds) elapses from the state of Figure 60(B) without the game ball entering the starting hole, the state transitions to Figure 60(C). Upon transitioning to the state of Figure 60(C), the effect control board 200 begins displaying a pre-prepared demo image (demo movie) in the image display area 700 (start of demo effect). Note that, because the execution of the demo effect is limited to the period when the special symbols do not change, in the case of Figure 60, both the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub-decorative symbol 720 are hidden from the time of Figure 60(C) until the demo effect ends. However, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be configured so that the sub-decorative symbol 720 continues to be displayed even while the demo effect is being executed. If, after the demo performance is executed, the game ball enters the starting hole, the performance control board 200 immediately interrupts the demo performance at that point, and the display of the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 changes in the image display area 700.

Figure 61 shows the screen transitions in the first example of the demo effect. The demo effect shown in Figure 61 introduces the theme of pachinko machine 1, such as the world view and characters.

In the first example of the demo effect, a video featuring character B (see FIG. 59) is first displayed in the image display area 700 (FIG. 61(A)), followed by the text "Let's decide who is the best!" (FIG. 61(B)). This text represents the historical background of the world of pachinko machine 1. After that, a video of character B and character I facing each other is displayed (FIG. 61(C)), followed by a video of character B punching (FIG. 61(D)). The logo (title logo) of the gaming machine name of pachinko machine 1 and the copyright holder (publisher) are then displayed (FIG. 61(E)). In this explanation, the gaming machine name of pachinko machine 1 is tentatively referred to as "Musou Densetsu" and the copyright holder of the characters and other materials used in pachinko machine 1 as "MUSOU Pro." Finally, the logo (manufacturer logo) of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 is displayed (FIG. 61(F)), and the demo effect ends. Furthermore, if, after the final display of Figure 61 (F), the game ball does not enter the starting hole and the non-changing state of the special pattern continues, the effect control board 200 may continue to display the final display as is, or may display the stopped screen of the decorative pattern 710 described in Figure 60 (A) (in this case, as mentioned above, the screen may be one in which the numbers are erased and the display mode changes to show only the characters and then remains stopped, or one in which the numbers and characters both fluctuate slightly and remain stopped, or one in which the display mode changes to show the numbers, characters, and even the character names combined and then remains stopped), or may display the effect setting adjustment screen described in Figure 60 (B), or may repeat the demo effect from the beginning, etc.

Figure 62 shows the screen transitions in the second example of the demo effect. The demo effect shown in Figure 62 introduces some of the game effects that may appear during play on pachinko machine 1.

In the second example of the demo effect, the title logo of the pachinko machine 1 is first displayed in the image display area 700 (Figure 62 (A)). Next, the text "These are the two major effects that are key to winning!" is displayed (Figure 62 (B)), and an introduction of effects that have a high expectation of winning a jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 (effects with an expected jackpot probability of about 40% to 60%) and that have a relatively high occupancy rate during a jackpot (these effects occur 60% of the time during a jackpot) begins. (Note that effects that rarely appear even during a jackpot, such as those involving premium characters (e.g., effects with an occurrence rate of 10% or less during a jackpot), are not introduced as effects that are key to winning a jackpot because they are difficult for players to see.) Specifically, in Figure 62 (C), a demo video of the "first point effect" is displayed in a designated area within the image display area 700, and in Figure 62 (D), a demo video of the "second point effect" is displayed in a designated area within the image display area 700. Thereafter, the logo of the gaming machine name (title logo) and the copyright holder (publisher) of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed (Fig. 62(E)), and the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 (manufacturer logo) is displayed (Fig. 62(F)), and the demo effect ends. Note that the display contents of Fig. 62(E) to (F) are the same as those of Fig. 61(E) to (F), so explanations will be omitted. If, after the final display of FIG. 62(F), the game ball does not enter the starting hole and the non-changing state of the special symbol continues, the effect control board 200 may continue to display the final display as is, or may display the stopped screen of the decorative symbol 710 described in FIG. 60(A) (in this case, as described above, the screen may be one in which the numbers are erased and the display mode changes to show only the characters and then remains stopped, or one in which the numbers and characters are kept stopped with a slight fluctuation, or one in which the display mode changes to show the numbers, characters, and even the character names and then remains stopped), or may display the effect setting adjustment screen described in FIG. 60(B), or may repeat the demo effect from the beginning. It is preferable that at least one of these effects (the two major effects) occurring in the normal state does not necessarily guarantee a jackpot, but has a high probability of a jackpot, while occurring in the special state or the time-saving state guarantees a jackpot.

The demo effects executed by the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment are not limited to the first and second effect examples described above, and may also introduce other information. Specifically, for example, it may introduce a specific pattern indicating high expectations (for example, a unique design commonly used by a gaming machine manufacturer on gaming machines manufactured by the manufacturer, known as a "manufacturer pattern"). In the pachinko machine 1, the manufacturer pattern may be displayed at any timing during the game effect, and when the manufacturer pattern is displayed, it indicates high expectations for a game result (jackpot, special jackpot) or game development (such as the development of an SP reach) that is favorable to the player. While the occurrence of this manufacturer pattern in a normal state does not necessarily guarantee a jackpot, it does indicate a high jackpot expectation, while its occurrence in a special jackpot state or a time-saving state ideally guarantees a jackpot.

<2-2. Features of the demo performance>
Based on the above specific example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of executing a demo presentation configured to have one or more of the following features.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, silent moving images may be used for the demo effects. In this case, the difference between the demo effects and game effects, which generally output sound effects, is clearly visible, which is expected to have the effect of preventing the demo effects from being mistaken for game effects. However, as in the specific example described above, the distinguishability between the demo effects and game effects is ensured to a certain extent, for reasons such as the fact that the entire process from the start to the end of the decorative pattern fluctuations is not continuously displayed in the demo effects. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, moving images with sound may be used for the demo effects.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the characters displayed in the demo effects may basically overlap with characters that may be displayed in the game effects, and these characters displayed in the demo effects may include multiple types of characters (specifically, for example, Character B, Character C, Character I, etc., as illustrated in FIG. 59) that, when displayed in the game effects, suggest different degrees of expectation for the game outcome or game development. However, as a matter of course, the demo effects are effects executed while play is not being played, and therefore the appearance of a specific character in the demo effect does not suggest any degree of expectation. In this way, by having a character that can suggest a degree of expectation when it appears in the game effects appear in the demo effects, it is expected that the effect of increasing interest when that character appears during play can be expected.

In addition, in the demo effects of this embodiment, characters that are displayed may be characters that do not appear in game effects and are only displayed in demo effects. Alternatively, characters that are unique to game effects and do not appear in demo effects may be provided. In either case, the types of characters displayed in demo effects may be configured to be fewer than the types of characters that can be displayed in game effects (or specific game effects (for example, "dialogue effects" and "telop effects" described below)). In this way, by limiting the types of characters displayed in demo effects, it is expected that the player's interest will be heightened when a character that does not appear in demo effects appears during game play.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, not all characters that can be displayed in the game presentation are displayed in the demo presentation.

For example, a specific character that may be displayed in the text effects (dialogue effects, caption effects) described below can be configured not to be displayed in the demo effects. As will be described in more detail below, the text effects (dialogue effects, caption effects) can be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for the game outcome or game development by the displayed characters. The suggested degree of expectation is as shown in Figure 59. In this embodiment, a specific character among the characters that may be displayed in such text effects can be configured not to be displayed in the demo effects. Specifically, for example, a mob character (character M) that does not suggest a particular degree of expectation (or suggests a low degree of expectation) even when displayed in the text effects may be configured not to be displayed in the demo effects. Since mob characters are low-value characters that do not have any particular meaning even when they appear during gameplay, not displaying them in the demo effects can be expected to have the effect of not drawing unnecessary attention from the player. Furthermore, for example, a special premium character (character P) that suggests an extremely high degree of expectation when displayed in the text effects may be configured not to be displayed in the demo effects. Since premium characters appear extremely rarely during gameplay, keeping them hidden and not displaying them in demo effects can be expected to have the effect of increasing players' interest in their existence.

Also, according to the character list illustrated in Figure 59, character Q is also a premium character, just like character P, but character Q may also be a character that does not appear in demo effects. Character Q may be a character that appears in text effects (dialogue effects, caption effects), but it may also be a character that does not appear in text effects (dialogue effects, caption effects), and may be set as a character that has the potential to appear in specified game effects other than text effects (not limited to effects during reach, but may include pseudo-stop symbol effects executed before reach is achieved, and pre-reading effects executed before the change in question). As another configuration example, character Q may be set as a character that has the potential to appear in dialogue effects, but may be restricted from appearing in caption effects.

In addition, in the demo effect according to this embodiment, when introducing game effects within the demo effect, text may not be displayed. Alternatively, even if text is displayed, "text associated with a character" may not be displayed. "Text associated with a character" refers to text corresponding to the character's speech. In other words, in game effects, audio corresponding to the character's speech may not be output at all, and only text may be displayed. This configuration is expected to be effective in preserving the enjoyment of gameplay by not showing the entire game effect in the demo effect. On the other hand, in the text effects (dialogue effects, caption effects) described below, when a character appears, text (dialogue, caption) that transcribes the character's speech is displayed. However, in the dialogue effects, character speech and text may be displayed only in some dialogue effects (e.g., 30 of the 100 dialogue effects), rather than in all dialogue effects. In the remaining dialogue effects (e.g., 70 of the 100 dialogue effects), only text may be displayed without character speech. Furthermore, in subtitle effects, character speech and text may be displayed in only some of the subtitle effects (for example, 9 of the 10 types of dialogue subtitle effects) rather than all of them, and the remaining subtitle effects (for example, 1 of the 10 types of subtitle effects) may display only text without character speech (for example, when subtitles with a storyline are displayed in parts, that is, when subtitles are displayed multiple times, all of the subtitles with that storyline may be considered to be one type; in other words, even subtitles that are displayed multiple times may be considered to be one type).

Furthermore, in the demo effect according to this embodiment, the text during the demo effect may be displayed in a standard text color (e.g., white) that does not suggest the game result or the level of expectation for the game development. In other words, text colors such as red, manufacturer patterns, or rainbow colors, which indicate high expectations, may not be used. This configuration is expected to have the effect of preventing the demo effect from being mistaken for a game effect, and to have the effect of allowing players to enjoy the suggestion of expectations by the text color in actual play. However, the above-mentioned text color restrictions may be excluded for text that displays items that have little relationship to the effects during play, such as title logos or manufacturer logos.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 61 (E) and 62 (E), the copyright holder (publisher) of the characters etc. used in the pachinko machine 1 may be displayed in the demo presentation; more specifically, the publisher may be displayed in conjunction with the title logo of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, in the game presentation executed during the changing of decorative patterns or during a jackpot game, the publisher is not displayed, although the title logo may be displayed.

<3. Line production＞
The following describes a dialogue effect, which is one of the game effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, a character string is displayed on the effect display device 70 during a predetermined game period (specifically, for example, during one variation of a special symbol or during a jackpot game), and the content and color of the character string can suggest the game result or the degree of expectation for the game development. This character effect includes the dialogue effect described in this chapter and the caption effect described in the next chapter.

A dialogue effect is an effect in which a string of characters is displayed on the effect display device 70 at a predetermined timing during a predetermined game period, and the content of the string and the color of the text can suggest the game result or the level of expectation for the game development. In the following explanation, the "predetermined timing" at which the dialogue effect is executed is defined as any timing between the start of the display of the decorative pattern 710 changing on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) and the development of the SP reach effect, but in reality it can be any timing during other game periods during play (for example, while the special or decorative pattern is changing, or during a jackpot game), as long as it is a timing before the specific timing at which the caption effect described below can be executed.

<3-1. Examples of dialogue direction>
FIG. 63 illustrates screen transitions in a first example of a dialogue effect. First, in FIG. 63(A), a changing main decorative symbol 710 is displayed in the image display area 700, and a changing sub-decorative symbol 720 is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display area 700. Then, in FIG. 63(B), an operation request effect appears in the image display area 700. Here, the operation request effect is one of the game effects whose execution is controlled by the effect control board 200, and is an effect that requests the player to input information using a predetermined effect input device. The predetermined effect input device is a device that inputs input information to the effect control board 200 based on input operations by the player, and specifically corresponds to, for example, the effect button 3j or the second effect button 3k on the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 63(B), an image of the effect button 3j (hereinafter referred to as the "PUSH button image") is displayed superimposed on top of the main decorative symbol 710, prompting the player to press the effect button 3j. A bar-shaped image is displayed below the PUSH button image, which indicates the remaining time of the valid operation period during which the effect control board 200 accepts pressing of the effect button 3j. When the player presses (PUSHes) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed, the display transitions to Figure 63(C). As a variant, if the player does not press (PUSH) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period and the valid operation period has elapsed, the display may not transition to Figure 63(C), i.e., the dialogue effect may not be displayed.

Figure 63 (C) shows the image display area 700 at the moment when the left pattern 711 of the main decorative pattern 710 is about to stop, and a dialogue effect appears at this timing. Specifically, character M appears at the bottom of the image display area 700, and the string of characters (dialogue) "What's that?" is displayed in character M's speech bubble as a string of text accompanying character M. The text color of character M's dialogue in Figure 63 (C) is typically white, but may be another text color that suggests the game outcome or the degree of expectation for the game development (for example, red, which suggests high expectation). Furthermore, character M displayed in Figure 63 (C) is a character with no suggestive expectation according to Figure 59, but an effect pattern may be prepared in which a character with some suggestive expectation (for example, character A or character H) is displayed.

After Figure 63 (C), different transitions are shown depending on the game development. Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 63 (D), a reach state is achieved with the main decorative pattern 710, leading to an SP reach effect, or, as shown in Figure 63 (E), a reach state is not achieved with the main decorative pattern 710, and the main decorative pattern 710 and sub decorative pattern 720 are displayed as a missing combination (for example, "436").

Figure 64 shows the screen transition in a second example of dialogue effects. Figures 64(A) to 64(B) are similar to Figures 63(A) to 63(B), and after the changing main decorative pattern 710 is displayed in the image display area 700, an operation request effect appears in the image display area 700. Then, in Figure 64(B), if the player presses (PUSHes) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period, or if the valid operation period has elapsed, the screen transitions to Figure 64(C). As a variant, if the player does not press (PUSHes) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period and the valid operation period has elapsed, the screen may not transition to Figure 64(C), i.e., the dialogue effect may not be displayed. When configured in this way, if the player does not press (PUSH) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period in Figure 64 (B) and the valid operation period has elapsed, the display will not transition to Figures 64 (D) and (E) described below, meaning that operation request effects and dialogue effects will not be displayed at any subsequent times.

In Figure 64 (C), the dialogue performance begins when the left pattern 711 of the main decorative pattern 710 is about to stop. Specifically, character A appears at the bottom of the image display area 700, and the string of characters (dialogue) "Shall we go?" is displayed in character A's speech bubble as a string of text accompanying character A. The text color of character A's dialogue in Figure 64 (C) is usually white, but may be another text color that suggests the degree of expectation for the game outcome or game development (for example, red to suggest high expectation, rainbow colors to suggest extremely high expectation, etc.).

Next, in Figure 64(D), when only the left symbol 711 of the main decorative symbol 710 stops, an operation request effect is inserted and a PUSH button image is displayed. Then, pressing the effect button 3j in Figure 64(D) (or the expiration of the valid operation period) triggers a branch depending on the game development. Specifically, if the operation request effect in Figure 64(D) is successful, the game transitions to Figure 64(E), and if it fails, the game transitions to Figure 64(G). Note that "success" here refers to an effect result in which a character is displayed by pressing the effect button 3j, and "failure" refers to an effect result in which a character is not displayed even when the effect button 3j is pressed. Alternatively, as a variant, if the player does not press (PUSH) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period and the valid operation period has expired, the game may transition to Figure 64(G) without transitioning to Figure 64(E), i.e., the game may be configured to always fail without success.

In Figure 64(E), character B appears at the bottom of the image display area 700, and the text (dialogue) "Let's go!" is displayed in character B's speech bubble. Character B's line responds to character A's line in Figure 64(C), and the connected dialogue suggests a high probability of game development (in this example, SP Reach development) and a high probability of a jackpot (relatively higher than if the dialogue were disconnected). The text color of character B's line in Figure 64(E) is typically white, but may be another color that suggests the game outcome or the degree of expectation for game development (for example, red to indicate high expectation, or rainbow to indicate extremely high expectation). Then, in Figure 64(F), a Reach state is established by the main decorative pattern 710, leading to the SP Reach performance. On the other hand, in Figure 64 (G), no character is displayed in the image display area 700, the dialogue performance ends, and the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed stationary in a losing mode (e.g., "718").

In the second presentation example shown in Figure 64, different characters (Character A, Character B) appear at multiple stages of timing in the dialogue presentation, but if the characters appearing in the dialogue presentation are to suggest the degree of expectation for the game outcome or game development, it may be possible to rely on the character with the higher degree of suggestion of expectation (Character B in this case), or on the combination of characters that appear.

<3-2. Characteristics of dialogue direction>
Based on the above specific example, the features of the dialogue effects that can be executed by the effect control board 200 in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be explained. Note that the dialogue effects according to this embodiment do not need to be configured to have all of the multiple features shown below, but only need to be configured to have at least one feature or a combination of multiple features. Furthermore, if necessary, further examples of dialogue effects will be shown.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, dialogue presentation typically involves displaying a still image of the character, and then displaying text corresponding to the character's speech (including unspoken thoughts). However, immediately after the character is displayed, a moving image animation indicating the character's appearance (for example, an animation in which the character gradually fades in from below) may be displayed, and the still image may then be maintained for a certain period of time. Furthermore, when the character subsequently becomes invisible (disappears), a moving image animation indicating the character's disappearance (for example, an animation in which the character gradually fades out from above) may be displayed. Furthermore, like characters, text strings and speech bubble frames are still images, but they may be displayed with a moving image animation indicating their appearance (for example, an animation in which they gradually fade in from below), remain displayed as still images for a certain period of time, and then display a moving image animation indicating their disappearance (for example, an animation in which they gradually fade out from above). Speech bubble frames may also be continuously animated (for example, even when characters or text strings are displayed as still images, the speech bubble frames may be displayed with a constant flashing animation). Audio corresponding to the character's speech may also be output. In this case, it is preferable to display all characters of the text string in the dialogue presentation simultaneously, or to display the text string one character at a time. In either case, it is preferable to complete the display of the text string in the dialogue presentation (complete the display of all characters from the first character to the last character of the text string) before the output of the audio corresponding to the character's speech is completed (complete the output of all audio corresponding to the text string in the dialogue presentation). Note that character display in dialogue effects is not limited to simply displaying a still image representing the character for a predetermined period of time. For example, it can include image displays in which the still image of the character gradually fades, expands, or contracts, as described above, or image displays in which the still image of the character moves within the image display area 700. Furthermore, the text (lines) corresponding to the character's speech may be displayed in association with a bubble frame or the like, or may be displayed adjacent to the character's still image without a bubble frame or the like. As described above, the color of the text displayed in dialogue effects can suggest different expectations regarding the game outcome or game development. Furthermore, the displayed content of the lines does not need to correspond to the entirety of the character's speech, but may instead represent a portion or a gist of it. By configuring dialogue effects in this manner, the content related to the effect (e.g., the content of the character's speech) is visually displayed as text, and the expectation regarding the game outcome or game development can be suggested using the highly distinctive text color, thereby providing effects that enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned presentation examples, the predetermined timing at which dialogue presentations are displayed is explained as being before a reach is achieved or before the progression to an SP reach presentation, but in this embodiment, the timing at which dialogue presentations can be displayed is not limited to these, and may also be during a predetermined period during play (a predetermined game period).

Furthermore, the dialogue effects according to this embodiment can be combined with various other types of game effects, in addition to the operation request effects exemplified in Figures 63 and 64. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 200 may be able to select an effect pattern in which a step-up effect occurs before a dialogue effect, or an effect pattern in which a dialogue effect occurs during the execution of a pseudo-stop symbol effect (pseudo-consecutive effect), or an effect pattern in which a caption effect occurs after a dialogue effect. Note that the step-up effect is an effect in which a predetermined image can be inserted and displayed in multiple stages, and the more stages the predetermined image is displayed, the higher the level of expectation suggested. Specifically, the step-up effects include step-up image 1, which is an image displaying character M within a square frame, step-up image 2, which is an image displaying character A within a square frame, step-up image 3, which is an image displaying character B within a square frame, step-up image 4, which is an image displaying character C within a square frame, and step-up image 5, which is an image displaying character P within a square frame. First, step-up image 1 is displayed, and then step-up images 2, 2, 3, 2, 3, 4, or 2, 3, 4, or 5 are displayed one by one in order, and the more step-up images progress (the more step-up images are displayed), the higher the likelihood of a jackpot (when step-up image 5 is displayed, a jackpot is confirmed). Details of the pseudo-stop symbol effects and the telop effects will be described later. Furthermore, the operation request effect is an effect that can be easily combined with dialogue effects, and its appearance timing (the timing at which the player is requested to input using an effect input device such as effect button 3j) may not only coincide with the occurrence of the operation request effect related to the dialogue effect, but may also occur before or after that. If the operation request effect is executed for the purpose of displaying the step-up effect before a reach is achieved as described above, the "NEXT" symbol before a reach is achieved as described below, a win/loss display during an SP reach effect, or a cut-in effect during a caption effect during an SP reach effect, it may occur at the occurrence of the operation request effect related to those effects.

Furthermore, in the dialogue presentation according to this embodiment, the degree of expectation for the game outcome or game development may be suggested not only by the color of the displayed text, but also by the displayed characters (or combinations thereof) and the content of the text (content of the dialogue). By configuring it in this way, the dialogue presentation has the effect of piqued the player's interest not only in the color of the displayed text, but also in the characters that appear.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may have a presentation pattern in which dialogue presentations occur multiple times during a predetermined period of time during play (for example, within the same variation). For example, in the second presentation example of dialogue presentation shown in FIG. 64, the operation request presentation in FIG. 64(D) is executed between the display of character A's dialogue in FIG. 64(C) and the display of character B's dialogue in FIG. 64(E), meaning that two dialogue presentations occur with the operation request presentation in between.

If multiple dialogue effects occur within a given period of time during gameplay, the text color indicating the expected level may change depending on the timing of each dialogue effect (for example, before or after a reach is achieved). In this case, the text color change pattern may be a so-called "upgrade," such as changing from "white" or "blue," which indicates a low expected level, to "red," which indicates a high expected level, or a so-called "downgrade," such as changing from "red" to "blue" or "white." Furthermore, when the text color indicating the expected level changes from a relatively high expected level color to a low expected level color during the occurrence of multiple dialogue effects, the text size of the displayed string (or part of the displayed string) may be different (the text size becomes larger or smaller) in the dialogue effects before and after the downgrade. This configuration makes it easier for players to notice that a change in the expectation level suggestion, such as a downgrade, has occurred, which is expected to have the effect of increasing interest in the presentation (if the character size is configured to be larger, the character string will be easier to notice, increasing the likelihood of understanding the downgrade; if the character size is configured to be smaller, the player will be able to recognize the decrease in expectation level from the character size, making it easier to recognize the downgrade). Note that "character size" will be described in detail in the next paragraph. The above configuration may also be applicable to an "upgrade" change pattern. In this case, it is expected to have the effect of increasing interest in the presentation (if the character size is configured to be larger, the player will be able to recognize the increase in expectation level from the character size, making it easier to recognize the upgrade; if the character size is configured to be smaller, the player will be attracted by the unexpectedness of the smaller character string, increasing the likelihood of understanding the upgrade). Furthermore, the content of the lines (character strings) displayed in each dialogue presentation may be the same or different. Specifically, when the dialogue effects include an effect pattern A in which a character, a speech bubble, and text are displayed (for example, an effect pattern like FIG. 64(E)), and an effect pattern B in which only a character and text (without a speech bubble) are displayed (for example, an effect pattern like FIG. 67(F) described below), a combination of the same type of effect is a combination of effect patterns A with each other or B with each other, and a combination of different types of effect is a combination of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. Furthermore, the characters displayed in each dialogue effect (characters corresponding to the dialogue) may be the same character or different characters, whether they are the same type or different types. The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has an effect pattern in which dialogue effects are displayed multiple times as described above, thereby enhancing the dramatic quality of the dialogue effects. Note that effect pattern A may be a first type of dialogue effect described below, and effect pattern B may be a second type of dialogue effect described below.

The dialogue presentation according to this embodiment may also be configured to have multiple presentation patterns. Examples of multiple presentation patterns include a first type of dialogue presentation in which the character color and character size (here, character size refers to the size of the area in which one character is displayed, including margins) are consistent for at least each character string displayed in the dialogue presentation (for example, a dialogue presentation in which each character in the character string "Let's go!" is the same size; for example, a dialogue presentation in which the character color and character size (here, character size refers to the size of the area in which one character is displayed, including margins) are consistent for at least each character string, even if the characters occupy different sizes of areas, such as "麒" and "!", if the image data is drawn in a 2-centimeter square area; and for different characters in the character string "麒" and "!", if the image data is drawn in a 1-centimeter square area and "!" is drawn in a 5-centimeter square area, the characters will have different sizes). In this case, the dialogue presentations shown in Figures 63 and 64 correspond to the first type of dialogue presentation, and the dialogue presentations shown in Figure 65, which will be described later, correspond to the second type of dialogue presentation. By providing a wide variety of dialogue presentations in this way, the presentation quality of the dialogue presentations can be improved.

Figure 65 shows the screen transitions in a third example of a dialogue effect. According to Figure 65, the changing main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed in the image display area 700 (Figure 65(A)), and then an operation request effect (PUSH button image) appears (Figure 65(B)). Then, in Figure 65(C), a string (line) of "Shall we go?" from character A is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700. Next, in Figure 65(D), in response to character A's line, a string (line) of "Let's go!" from character B is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700. Then, in Figure 65(E), the line from character B in Figure 65(D) is maintained, and a new string (line) of "We'll be together until the end!" from character C is added to the top of the image display area 700, and the effect develops into an SP reach effect in Figure 65(F).

In the transition shown in Figure 65, character strings (lines) associated with the characters are displayed in Figures 65(C), (D), and (E). In the line of character C in Figure 65(E), only the two characters "end" (the end) are larger in size than the other characters, and a different font is used. Here, "font" refers to the shape of characters contained in typeface data stored for computer output, and "characters with the same font" means characters in the same typeface, and "characters with different fonts" means characters in different typefaces (in this explanation, font and character size are treated separately, and differences in character size are not related to differences in font). Specifically, for example, in the line of character C in Figure 65(E), "We'll be together until the end!", the two characters "end" are written in a Mincho font, while the characters "until the end!" are written in a Gothic font, meaning that the fonts used are different. Additionally, the text color of the character's lines in Figures 65(C), (D), and (E) may be the normal white, or colors with a suggestive expectation such as red or rainbow colors, but the text color for each line (character string) is uniform. Therefore, the series of line presentations shown in Figure 65, or the line presentation in Figure 65(E), corresponds to the second type of line presentation described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, to further clarify the distinction between the first and second types of dialogue presentation, restrictions may be added, such as, for example, in the first type, the character string is displayed within a speech bubble frame, and in the second type, the character string is displayed without a speech bubble frame, with some highlighted characters displayed in a larger size than the other characters. Furthermore, in the second type of dialogue presentation, characters that are displayed in a different color or size from the other characters may also be configured to use a different font.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may also have a presentation pattern that can display a specific pattern different from normal display in a specific location on the display image due to a dialogue effect. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also have a presentation pattern that can display the specific pattern in other game effects (e.g., step-up effects, stage change effects that suggest or notify changes in the presentation stage, etc.). In this case, the specific pattern is configured to be displayed relatively finely (small) in the dialogue effect and coarsely (large) in the other game effects (stage effects and stage change effects will be described later). A typical example of a "specific pattern" is the aforementioned "manufacturer pattern." Examples of "specific locations on the display image due to a dialogue effect" where a specific pattern can be displayed in a dialogue effect include, for example, the background image of a text string display, the inside or outside of a speech bubble frame, or a character image corresponding to the text string display. Specific examples of the display of such specific patterns are shown in Figure 66. The above-mentioned specific patterns may also be configured to be displayed in the subtitle effects described below. In such a configuration, it is preferable to display them in even finer detail (smaller) than in the dialogue effects (for example, if the characters in a string of characters in a subtitle effect have a specific pattern, it is preferable to display them in very fine detail).

Figure 66 shows examples of manufacturer patterns. Figure 66(A) shows an example of manufacturer patterns displayed in dialogue presentations, and Figure 66(B) shows an example of manufacturer patterns displayed in stage change presentations. In Figures 66(A) and 66(B), a "giraffe pattern" that imitates the pattern on a giraffe's skin is used as an example of a manufacturer pattern.

Figure 66(A) shows an example of a display image for a dialogue effect, in which the lines of characters B and C are displayed as text within their respective speech bubble frames. A manufacturer pattern (giraffe pattern) is displayed in the background image (inside the speech bubble image) of the text "We'll be together until the end!" uttered by character C. Meanwhile, Figure 66(B) shows a background stage depicting a cityscape and character B walking, as an example of a display image for a stage change effect in which the background stage changes. The manufacturer pattern (giraffe pattern) is displayed in the portion of the background stage that corresponds to the "road." Comparing Figure 66(A) and Figure 66(B), it can be seen that the manufacturer pattern in Figure 66(A) is finer (smaller). The manufacturer pattern (giraffe pattern) may also be displayed in the step-up effect described above. For example, when the manufacturer pattern (giraffe pattern) is displayed within the image inside a square frame, it is preferable to configure the manufacturer pattern so that it is displayed coarsely (larger). Furthermore, when the caption effect described below is displayed and the text has a giraffe pattern, it is preferable that the pattern be finer (smaller) than any of the giraffe patterns in other effects.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the features related to the presentation patterns of the multiple types of dialogue presentations described above, as well as the features related to the display of specific patterns (manufacturer patterns) in dialogue presentations, may be applied to text presentations in general. In other words, dialogue presentations may be interpreted as subtitle presentations.

<3-3. Development patterns of character string display in dialogue presentation>
In addition to the first to third examples described above, dialogue presentations can display a series of characters (lines) in various transition patterns. Therefore, the following describes the first to fifth patterns of dialogue development as transition patterns for displaying a series of characters in dialogue presentations, and explains their characteristics.

Figure 67 is a diagram explaining the first to third patterns of dialogue development. Figure 67 shows the transition of the displayed image in the image display area 700.

According to Figure 67, first, the changing main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed (Figure 67(A)). After that, a dialogue effect begins, and a string of characters (lines) saying "Shall we go?" by character A is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700 (Figure 67(B)). If the effect does not continue from the string display in Figure 67(B), for example, after a predetermined change time has passed, the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed stationary in a losing state (e.g., "518") (Figure 67(C)), and the effect for that change ends. This pattern in which the development of the dialogue effect ends with the first string display (first line) is the first dialogue development pattern. Note that the first dialogue development pattern may also include an effect pattern in which a reach state is established or the effect then develops into an SP reach effect.

On the other hand, if the effect continues from the character string display in Figure 67(B), it transitions to Figure 67(D). In Figure 67(D), character B appears near the center of the image display area 700 and the character string (line) "Let's go!" is displayed. If the effect does not continue from the character string display in Figure 67(D), for example, the main decorative pattern 710 enters a reach state (in this example, a reach is achieved with the "5" pattern), and the effect develops into an SP reach effect (Figure 67(E)). This pattern in which the development of the line effect ends with the second character string display (second line) is the second pattern of line development.

On the other hand, if the effect continues from the character string display in FIG. 67(D), a transition occurs to FIG. 67(F). In FIG. 67(F), character B appears near the center of the image display area 700 in a more emphasized manner than in FIG. 67(B) or FIG. 67(D), and the character string "Let's go!" representing character B's line is displayed. To explain the emphasized manner more specifically, in FIG. 67(D), the character string is displayed within character B's speech bubble, whereas in FIG. 67(F), there is no character string bubble for character B, and the character string is displayed next to character B in a larger font size. Furthermore, in FIG. 67(F), an emphasis line that was not displayed in FIG. 67(D) etc. is added to the background of character B, and character B itself is displayed larger. Then, after the character string display in FIG. 67(F) is performed, the main decorative pattern 710 enters a reach state (in this example, a reach is achieved with the "7" pattern), and the effect progresses to an SP reach effect (FIG. 67(G)). This pattern, in which the dialogue performance ends with the third display of text (third line), is the third dialogue development pattern.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may have a presentation specification in which a reach state resulting from a specific symbol, in this example, the "7" symbol, has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach states resulting from other symbols. In this case, when the SP reach effect is reached in the third dialogue development pattern, by deriving a reach state resulting from the "7" symbol as shown in FIG. 67(G), the presentation can be configured to increase the expectation of a jackpot compared to reach states resulting from the first or second dialogue development pattern. In other words, the more times the character string is displayed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot can be added to the gameplay. When configured in this way, the reach state resulting from the "7" symbol is more likely to occur in the second pattern than in the first pattern, and more likely to occur in the third pattern than in the second pattern.

Furthermore, when multiple character string displays are possible, such as in the second and third dialogue development patterns described above, the character color of the character string is generally not downgraded, and if a character color upgrade occurs midway, the character color is guaranteed to be higher from then on. However, when a specific type of dialogue presentation (for example, a character string display including large characters), such as the second type of dialogue presentation illustrated in Figure 65 (E) is combined, the character color may be downgraded. More specifically, for example, the character color used in a character string display including large characters may be limited to a specific color (for example, the normal color white).

Figure 68 is a diagram explaining the fourth and fifth patterns of dialogue development. Figure 68 shows the transition of the displayed image in the image display area 700.

According to Figure 68, first, the changing main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed (Figure 68(A)). Then, the dialogue presentation begins, and the first line is displayed as a string (line) of "Shall we go?" by character A at the bottom of the image display area 700 (Figure 68(B)). After that, an operation request presentation appears, and a push button image is displayed near the center of the image display area 700 (Figure 68(C)). Note that in Figure 68(C), the string of characters displayed by character A in Figure 68(B) remains, resulting in a state in which the dialogue presentation and the operation request presentation are combined. In Figure 68(C), the main decorative pattern 710 is hidden by the push button image, but the display state of the main decorative pattern 710 is compensated for by the changing display of the sub-decorative pattern 720.

In Figure 68(C), if the player presses (PUSHes) effect button 3j within the valid operation period, or if the valid operation period has elapsed, the dialogue presentation will transition to the next stage. If this transition destination is Figure 68(D), this corresponds to the fourth pattern of dialogue development, and if the transition destination is Figure 68(F), this corresponds to the fifth pattern of dialogue development. As a variant, if the player does not press (PUSHes) effect button 3j within the valid operation period and the valid operation period has elapsed, the presentation may not transition to Figure 68(D) (the display state of Figure 68(C) may be maintained).

In the fourth dialogue development pattern, in Figure 68(D), which is transitioned from Figure 68(C), the text display (first line) by character A in Figure 68(B) is maintained, and a new text display (second line) by character B, "Let's go!", is added to the top of the image display area 700. After the dialogue performance ends, the performance develops into an SP reach performance, as shown in Figure 68(E), for example.

As can be seen from the above transition examples, the fourth dialogue development pattern is executed in conjunction with an operation request presentation, and is characterized by the fact that, in a dialogue presentation in which text is displayed multiple times, the second line is displayed in a different manner from the first line (in other words, the next line is displayed in a different manner from the previous line). Specifically, the first line and the second line being in different manners means that the accompanying characters (the characters speaking) are different, and/or the display areas for the text (lines) are different, and/or the content of the text (lines) is different.

On the other hand, in the fifth dialogue development pattern, in Figure 68(F) transitioned from Figure 68(C), the image of the character and speech bubble frame of the text display (first line) by Character A in Figure 68(B) is maintained, and a new text display (second line) of "Let's go!" is displayed in the same speech bubble. Then, after the dialogue display ends, it develops into an SP reach display, for example, as shown in Figure 68(G). As a variant, if the player does not press (PUSH) the display button 3j within the valid operation period and the valid operation period has elapsed, the display may not transition to Figure 68(F) (the display state of Figure 68(C) may be maintained).

As can be seen from the above transition examples, the fifth dialogue development pattern is executed in conjunction with an operation request presentation, and is characterized by the fact that, in a dialogue presentation in which text is displayed multiple times, the second dialogue is displayed in a manner in which the content of the first dialogue changes (in other words, the next text is displayed in a manner in which the immediately preceding text display changes). Specifically, the manner in which the content of the first dialogue changes to become the second dialogue means that the accompanying character (the character speaking) is the same between the first and second dialogue, the display area for the text (dialogue) is the same, but the content of the text (dialogue) is different.

In the fourth and fifth dialogue development patterns described above, the PUSH button image (Figure 68 (C)) is displayed as a general rule after the audio output corresponding to the character string display of the first dialogue is completed; however, if the first dialogue is relatively long (for example, a line of 20 or more characters such as "I've been waiting for more than 10 years for the day I will fight you!"), the effect button image may be displayed before the audio output is completed. However, if the PUSH button image is displayed before the audio output corresponding to the character string display of the first dialogue is completed, the audio output is terminated by operating the effect button. As a variation, even if the PUSH button image is displayed before the audio output corresponding to the character string display of the first dialogue is completed, the audio output may not be terminated by operating the effect button, but may be executed simultaneously and in parallel with the audio output corresponding to the character string display of the second dialogue. Furthermore, when the effect button 3j is pressed, the character string display of the second line is changed to the fourth pattern, where the first line remains displayed and the second line is additionally displayed, and in the fifth pattern, the display switches from the first line to the second line.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be configured to be able to execute dialogue effects even in short fluctuation situations in which the fluctuation time of special symbols (which may also be interpreted as decorative symbols) is shortened when the number of pending symbols exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., three pending symbols) and the game result of that fluctuation is a loss. However, when dialogue effects are executed during a short fluctuation, the effect control board 200 preferably controls to limit the development of the character string display. Specifically, when any of the second to fifth dialogue development patterns is executed during a short fluctuation, the dialogue effect does not develop to the display of the second line of dialogue, but ends with the display of the first line of dialogue. This control allows dialogue effects to be incorporated even in short fluctuations, which is expected to have the effect of enhancing playability. Here, in the case of a short fluctuation, the first line of dialogue effect may end midway through the display of the first line of dialogue and/or midway through the audio output corresponding to the display of the first line of dialogue.

When dialogue presentation is performed while controlling the development of the character string display during a short variation, the audio output corresponding to the first line can be controlled according to one of the following policies: "It is preset to fit within the variation time of the short variation," "Audio output of the first line that does not fit within the variation time of the short variation is output continuously in the next variation," or "Audio output of the first line that does not fit within the variation time of the short variation is terminated when the short variation ends (it does not continue to the next variation)." However, regardless of which policy is used, it is highly preferable to configure the character string display so that it is completed (the display does not end halfway through and not end with all characters being displayed).

<4. Subtitle Production>
A description will be given of a telop effect, which is one of the game effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment. As described above in the description of the dialogue effect, the telop effect is a game effect that belongs to the text effect along with the dialogue effect.

A caption effect is an effect in which text is displayed on the effect display device 70 at a specific timing during a specified game period, and the content and color of the text can suggest the game result or the level of expectation for the game development. However, this "specific timing" is considered to be a timing after the "specified timing" at which the dialogue effect is executed as described above. In the following explanation, the "specified timing" at which the caption effect is executed is considered to be any timing between the time when a reach state is established by the decorative pattern 710 on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) and the development into an SP reach effect, and the time when the decorative pattern 710 stops changing. However, in reality, this timing may be any timing during other game periods (for example, while the special or decorative pattern is changing, or during a jackpot game) as long as it is a timing after the specified timing at which the dialogue effect is executed.

<4-1. Examples of subtitle effects>
Figure 69 shows an example of screen transitions for telop effects. First, in Figure 69(A), a main decorative pattern 710 and a sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed in the image display area 700 while they are changing. The main decorative pattern 710 then continues to change, and in Figure 69(B), a "7" symbol creates a ready-to-win state, leading to an SP ready-to-win effect. During this SP ready-to-win effect, telop effects appear in Figures 69(C) to 69(E).

In caption effects, text is displayed while a moving image is displayed, and when a character is displayed in the moving image, captions (subtitles) showing the content of the character's speech are displayed as text accompanying the character. In Figure 69 (C), ally character Character A is displayed in the moving image in the image display area 700, and the text (caption) "Sorry to keep you waiting" is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700 as text accompanying Character A. Also, from Figure 69 (C), the main decorative pattern 710 is no longer displayed due to the caption effect display, but the display state of the main decorative pattern 710 is compensated for by the continued variable display of the sub decorative pattern 720 in the upper right corner of the image display area 700.

Next, in Figure 69(D), Character I, one of the enemy characters, is displayed large, and the character string (caption) "Come on!" is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700 as a character string associated with Character I. Then, in the next Figure 69(E), a moving image is displayed showing Character A and Character I facing off, and the character string (caption) "Let's settle this" is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700 as a character string associated with Character A (or Character I). The caption presentation extends up to Figure 69(E) (as mentioned above, when story-based captions are displayed separately for each scene, as in Figure 69, that is, when captions are displayed multiple times, all of the story-based captions are considered to be one type of caption presentation, and the caption presentation in each scene is considered to be a portion of one type of caption presentation). Furthermore, if there are multiple types of SP Reach (for example, if there are three types, SP Reach A, SP Reach B, and SP Reach C, in order of expected winning probability), the content of the caption presentation (the content of the text strings displayed, the characters that appear, the number of times the text strings are displayed, etc.) will be different for each SP Reach.

Next, in Figure 69(F), an operation request effect appears in the image display area 700, and a large-sized PUSH button image is displayed. Note that in Figure 69(F), the PUSH button image is displayed almost entirely in the image display area 700, but as mentioned above, the display state of the main decorative pattern 710 is compensated for by the sub-decorative pattern 720. Then, when the player presses (PUSHes) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period in Figure 69(F), or when the valid operation period has elapsed, the displayed image branches to Figure 69(G) or Figure 69(I) based on the game result (jackpot/miss) of that variation.

Figure 69 (G) is an example of a display image when the game result of the relevant variation is a jackpot. In Figure 69 (G), an image evocative of the victory of ally character A is displayed, and then, in Figure 69 (H), the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed stationary in a jackpot mode (in this example, "777"). Note that in Figure 69 (G), character A shouts "Orayaa!", but no text corresponding to this utterance is displayed. Also, at this time, character A may shout the name of a special move. In this case, no text corresponding to the name of the special move (in response to this utterance) is displayed as a caption effect, but the name of the special move may be displayed in large letters across the entire screen (for example, the text "Secret technique XX!" may be displayed to cover the entire screen).

On the other hand, Figure 69(I) is an example of a display image when the game result of the corresponding variation is a loss. In Figure 69(I), an image is displayed that evokes the defeat of ally character A (in other words, the victory of enemy character I), and then in Figure 69(J), the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed in a loss mode (in this example, "767"). Although not shown in Figure 69, if the game result of the corresponding variation is a jackpot, an image suggesting a loss for character A, as in Figure 69(I), can be displayed, followed by an image showing a reversal in which character A wins. If character A wins, the display transitions to the jackpot result shown in Figure 69(H). In Figure 69(I), character I shouts "Hahaha!", but no text corresponding to the utterance is displayed. At this time, character I may also shout the name of the special move; in this case, no text string corresponding to the name of the special move (in response to the speech) is displayed as a caption effect, but the name of the special move may be displayed in large letters across the entire screen (for example, the letters "Special move XX!" may be displayed covering the entire screen); however, because this is a losing situation, the name of the special move may not be displayed to avoid further discouraging the player.

The above describes an example of the telop effect shown in Figure 69. In Figures 69 (C), (D), and (E), the text color of the string of characters (telop) displayed by the telop effect is normally white, but it may be another text color that suggests the degree of expectation for the game outcome or game development (for example, red or rainbow colors that suggest high expectations). Furthermore, the characters that appear in the telop effect are not limited to Character A and Character I, but may be other characters shown in Figure 59, for example. The characters (or combinations thereof) that appear in the telop effect may also suggest the degree of expectation for the game outcome or game development.

<4-2. Features of subtitle production>
Based on the above specific example, the following describes the features of the telop effects that can be executed by the effect control board 200 in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment. Note that the telop effects according to this embodiment do not need to be configured to have all of the following multiple features, but may be configured to have at least one of the features or a combination of multiple features.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the telop effect typically involves the display of a moving image including a character, and the display of text corresponding to the progression of the moving image (specifically, a telop showing the character's speech in the moving image (including unspoken thoughts)). The moving image displayed in this telop effect may be, for example, a movie displayed across the entire screen (or substantially the entire screen) of the image display area 700. As mentioned above, the color of the text displayed in the telop effect can suggest different expectations regarding the game outcome or game development. By configuring the telop effect in this manner, the content related to the effect (for example, the content of the character's speech) can be visually displayed in the form of subtitles, and the expectation regarding the game outcome or game development can be suggested using the highly distinctive color of the text, thereby providing an effect that heightens interest in the game. Here, the character color of the character strings displayed in the telop effect may be the same for all of the telop character strings from FIG. 69(C) onward, for example. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the character string to be red rather than white, the manufacturer's pattern rather than red, or a rainbow rather than a manufacturer's pattern, so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher. Alternatively, the character color of the telop character string may be changed during the telop effect. For example, the character color of the telop character string in FIG. 69(C) may be white, while the character color of all of the telop character strings from FIG. 69(D) onward may be red. Alternatively, the character color of the telop character string in FIG. 69(C) may be white, the character color of the telop character string in FIG. 69(D) may be red, and the character color of the telop character string in FIG. 69(E) may be a manufacturer's pattern or a rainbow.

Furthermore, in the caption presentation according to this embodiment, the displayed moving image may not generally output audio corresponding to the character's speech, but audio may also be output. Furthermore, the caption may be displayed in a dedicated display area (in the case of Figure 69, the bottom edge of the image display area 700).

Furthermore, the telop effect according to this embodiment basically appears at a timing (specific timing) later than the timing (predetermined timing) at which the dialogue effect appears. Specific examples include, but are not limited to, after a reach is achieved or after an SP reach effect develops. Furthermore, as another example of the telop effect, it may be configured so that a specific timing is set before the predetermined timing.

The telop effect according to this embodiment can also be combined with various other types of game effects. For example, Figure 69 shows an example in which a telop effect appears during an SP reach effect. However, other than this, the effect control board 200 may also be configured to select an effect pattern in which a dialogue effect or a pseudo-consecutive effect appears before the telop effect. Note that, since telop effects generally display moving images with a fixed display time (for example, 60-second moving images related to SP reach, such as those shown in Figure 69(C) and subsequent figures), operation request effects that may affect the timing of the transition of the display screen cannot, as a general rule, be combined with telop effects. However, as shown in Figure 69(F), it is possible to display an operation request effect after a telop effect (display of moving images or telop). Furthermore, after the operation request effect is displayed, a new caption effect may be displayed; for example, in the event of a jackpot (win), a caption saying "I win!" may be displayed (and an audio output of a speech corresponding to that caption), and in the event of a loss (loss), a caption saying "I lose..." may be displayed (and an audio output of a speech corresponding to that caption). In such a configuration, it is preferable to think of the combination of the caption effect before the operation request effect is displayed and the caption effect after the operation request effect is displayed as a single caption effect with a story (in other words, this combination is one type of caption effect).

Furthermore, in the telop effect according to this embodiment, as with the dialogue effect, the degree of expectation for the game outcome or game development may be suggested not only by the color of the displayed text string but also by the characters (or combinations thereof) that are displayed. By configuring it in this way, the telop effect has the effect of attracting the player's interest not only by the color of the text in the displayed telop, but also by the characters that appear. Furthermore, the number of types of characters that can be displayed in the telop effect is not limited to the same number as the number of types of characters that can be displayed in the dialogue effect; for example, the telop effect may have fewer types of characters (but the dialogue effect may have more types of characters).

Furthermore, the text (captions) displayed in the caption effects according to this embodiment do not have to be the entire audio output in the caption effect converted into captions (subtitles); only part of the audio output may be converted into captions. Specifically, for example, in caption effects that appear during SP reach effects, audio other than that spoken by the main characters (such as audio corresponding to the speech of minor characters, sound effects, and special background music with lyrics during SP reach effects) may not be displayed as text.

Furthermore, in the caption presentation according to this embodiment, when two or more (main) characters speak simultaneously in a moving image, the text (caption) may be displayed on a separate line for each character (in other words, on multiple lines). For example, in a moving image showing a situation in which character A and character I are speaking simultaneously, a caption such as "Woohoo!" corresponding to character A's speech may be displayed, and below that a caption such as "Haaa!" corresponding to character I's speech may be displayed. By configuring it in this way, even when the caption display area is fixed to a dedicated area, the player can distinguish that the speakers are different, allowing for a deeper understanding of the content of the moving image.

Furthermore, when the caption effect according to this embodiment appears in a specific game state, the displayed text may be configured to use a predetermined color (e.g., the standard white) rather than a text color (e.g., red) or pattern (e.g., manufacturer's pattern) that indicates the expected level. The "specific game state" described above refers, for example, to a jackpot game or a time-saving game period. The caption effect that appears in these specific game states may be, for example, lyrics displayed in a video that outputs music (e.g., video corresponding to each song when multiple types of songs with lyrics can be selected and played by operating the effect button 3j or a cross key (not shown), and the video is configured to vary depending on the selected song), or subtitles of character conversations displayed in a video with a story (e.g., video introducing character A or a story related to character B). However, as a variation of the above feature, a text color that suggests a low expectation level (e.g., red) may not be used for the caption text color, but specific colors that suggest an extremely high expectation level (e.g., gold or rainbow) may be used. For example, if a video introducing a specific story (e.g., a video displayed when a predetermined number of consecutive wins has been reached, or a special video displayed when a predetermined condition related to consecutive wins is met, such as when the total number of game balls acquired during the consecutive wins has reached a certain value) is displayed during a jackpot game, the content of the speech of multiple characters appearing in that story may be displayed, for example, as a rainbow-colored caption effect.

<5. Dialogue and subtitle direction>
In this chapter, we will explain the dialogue and subtitle effects that belong to text effects, explain the combination of dialogue and subtitle effects, and compare the characteristics of dialogue and subtitle effects.

<5-1. Combining dialogue and subtitle presentations>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect control board 200 is capable of executing an effect pattern in which a dialogue effect and a telop effect are displayed during the same variation of a special symbol. Here, the dialogue effect and the telop effect can indicate the degree of expectation for the game outcome or game development by the character color of the character string displayed in each effect, and the character colors include at least a first character color and a second character color that has a relatively higher expectation than the first character color. The above effect pattern includes an effect configuration in which a dialogue effect in which character strings (dialogue display) are displayed in the second character color that has a relatively higher expectation, and then a telop effect in which character strings (telop display) are displayed in the first character color that has a lower expectation than the second character color, is displayed.

Figure 70 shows an example of a screen transition in which dialogue and caption effects appear. First, in Figure 70 (A), the changing main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed in the image display area 700. The main decorative pattern 710 then continues to change, and in Figure 70 (B), a reach state is established with the "5" symbol, and a normal reach begins. In the middle of this normal reach, dialogue effects appear in Figure 70 (C).

In the dialogue presentation of Figure 70(C), for example, character B appears in an emphasized manner near the center of the image display area 700, and the text "Let's go!", representing character B's lines, is displayed in large font size within a speech bubble frame. Details will be described later, but in Figure 70(C), the text "Let's go!" is displayed overlapping (superimposed) on the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720. After the dialogue presentation of Figure 70(C) appears, it develops into, for example, an SP reach presentation, and the SP reach presentation is executed from Figure 70(D) to Figure 70(H) or Figure 70(I).

In the SP Reach effect, the name of the SP Reach effect to be initiated (in this example, "The Final Battle") is displayed across the entire image display area 700 in Figure 70(D). Then, within the SP Reach effect, a caption effect appears in Figure 70(E). The "The Final Battle" character string may also have multiple colors, such as white, red, manufacturer's design, or rainbow, in order of jackpot expectation. White is the normal color (normal color, default color), while red, manufacturer's design, and rainbow suggest higher jackpot expectation than white. When using red, manufacturer's design, or rainbow as the character color, the "The Final Battle" character string may be red, manufacturer's design, or rainbow from the start of its display. Alternatively, the "The Final Battle" character string may be white at the start of its display and then suddenly change to red, manufacturer's design, or rainbow. The number of black stars indicates the expectation of the SP Reach, but the number may vary depending on the type of SP Reach. Additionally, the number of black stars may be configured to be greater when the character string in the name of the SP reach effect is red, a manufacturer pattern, or rainbow than when it is white, even if it is the same SP reach (same SP reach effect name).

In the caption effect of Figure 70 (E), for example, a moving image of character B and character I facing off is displayed, and the text (caption) "Let's settle it" is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700 as a string of text associated with character B (or character I).

Next, in Figure 70 (F), an image (or a moving image) is displayed showing the moment when the showdown between Character B and Character I is about to come to an end. However, since Figure 70 (F) is not a caption effect, no caption for Character B (or Character I) is displayed.

In the next Figure 70(G), an operation request effect appears in the image display area 700, and a large-sized PUSH button image is displayed. Then, when the player presses (PUSHes) effect button 3j within the valid operation period in Figure 70(G), or when the valid operation period has elapsed, the displayed image branches to either Figure 70(H) or Figure 70(J) based on the game result (jackpot/miss) of that variation. In Figure 70(G), whether the player presses (PUSHes) effect button 3j or not, the image always branches to either Figure 70(H) or Figure 70(J), and when transitioning to Figure 70(H), decorative gadgets 781 and 782 activate with a seven-color gradation illumination. However, if the player presses (PUSHes) the effect button 3j, that is, if the effect button 3j is pressed (PUSHed) before the valid operation period has expired (for example, immediately after the valid operation period has begun), the duration of operation of the decorative reels 781, 782 with the seven-color gradation illumination and/or the duration of the "WIN" message (described below) will be longer than if the effect button 3j is not pressed (PUSHed). Furthermore, after the operation request effect is displayed, a new telop effect may be displayed. For example, in the event of a jackpot (win), a telop saying "I win!" (and a corresponding speech output) may be displayed, and in the event of a loss (loss), a telop saying "I lose..." (and a corresponding speech output) may be displayed. In such a configuration, it is preferable to consider the combination of the telop effect before the operation request effect and the telop effect after the operation request effect are displayed as a single story-like telop effect (i.e., this combination is one type of telop effect).

Figure 70 (H) is an example of a display image when the game result of the change is a jackpot. In Figure 70 (H), a "WIN" character string image is displayed, indicating the victory of ally character B, and then in Figure 70 (I), the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed stopped in a jackpot mode (in this example, "555").

On the other hand, Figure 70 (J) is an example of a display image when the game result for that variation is a loss. In Figure 70 (J), a text image of "LOSE" is displayed, indicating that ally character B has lost, and then in Figure 70 (K), the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed stopped in a loss mode (in this example, "545").

As shown in Figure 70, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can display dialogue effects and caption effects during the same variation of special symbols. As mentioned in the individual explanations of dialogue effects and caption effects, the text displayed in each effect is usually displayed in a predetermined standard color (e.g., white), but may also be displayed using a text color (e.g., red or rainbow) that suggests the game result or the degree of expectation for the game's development. Therefore, even when dialogue effects and caption effects are displayed during the same variation of special symbols, the text may be displayed using different text colors for the dialogue effects and caption effects.

Here, we will explain in detail how to change the text color of the text displayed in the dialogue and caption effects during the same special symbol variation. Generally, once an upgrade occurs during the same variation, the indication of the expected level only indicates a higher level of expected level. However, in this embodiment, a downgrading effect pattern is also possible, in which the dialogue effect appears in a text color indicating a high expected level (e.g., red) and the caption effect appears in a text color indicating a low expected level (e.g., white or blue). This configuration increases the variety of expected level indications based on the text color (text color combination patterns), providing a more diverse gameplay experience. Furthermore, when a caption effect appears during a specific effect (e.g., a type of SP reach effect, a full rotation effect that confirms a jackpot), a display pattern may be provided in which the text is always displayed in a specific color (white) different from the text color indicating a high expected level (there is only one text color variation). As a variant, when a caption effect appears during a specific effect (for example, a type of SP reach effect, a full rotation effect that confirms a jackpot), a pattern may be prepared in which text is always displayed in a character color (rainbow) that indicates high expectations (there is only one character color variation).

In addition, in this embodiment, when dialogue effects and telop effects can be made to appear during the same variation of special symbols, the dialogue effects and telop effects may be configured to branch out depending on their respective success and failure patterns. For example, a successful dialogue effect after a reach is achieved is one that develops into an SP reach effect, and a failure dialogue effect after a reach is one that results in a normal reach (without developing into an SP reach effect). If a dialogue effect leads to a failure pattern, the SP reach effect will not develop, and no telop effects will occur thereafter during the same variation of special symbols. With the above configuration, the importance of the success or failure of the dialogue effects is increased, which has the effect of attracting the player's interest in the dialogue effects that appear earlier than the telop effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, when dialogue effects and caption effects can be made to appear during the same change of special symbols, the dialogue effects may occur before a reach is achieved. For example, a display pattern can be prepared in which a successful dialogue effect results in a reach, and a failed dialogue effect results in a reach failure. If a dialogue effect leads to a failed pattern, the reach state is not achieved, and no caption effects will occur thereafter during the same change of special symbols. With the above configuration, the success or failure of the dialogue effects is increased, which is expected to have the effect of increasing the player's interest in the dialogue effects.

<5-2. Comparison of the characteristics of dialogue and subtitle presentations>
Below, we will compare the characteristics of dialogue presentation and subtitle presentation, which are both text presentations.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be configured so that an operation request effect is more likely to occur after a caption effect during the same variation than after a dialogue effect. Specifically, it is preferable that the rate at which an operation request effect occurs within the same variation after a dialogue effect appears is 40%, and the rate at which an operation request effect occurs within the same variation after a caption effect appears is 90%. Generally, an operation request effect is an effect that increases expectations for the game outcome or game development, so when configured as described above, it is possible to give more importance to the caption effect than to the dialogue effect.

Furthermore, the operation request effect generated in the above situation may have multiple types of effect patterns that suggest different degrees of expectation regarding the outcome of the effect, and the operation request effect that appears after a caption effect during the same change may be configured to be more likely to select a specific effect pattern with a higher degree of expectation (e.g., a push button image with a red effect, a push button image with a group effect, etc.) than the operation request effect that appears after a dialogue effect during the same change. Here, as the operation request effect, the normal push button image has the lowest expectation, followed by the push button image with a red effect, the normal push button image with a group effect, and the push button image with a red effect and a group effect, in that order. The group effect is an effect in which specific effects gather from above, below, left, and right before the PUSH button image is displayed, as if forming a PUSH button image (if the PUSH button image is displayed without the group effect, the PUSH button image will suddenly appear without any PUSH button image; in other words, the group effect not only indicates high expectations, but also serves to suggest in advance that the PUSH button image will soon be displayed). Furthermore, for example, if an operation request effect occurs within the same variation after a dialogue effect appears, in the case of a jackpot, the operation request effect will be displayed as a regular PUSH button image 60% of the time and a PUSH button image with a red effect 40% of the time, and in the case of a miss, the operation request effect will be displayed as a regular PUSH button image 90% of the time and a PUSH button image with a red effect 10% of the time, and if an operation request effect occurs within the same variation after a caption effect appears, in the case of a jackpot, the operation request effect will be displayed as a regular PUSH button image 10% of the time. %, the push button image with a red effect is displayed 20%, the regular push button image with a group effect 30%, and the push button image with a red effect and a group effect 40% of the time; if it's a miss, the operation request effect is preferably displayed as the regular push button image 40%, the push button image with a red effect 30%, the regular push button image with a group effect 20%, and the push button image with a red effect and a group effect 10% of the time. When configured in this way, the importance of the caption effect can be further increased compared to the dialogue effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the character string displayed in a predetermined dialogue effect (for example, a dialogue effect that appears before a reach is achieved) may be allowed to overlap the display area of the sub-decorative pattern. For example, in the dialogue effect in Figure 70(C), it can be seen that the bubble frame displaying the character string "Let's go!" overlaps the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720. However, in the case of Figure 70(C), although the character string display area of the dialogue effect overlaps the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720, the display priority of the sub-decorative pattern 720 is higher than the character string display area of the dialogue effect, so the visibility of the decorative pattern is ensured. As another example, the character string displayed in a predetermined dialogue effect may not be allowed to overlap the display area of the sub-decorative pattern (a display area that does not overlap with the display area of the sub-decorative pattern is set). If this alternative example is adopted, the effect of ensuring the visibility of the sub-decorative pattern (more broadly, the entire decorative pattern) can be achieved without any impact from the dialogue effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is preferable that the character strings displayed in a specified caption effect (for example, the caption effect that appears during an SP reach effect) are never allowed to overlap the display area of the sub-decorative pattern. By imposing such restrictions, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the decorative pattern from being impaired by the appearance of the caption effect (for example, a sub-decorative pattern being hidden even if it is attempted to be displayed as a substitute for the main decorative pattern), mainly in the latter half of the variable display of the special pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a dialogue effect and an operation request effect are combined, the timing at which the dialogue effect starts may be configured to vary depending on the operation request effect. In other words, the display of the dialogue effect may be restricted (delayed) until a predetermined condition in the operation request effect (execution of an input operation on the effect input device, or passage of the operation valid period) is met. On the other hand, the timing at which the caption effect starts (particularly the timing at which the caption is displayed) does not depend on the input operation on the effect input device associated with the operation request effect. In other words, the caption effect starts at a preset timing without being restricted by the input operation on the effect input device (for example, pressing effect button 3j, etc.).

Furthermore, in the dialogue presentation of this embodiment, an image of the presentation input device may be displayed in response to an operation request presentation while a string of characters (lines) is displayed in response to a dialogue presentation. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 68(C), a PUSH button image is displayed while the dialogue display of character A in the dialogue presentation displayed in FIG. 68(B) remains. Then, when presentation button 3j is pressed or the valid operation period has elapsed, the next string of characters displayed in the dialogue presentation is the dialogue of character B, as shown in FIG. 68(D). On the other hand, in the caption presentation of this embodiment, an image of the presentation input device in response to an operation request presentation is not displayed while a string of characters (caption) is displayed in response to a caption presentation. This is because the specifications do not cause changes during the caption presentation by pressing presentation button 3j in response to an operation request presentation, etc.; after the string of characters is displayed in the caption presentation, an image of the presentation input device in response to an operation request presentation may be displayed in response to an operation request presentation. As a variant, the configuration may be such that an image of the effect input device is displayed as an operation request effect while a character string (caption) is displayed as a caption effect. In such a configuration, the operation request effect while a character string (caption) is displayed as a caption effect preferably requests the effect button 3j to be pressed repeatedly (multiple times) (for example, as an operation request effect, a push button image is displayed along with the character string "Press repeatedly!", and the push button image continues to be displayed along with the character string "Press repeatedly!" even during the rapid pressing operation, and with each rapid pressing, the character's utterances change, such as "More!", "Not yet!", or "Don't give up until the end!", and the caption displayed changes accordingly).

6. Relationship between text effects (dialogue effects, subtitle effects) and other game effects
In this embodiment, the effect control board 200 can combine text effects (dialogue effects, telop effects) with other game effects to execute various effect patterns. In this chapter, the relationship between text effects and other game effects, etc., will be explained, along with representative examples of effect patterns as needed, to explain the characteristics of each.

<6-1. Combination with SP reach effects>
69 and 70, the specific timing at which the telop effect appears is set after the development of the SP reach effect, and as such, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the character effect (particularly the telop effect) can be executed in combination with the SP reach effect. Below, the combination of the character effect and the SP reach effect will be explained in detail, taking the telop effect as an example, and presenting another example of the effect (see FIG. 71).

First, we will explain the SP reach effect. The SP reach effect is a type of reach effect that appears when a reach state (for example, a state in which two of the three main decorative symbols stop at the same symbol) is indicated in the variable display of decorative symbols, and is a reach effect that offers a higher expectation of a game result (win) than a normal reach effect (normal reach effect). Like a typical pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has multiple types of SP reach effects. The SP reach effects may be started at various times. Specifically, for example, after a reach state is established (reach establishment), the normal reach effect may be followed by an SP reach effect midway through, or, for example, the SP reach effect may be established simultaneously with the establishment of reach. A normal reach effect is a reach effect that involves the playback and display of moving images that suggest high expectations and that have a storyline, while an SP reach effect is an effect that develops from a normal reach effect (and therefore can also be called an advanced effect), and is a reach effect that involves the playback and display of moving images that suggest high expectations and that have a storyline.

A typical example of an SP reach effect that can be executed in this embodiment is one in which an ally character battles an enemy character, and if the battle is won, a jackpot result is displayed, and if the battle is lost, a loss result is displayed, as shown in Figures 69 and 70. A revival pattern may also be provided in which a defeat in the battle is suggested, followed by a revival effect and then a victory (jackpot). A performance pattern may also be provided in which an operation request effect, a caption effect, or the like appears during the SP reach effect.

Figure 71 shows an example of a screen transition in which a caption effect and an SP reach effect are combined. Figure 71 (A) shows that a reach state has been established with the main decorative pattern 710 representing a "7". After this reach state, the SP reach effect develops, either partway through a normal reach effect, or simultaneously with the establishment of the reach state. During this normal reach effect, or before the normal reach effect is executed (before the reach is established), a step-up effect in which characters P and Q are displayed, or a dialogue effect, may be executed, and if executed, a jackpot (or a guaranteed jackpot) may be confirmed.

In the SP Reach performance, in Figure 71 (B), the name of the SP Reach performance that is about to begin (in this example, "The Moment of Decision") is displayed across the entire image display area 700. Then, within the SP Reach performance, a caption performance appears from Figure 71 (C). Also, from Figure 71 (B) to Figure 71 (G) and (I), the main decorative pattern 710 is hidden, but the sub decorative pattern 720 is always displayed.

In Figure 71 (C), where the display of moving images with caption effects has begun, ally character Character A is displayed, and the text "The enemy is close" (caption) is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700 as text accompanying Character A. In the next Figure 71 (D), Character H, one of the enemy characters, is added, and the text "We've been waiting for you" (caption) is displayed at the bottom of the image display area as text accompanying Character H.

Next, in Figure 71(E), a movable role effect occurs as the display of moving images through the caption effect progresses. In the case of Figure 71(E), decorative role effects 781 and 782 move to their operating positions and appear in front of the image display area 700, causing the character decoration "激" (fierce) on decorative role effect 781 and the character decoration "対" (fight) on decorative role effect 782 to be aligned side by side, and the word "激対対 (fierce fight)" is displayed to the player. Here, decorative role effects 781 and 782 are movable role effects that can move between an initial position that is difficult for the player to see and an operating position that is visible to the player, and their operation is controlled by the effect control board 200 (part effect control means 240). The initial positions of decorative role effects 781 and 782 are to the side of the effect display device 70 and behind the gaming panel 100b. The operating positions of the decorative symbols 781 and 782 are exposed near the center of the image display area 700, as shown in Figure 71 (E). When the decorative symbols 781 and 782 are moved to their operating positions, most of the image display area 700 is covered, but as shown in Figure 71 (E), the visibility of the decorative symbols is ensured by the display of the sub-decorative symbol 720. In this example, the display of the sub-decorative symbol 720 is allowed to be momentarily hidden while the decorative symbols 781 and 782 are moving from the standby position to the operating position. Alternatively, the display area of the sub-decorative symbol 720 may be secured in a display area that does not overlap with any operation of the decorative symbols 781 and 782 (which may be considered to include all decorative symbols not shown). Furthermore, in the movable character performance using decorative characters 781, 782, the decorative characters 781, 782 return from their operating positions to their initial positions after a preset time has elapsed, so the time schedule for the display of moving images through the caption performance is not affected. However, if an operational abnormality occurs in the decorative characters 781, 782 (for example, an event in which the decorative characters 781, 782 are unable to receive operational commands due to a motor failure or detected disconnection), the movable characters will not return to their initial positions, and if this condition continues, the visibility of the caption performance will be impaired. However, to ensure that the text in the caption performance can be understood even in such cases, it is preferable to configure the system so that the volume can be adjusted even in such situations and so that an error notification sound related to the operational abnormality is not generated even if the decorative characters 781, 782 experience an operational abnormality (this can be determined by the output audio).

Then, in Figure 71 (F), after the movable role device performance has ended, a video showing Character A and Character H facing off against each other is displayed in a caption performance, and the text "Let's settle it" (caption) is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700 as a string of text associated with Character A (or Character H). After that, based on the game result (jackpot/miss) of that change, the displayed image branches to Figure 71 (G) or Figure 71 (I).

Figure 71 (G) is an example of a display image when the game result of the change is a jackpot. In Figure 71 (G), an image is displayed that evokes the victory of ally character A, and then in Figure 71 (H), the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed stopped in a jackpot mode (in this example, "777").

On the other hand, Figure 71 (I) is an example of a display image when the game result of the relevant variation is a loss. In Figure 69 (I), an image is displayed that evokes the defeat of ally character A (in other words, the victory of enemy character character I), and then in Figure 71 (J), the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed stopped in a loss mode (in this example, "767"). Although not shown in Figure 71, if the game result of the relevant variation is a jackpot, it is also possible for an image suggesting a loss for character A, as in Figure 71 (I), to be displayed, followed by an image showing a reversal in which character A wins; if character A wins, the display will transition to the jackpot result of Figure 71 (H).

As explained above, in the performance example of Figure 71, a caption effect appears during the execution of the SP reach effect starting from Figure 71(B). The caption effect can be displayed for a period from Figure 71(C) to Figure 71(F). However, in this performance example, text (captions) are also displayed in Figures 70(G) and (I) after branching. Therefore, if two types of video images are prepared, including an image after branching depending on the winning or losing result, Figures 71(C) to 70(G) and Figures 71(C) to 71(I) may be configured as different types of caption effects. Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the performance example of Figure 71, a movable character effect can be executed during the caption effect, which does not affect the progress of the video display due to the caption effect.

Based on the above specific examples, in this embodiment, the effect patterns that can be executed by combining text effects (telop effects, dialogue effects) and SP reach effects can have the following characteristics. Note that the effect patterns do not need to be configured with all of the multiple characteristics listed below; they only need to be configured with at least one of the characteristics, or a combination of multiple characteristics.

In this embodiment, when executed in combination with the SP Reach effect, the text displayed in the caption effect can have a variety of different color variations that indicate the expected level, thereby enhancing the playability of the caption effect.

For example, it is possible to upgrade or downgrade the text color within a telop effect. Specifically, for the three telop displays in Figures 71 (C), (D), and (F), in the case of an upgrade, the text color can change from "white" to "white/red" to "red/rainbow," and in the case of a downgrade, the text color can change from "white" to "red" to "white." The trigger for the text color change can also be set to a specific timing (for example, a predetermined division in an SP reach effect, a win/loss indication, the occurrence of a cut-in effect or a special effect, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, when a chance increase in the suggested expectation level occurs in the telop effect during an SP reach effect, and a specific display indicating a winning (jackpot) game result is subsequently displayed, the text color in the text display after the specific display may be upgraded or downgraded. To explain in more detail using a specific example, during the telop effect during an SP reach effect, the telop is displayed in a predetermined text color (e.g., red or gold) that suggests a relatively high expectation level, and when a specific display for the winning (jackpot) route is displayed at the subsequent win/loss branch (e.g., see FIG. 71(G)), the text color of subsequent telop displays within the same variation may be upgraded (e.g., to rainbow color) or downgraded (e.g., to the standard white color). In other words, during the telop effect during an SP reach effect, when a specific display indicating a winning (jackpot) game result is displayed via a text display (chance increase) using a text color with a high expectation level, the telop may be displayed in a text color different from the text color before the specific display in the SP reach effect after the specific display.

Furthermore, for example, when a chance increase in the suggested expectation level occurs in the caption display during the SP reach display, and a specific display indicating a losing game result is then displayed, the text color in the text display after the specific display may be configured to be always downgraded. To explain in more detail using a specific example, in the caption display during the SP reach display, when the caption display is displayed in a predetermined text color (e.g., red or gold) that suggests a relatively high expectation level, and then a specific display of a winning/losing branching losing route (see, for example, Figure 71 (I)) is displayed, the text color of subsequent caption displays within the same variation may be configured to be always downgraded (for example, to the normal white color).

For example, in a performance pattern in which a telop effect in which a character appears during an SP reach performance is combined and telops accompanying the character are displayed before and after the win/loss branch (generally telops of friendly characters after a win/loss branch, and telops of enemy characters after a loss branch), the telop after the win/loss branch is always displayed in the normal color (white), while the telop before the win/loss branch (which may be limited to just before the win/loss branch) may always be displayed in a text color other than the normal color (for example, red or gold). When configured in this way, regardless of whether the result is a win or a loss, the telop is displayed in a text color that suggests an expected level of success before the win/loss branch, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The combination of text effects and SP reach effects has been explained above using the example of a telop effect, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the telop effect may be replaced with text effects in general, and configured to have the various features described above. That is, a display pattern that combines dialogue effects and SP reach effects may be prepared, or a display pattern that combines dialogue effects, telop effects, and SP reach effects may be prepared. Furthermore, in the above combinations, the SP reach effects may be replaced with normal reach effects.

<6-2. Combination with symbol pseudo-stop effect>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, character effects (dialogue effects, telop effects) can be executed in combination with symbol pseudo-stop effects. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to an example of effects shown in FIG.

First, we will explain the pseudo-stop pattern effect (also called the pseudo-consecutive effect). The pseudo-stop pattern effect is an effect in which multiple "pseudo-fluctuations" can occur during one special pattern change, in which the main decorative pattern 710 temporarily stops (provisionally stops) from changing. Therefore, "pseudo-consecutive Nth time (also called pseudo-Nth)" refers to the Nth pseudo-fluctuation during one special pattern change. In the pseudo-stop pattern effect, when a pseudo-stop pattern is performed that displays a predetermined provisional display mode (for example, a "continuation pattern" temporarily stops on the middle pattern 712), the main decorative pattern 710 will temporarily stop and then change again, thereby starting the next pseudo-fluctuation. Furthermore, the main decorative pattern 710 will provisionally stop immediately before it finally stops (for example, if it finally stops at "456", it will provisionally stop at "456" with fluctuations for one second immediately before that), so in the final pseudo-fluctuation during one special pattern fluctuation, it will provisionally stop (provisionally stop) from the fluctuation before finally stopping.

The pseudo-stop symbol effect is generally configured so that the more pseudo-stop symbols there are, the higher the expectation for the effect to progress. The success or failure of the pseudo-stop symbol effect can be indicated by, for example, progression to an SP reach effect, progression to a specific SP reach effect, or progression to the latter half of an SP reach effect. The effect control board 200 can output a dedicated background image (specific background image) or background music (specific sound) corresponding to the effect when the pseudo-stop symbol effect is executed. In the pseudo-stop symbol effect, if the main decorative symbol 710 provisionally stops in a losing mode before the end of the fluctuation time, the main decorative symbol 710 may be configured to undergo specific image processing (fade out, blackout, etc.) and then be fixed and stopped at the end of the fluctuation time. Alternatively, after the provisional stop in a losing mode, the main decorative symbol 710 may be configured to begin fluctuating again after the specific image processing, and then be fixed and stopped at the end of the fluctuation time in a losing mode.

Figure 72 shows an example of a screen transition in which a dialogue effect and a pseudo-stop symbol effect are combined. In Figure 72 (A), a changing main decorative symbol 710 and a sub-decorative symbol 720 are displayed in the image display area 700. Then, in the next Figure 72 (B), the pseudo-stop symbol effect begins. As mentioned above, the output of a dedicated background image (specific background image) or BGM (specific sound) may begin in conjunction with the start of the pseudo-stop symbol effect. Note that in the effect example in Figure 72, the sub-decorative symbol 720 is always displayed in the upper right corner of the image display area 700.

In the pseudo-stop symbol effect shown in FIG. 72, the maximum number of pseudo-stop symbols, in which the main decorative symbol 710 temporarily stops due to pseudo fluctuations, is three (i.e., pseudo-consecutive symbols are limited to a maximum of four times). If the pseudo-stop symbol effect shown in FIG. 72 is successful, a reach state is established by the temporary stopping of the left symbol 711 and the right symbol 713 of the main decorative symbol 710, and then a continuation symbol (in this example, a "NEXT" symbol) to notify or suggest the occurrence of a pseudo-consecutive symbol effect temporarily stops on the center symbol 712. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the main decorative symbol 710 begins to fluctuate again, and the next pseudo-consecutive symbol effect (pseudo fluctuation) occurs. On the other hand, if the pseudo-stop symbol effect shown in FIG. 72 fails to stop, for example, two transition patterns are provided. The first transition pattern is a pattern in which the left and right symbols 711 and 713 of the main decorative symbol 710 are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol 712 is also temporarily stopped, without establishing a reach state, and a symbol combination in a losing mode is provisionally displayed. In this case, the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends after specific image processing (fade-out, blackout, etc.) is performed, and then, at the end of the variation time, the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub-decorative symbol 720 are stopped and displayed with the symbol combination in the provisionally displayed losing mode. Note that, as described above, the main decorative symbol 710 may be caused to change again between the end of the pseudo-stop symbol effect and the end of the decorative symbol variation time, or the provisionally displayed losing mode may be maintained without changing again. However, the first transition pattern is applied only when the first pseudo-stop symbol in a pseudo-sequence fails, and the second transition pattern is applied when the second or subsequent pseudo-stop symbol in a pseudo-sequence fails. The second transition pattern is a pattern in which a reach state is established by the provisional stopping of the left and right symbols 711 and 713 of the main decorative symbol 710, but the continuation symbol does not provisionally stop on the middle symbol 712. In this case, the symbol pseudo-stop effect ends and the reach effect is entered. Note that in the second transition pattern, the continuation symbol not provisionally stopping on the middle symbol 712 may mean that the middle symbol 712 itself does not provisionally stop, or that a symbol other than the continuation symbol (however, a symbol that forms a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is not selected) provisionally stops on the middle symbol 712 (i.e., the main decorative symbol 710 provisionally stops in a reach-miss state).

The pseudo-stop symbol effect shown in FIG. 72 is configured so that the expected development of the subsequent effect (expected development to an SP reach effect) and/or the tendency of the subsequent development (such as the tendency to develop into which type of SP reach effect) changes depending on the number of pseudo-stop symbol effects (number of pseudo-fluctuations). Specifically, if the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends after the first pseudo-sequence (pseudo 1), a reach may or may not be achieved. Even if a reach is achieved, it often remains at a normal reach effect, and the possibility of development into an SP reach effect is low. On the other hand, if the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends after the second pseudo-sequence (pseudo 2), a reach is achieved, development beyond a normal reach effect is confirmed, and there is a higher possibility of development into an SP reach effect than in the case of pseudo 1, and there is a higher possibility of development into an SP reach effect, which has a relatively higher expectation than in the case of pseudo 1. If the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends after the third pseudo-sequence (pseudo 3), a reach is confirmed, and development into an SP reach effect is confirmed, with a higher probability of development into an SP reach effect, which has a relatively higher expectation rate than in pseudo 2. If the pseudo-stop symbol effect develops up to the maximum of four pseudo-sequences (pseudo 4), development into a full rotation reach effect, which is a special SP reach effect, is confirmed, and a jackpot result is always indicated after the full rotation reach effect. Note that the above expression of the configuration specifications is based mainly on the transition of the effects, and in reality, the effect control board 200 can select an effect pattern that matches the above configuration specifications based on the win/lose result and change time during the relevant change.

In Figure 72(C), as the first dialogue effect, character A appears in an emphasized manner near the center of the image display area 700, and the line "Continue?" is displayed as a string accompanying character A. The text color of the dialogue displayed in this first dialogue effect is, for example, the normal white color. Note that the strings "Continue?" and "Continue!?" and "NEXT!" displayed in the dialogue effect suggest the degree of expectation for the game development, i.e., whether the pseudo-stop symbol will be successful. For example, a string with "!?" has a higher suggestive expectation than a string with "?", and furthermore, a string with "!" has a higher suggestive expectation than a string with "!?" (or the success of the pseudo-stop symbol is confirmed). Note that in Figure 72(C), the main decorative pattern 710 is obscured by the displayed image of the dialogue effect, but the display state of the main decorative pattern 710 is compensated for by the display of the sub-decorative pattern 720. This is also true for Figures 72(J) and (P).

After the dialogue in Figure 72 (C), the game development branches. If the first pseudo-sequence symbol stop fails (fails to transition to the second pseudo-sequence), the game will transition to Figure 72 (D). If the first pseudo-sequence symbol stop is successful (successful transition to the second pseudo-sequence), the game will transition to Figure 72 (H).

In Figure 72(D), the left and right symbols 711 and 713 of the main decorative symbol 710 provisionally stop, preventing a reach state from being established. The middle symbol 712 also provisionally stops, provisionally displaying the losing symbol combination "334," indicating a failure of the first pseudo-continuous symbol stop (failure to transition to the second pseudo-continuous symbol). As mentioned above, after the first pseudo-continuous symbol stop fails (failure to transition to the second pseudo-continuous symbol) due to the provisional display of the losing symbol combination, the reach effect does not develop, and specific image processing (blackout processing in this example) is performed. Specifically, as shown in Figure 72(E), the image displayed in the image display area 700 gradually darkens, and eventually, as shown in Figure 72(F), nearly the entire screen is blacked out. However, as also shown in Figures 72(E) and (F), the sub-decorative symbol 720 remains displayed without being affected by the specific image processing. Then, after the specific image processing is completed, the blackout display is canceled, and at the end of the variable time, the main decorative pattern 710 is displayed as stopped with the losing pattern "334" that is the temporary display in Figure 72 (D). As a result, the game result for that variable is confirmed as a loss (Figure 72 (G)). Also, in Figure 72 (G), the sub-decorative pattern 720 is displayed as stopped with the same pattern combination "334" as the main decorative pattern 710.

As mentioned above, the pseudo-stop symbol effect shown in FIG. 72 has a first and a second transition pattern available for when the first pseudo-stop symbol in a pseudo-consecutive win fails, and FIG. 72(D) conforms to the first transition pattern. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 72, if the first pseudo-stop symbol in a pseudo-consecutive win fails, it is possible that, in accordance with the second transition pattern, a reach state is established by the provisional stopping of the left symbol 711 and the right symbol 713 of the main decorative symbol 710, but the continuation symbol does not provisionally stop on the middle symbol 712. In this case, for example, the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends with the reach state of the "3" symbol remaining, and a transition occurs to a reach effect (for example, FIG. 72(K) described below).

On the other hand, in Figure 72 (H), the first pseudo-stop symbol is successful (confirming pseudo 2 or more), and the middle symbol 712 of the main decorative symbol 710 temporarily stops at the "NEXT" symbol, which is a continuation symbol. After that, the main decorative symbol 710 changes again, and the second pseudo-stop begins (Figure 72 (I)). Then, during the second pseudo-stop, a second dialogue effect appears, and character B's dialogue "Continue!?" is displayed (Figure 72 (J)). The text color of the dialogue displayed during this second dialogue effect is, for example, red, which indicates a high level of expectation. Note that when "Continue!" is displayed, the success of the pseudo-stop symbol may be confirmed, or "Continue?" and "Continue!?" may be configured not to confirm the success of the pseudo-stop symbol. Furthermore, while "Continue!" can use white or red text colors, "Continue?" and "Continue!?" may be configured to use only white text colors.

After the dialogue in Figure 72 (J), the game development branches. If the pseudo-stop of the second pseudo-sequence fails (fails to transition to the third pseudo-sequence), the game will transition to Figure 72 (K). If the pseudo-stop of the second pseudo-sequence succeeds (successfully transitions to the third pseudo-sequence), the game will transition to Figure 72 (N).

In Figure 72 (K), the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends, a reach state is established by the "3" symbol in the main decorative symbol 710, and a normal reach effect begins. When the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends, the output of the background image (specific background image) and background music (specific sound) dedicated to the pseudo-stop symbol effect also ends, and the output is switched back to the normal background image and background music. Subsequently, the main decorative symbol 710 and sub-decorative symbol 720 stop varying, indicating a miss (Figure 72 (L)) or a jackpot (Figure 72 (M)). Note that when transitioning from the pseudo-stop symbol effect to a reach effect, as in Figure 72 (J) to Figure 72 (K), the system may be configured to perform specific image processing (blackout processing in this example) as described in Figures 72 (E) and (F) at the end of the pseudo-stop symbol effect.

On the other hand, in Figure 72 (N), the second pseudo-consecutive symbol stop is successful (a pseudo 3 or more is confirmed), and the middle symbol 712 of the main decorative symbol 710 temporarily stops at the "NEXT" symbol, which is a continuation symbol. After that, the main decorative symbol 710 changes again, and the third pseudo-consecutive symbol starts (Figure 72 (O)). Then, during the third pseudo-consecutive symbol stop, the third dialogue effect appears, and character C's dialogue "NEXT!" is displayed (Figure 72 (P)). The text color of the dialogue display during this third dialogue effect is, for example, gold, which suggests a higher degree of expectation than the red dialogue effect during the second dialogue effect. Note that when "NEXT!" is displayed, the success of the pseudo-consecutive symbol stop may be confirmed, but "NEXT?" or "NEXT!?" may be configured not to confirm the success of the pseudo-consecutive symbol stop. Furthermore, while "NEXT!" can be displayed in white or red, "NEXT?" and "NEXT!?" may be configured to only be displayed in white.

After the dialogue in Figure 72 (P), the game development branches. If the pseudo-stop of the symbol on the third pseudo-sequence fails (failure to transition to the pseudo-sequence of the fourth), the game will transition to Figure 72 (Q). If the pseudo-stop of the symbol on the third pseudo-sequence is successful (successful transition to the pseudo-sequence of the fourth), the game will transition to Figure 72 (R).

In Figure 72 (Q), the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends, a reach state is established with the "3" symbol in the main decorative symbol 710, and the SP reach effect begins. When the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends, the output of the background image (specific background image) and BGM (specific sound) dedicated to the pseudo-stop symbol effect also ends, and the output is switched back to the normal background image and BGM. After that, the main decorative symbol 710 and sub-decorative symbol 720 stop varying, indicating a loss (Figure 72 (L)) or a jackpot (Figure 72 (M)) as the game result.

On the other hand, in Figure 72 (R), the third pseudo-stop symbol in the pseudo-sequence is successful (confirming pseudo 4), and the center symbol 712 of the main decorative symbol 710 provisionally stops at the "NEXT" symbol, which is a continuation symbol. After that, the main decorative symbol 710 changes again (Figure 72 (S)). Since the pseudo-sequence has reached its upper limit of four, the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends at this point, and a special SP reach effect, a full rotation reach, appears as a bonus for reaching pseudo 4 (Figure 72 (T)). When the pseudo-stop symbol effect ends, the output of the background image (specific background image) and background music (specific sound) dedicated to the pseudo-stop symbol effect also ends. However, in the case of a full rotation reach, a dedicated background image and background music may be output as a special premium SP reach effect. In this example, in the case of a full rotation reach, the game result is always a jackpot (Figure 72 (M)).

As explained above, in the example of Figure 72, three dialogue effects are displayed during the execution of the pseudo-stop symbol effect. Note that the color of the text displayed during each dialogue effect is not limited to the example described above, and may be changed to a variety of colors that suggest the game outcome or the degree of expectation for the game's development.

Based on the above specific examples, the effect patterns that can be executed in this embodiment by combining text effects (telop effects, dialogue effects) and pseudo-stop symbol effects can have the following characteristics:

First, when the display of the changing main decorative pattern 710 resumes after the pseudo-stop pattern effect has ended (when it changes again), the display of the background image (specific background image) corresponding to the pseudo-stop pattern effect may end and return to the normal background image. Furthermore, the output of the background music (specific sound) corresponding to the pseudo-stop pattern effect may also end and be switched to the output of normal background music.

Furthermore, in the case of a pseudo-stop symbol effect, if specific image processing (fade-out, blackout, etc.) is performed when the effect fails to develop (continuation of the pseudo-series, development into a normal reach effect, or development into an SP reach effect), the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) will display a screen with a special format associated with the image processing. Specifically, if fade-out processing is performed, a hazy screen will be displayed, and if blackout processing is performed, a blackout screen such as that shown in Figures 72 (E) and (F) will be displayed.

When the above-mentioned specific image processing (fade-out, blackout) is performed, if a text effect (dialogue effect or caption effect) is displayed, the text string displayed by the text effect will either immediately cease to be displayed or will be subject to the specific image processing and gradually cease to be displayed. Meanwhile, the sub-decorative pattern 720 is not subject to the specific image processing and remains displayed. By maintaining the display of the sub-decorative pattern 720, visibility of the decorative pattern to the player can be reliably ensured. The above-mentioned specific image processing may also be performed when an effect indicating a loss is displayed in the SP Reach effect. In such a configuration, when the SP Reach effect is executed by the effect indicating a loss (for example, an effect displaying a screen indicating a defeat after a match), the above-mentioned specific image processing will cause the fade-out or blackout, and then the background image of each stage within the same variable display (the background image of the stage displayed before the SP Reach effect developed) will be displayed. However, even in this case, the specific image processing described above is not performed on the sub-decorative pattern 720 or the reserved number display 770, and their visibility is not impaired.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned specific image processing (fade out, blackout) is performed, sound output is generally stopped or limited, i.e., silenced or output reduced (volume lowered), but as an exception, an error may be displayed or an error sound output (an error sound notification that is always output at a constant volume regardless of the volume setting) may be output when an error occurs. However, the above-mentioned exceptional configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted for all error occurrences; specifically, when a certain type of error occurs that is relatively less important in relation to fraudulent play, the error may be restricted so that no error display or error sound output is performed during the specific image processing. Specific error types will be explained in detail in the next section.

<6-3. Relationship with error display>
In this section, the relationship between the character effects and the error display will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined error is detected, error processing is performed and an error output corresponding to the detected error is output (see Figures 33, 50, 51, etc.).

Figure 73 is a diagram showing example settings for error outputs according to the type of error. Figure 73 shows example settings for error outputs that are implemented when each error is detected, for example errors that can be detected in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

Errors that can occur in pachinko machine 1 can be divided into errors that are notified to the outside (the gaming parlor) via the external information output terminal, and errors that are not specifically notified. Errors that can occur in pachinko machine 1 can also be categorized into errors that can occur due to cheating by players, etc., errors that can occur due to causes other than cheating, and errors (warnings) that can be caused by both cheating and other causes.

In Figure 73, the "Error Signal" column indicates whether or not an error signal is output to notify the outside world when an error occurs, and the type of error signal. The "Error Sound" column indicates the output setting for the error sound when an error occurs. The "Audio Restriction" column indicates a setting for whether or not to restrict other audio output when an error sound is output. The "Display Restriction" column indicates a setting for whether or not to restrict other image displays when an error is displayed when an error occurs. The "Front Error Display" and "Rear Error Display" columns indicate the display destination for the error display when an error occurs.

An overview of each error shown in Figure 73 is provided below.

First, the magnetic sensor error (No. 1) is an error that occurs when the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism. The radio wave sensor error (No. 2) is an error that occurs when the radio wave sensor detects unauthorized radio waves. The vibration sensor error (No. 3) is an error that occurs when the vibration sensor detects excessive vibrations in the pachinko machine 1. The abnormal operation error (No. 4) is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected in connection with various operations that affect the number of winning balls.

Of the errors that may occur due to cheating by players, etc., the above errors No. 1 to No. 4 are errors that are relatively important in terms of fraudulent play.

Next, the abnormal winning error (No. 5) is an error that occurs when a winning entry is detected at the start opening (first start opening 61, second start opening 62) or the large winning opening 64 when the opening is not yet open, outside the valid period, or an excessive winning entry is detected. The abnormal passing error (No. 6) is an error that occurs when the large winning opening 64 detects passing through a specific area when the opening is not yet open, outside the valid period, or an excessive passing entry is detected. The discharge error (No. 7) is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected regarding the discharge of game balls. The connection abnormality error (No. 8) is an error that occurs when it is detected that various winning openings, various pattern display devices, external information output terminals, etc. that should be connected to the main control board 100 are not connected to the main control board 100.

Errors No. 5 to No. 8 above are errors that may occur due to cheating by players, etc., and are relatively less important in terms of fraudulent play.

Next, the power-on warning (No. 9) is a notification indicating that power has been turned on, which involves clearing the RAM. The setting change/setting confirmation (No. 10) is a notification indicating that a setting change/setting confirmation has been performed (this is unnecessary if the pachinko machine 1 does not have a setting function). The door/frame open error (No. 11) is an error that occurs when the door open sensor 2p detects that the door/frame (front frame 4) has been opened.

The above errors (warnings) No. 9 to No. 11 may be caused by both fraud and other factors.

Next, the communication error (No. 12) is an error indicating that communication is not possible between devices such as the main board 100, performance control board 200, image control board 300, performance display device 70, and payout control board 400. The tray full error (No. 13) is an error indicating that the upper ball tray 8 or lower ball tray 9 is full of game balls. The game ball payout error (No. 14) is an error indicating an abnormality in the number of game balls paid out. The game ball lending device unconnected error (No. 15) is an error indicating that the game ball lending device is not connected.

Errors No. 12 to No. 15 above are errors that may occur due to reasons other than player fraud.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, which is capable of outputting errors for multiple types of errors, when an error occurs for which an error display is set, the error display may be configured to take priority over the display of text in the telop effect, depending on the type of error. In other words, the error display may impair the visibility of the text display in the telop effect. The above-mentioned "error types" may be classified, for example, by the "importance" of the error with respect to fraudulent play. Specifically, for example, a door opening error (No. 11 in Figure 73), which is likely caused by maintenance work by a gaming parlor staff member, may be classified as a low-importance error type, while a magnet sensor error (No. 1 in Figure 73), which is likely caused by fraudulent play, may be classified as a high-importance error type. In this case, if a door open error (low importance error type) occurs while the string display for the dialogue effect is being displayed, the error display due to the door open error (low importance error type) will be displayed overlapping the string display for the dialogue effect (the error display and the string display for the dialogue effect can be displayed simultaneously, and at least a portion of the display area for the error display and the display area for the string display for the dialogue effect overlap, and the string display for the dialogue effect is displayed behind the error display), on the other hand, if a door open error (low importance error type) occurs while the string display for the caption effect is being displayed, the error display will not be displayed overlapping the string display for the caption effect (the error display and the string display for the caption effect can be displayed simultaneously, and the display area for the error display and the display area for the string display for the caption effect do not overlap at all). On the other hand, if a magnet sensor error (high importance error type) occurs while a string display for a dialogue or subtitle effect is being displayed, the error display due to the magnet sensor error (high importance error type) is displayed overlapping both the string display for the dialogue effect and the string display for the subtitle effect (the error display and the string display for the dialogue or subtitle effect can be displayed simultaneously, the display area for the error display and the display area for the string display for the dialogue or subtitle effect overlap at least partially, and the string display for the dialogue or subtitle effect is displayed behind the error display). Note that the error display due to a magnet sensor error (high importance error type) may be displayed so as to cover the entire screen due to its importance, and in such a configuration, if a magnet sensor error (high importance error type) occurs while a string display for a dialogue or subtitle effect is being displayed, it is preferable that only the error display due to the magnet sensor error (high importance error type) is displayed, and the string display for the dialogue or subtitle effect is not displayed. By controlling in this way, when a high-importance error occurs, the error can be immediately displayed on the front of the image display area 700, even if a text effect is being displayed, making it easier for a hall staff member to notice the error. As a result, it is expected that fraudulent play will be quickly discovered, improving crime prevention.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is also capable of simultaneously displaying an error display (dialogue display, plot display) that notifies the occurrence of a predetermined error (preferably an error type with a relatively low level of importance, such as a door open error or a tray full error) with text effects (dialogue display, plot display). However, it may be configured so that the error display can overlap with the dialogue display but not with the subtitle display (i.e., displayed simultaneously in a non-overlapping position). However, when configured as described above, the error sound corresponding to the predetermined error is limited in audio output via the text effects. Specifically, if the predetermined error occurs while audio via the text effects is being output, the error sound is output. However, when the error sound is output, the audio via the text effects (audio corresponding to the dialogue or subtitles) is stopped (muted) or reduced in volume to a level lower than the error sound (an error sound for notification that is always output at a constant volume regardless of the volume setting). As a result, even if the error display is displayed in an inconspicuous manner during the execution of the text effects, the occurrence of the predetermined error can be notified by the output of the error sound. In addition, in such a situation (when the above-mentioned specified error occurs while outputting audio through text effects), if the audio through text effects (audio corresponding to dialogue or subtitles) is suppressed to a low volume, the volume can be set, but the volume of the error sound is not changed, and only the volume of the audio through text effects is suppressed and then changed, and after the above-mentioned specified error is cleared and the error sound ends, the suppression of the volume of the audio through text effects is released and output of the audio through text effects is resumed at the set volume. As a variation of this, the volume can be set, but the volume of the error sound is not changed and the volume of the audio through text effects is not changed, but after the above-mentioned specified error is cleared and the error sound ends, the suppression of the audio through text effects is released and output of the audio through text effects is resumed at the set volume. Furthermore, in such a situation (when the specified error occurs while outputting audio using text effects), if the audio using text effects (audio corresponding to dialogue or captions) is muted, the volume can be set, but the volume of the error sound is not changed and the volume of the audio using text effects remains muted. After the specified error is resolved and the error sound ends, the muting of the audio using text effects is released and output of the audio using text effects resumes at the set volume. In this configuration, performing a volume setting operation displays a volume setting adjustment screen, allowing the user to check the current volume and the volume change status based on the operation. However, it is preferable that the volume setting adjustment screen be configured to be superimposed on the dialogue text (the volume setting adjustment screen has a higher display priority) but not on the caption text.

<6-4. Relationship between pre-reading performance, hold icon display, and hold number display>
Although not shown in the screen transition examples shown in Figures 63 to 72 above, in the pachinko machine 1 during play, under the control of the effect control board 200, a hold icon indicating the status of the special symbol variable hold is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display area 700. Also, an icon corresponding to the variable (the variable icon) may be displayed in the image display area 700. These variable icons (the variable icon and the hold icon) are usually displayed in a predetermined display mode, but by changing the display mode (color or pattern), the icon can be changed to indicate the expected gaming result (jackpot) of the target variable. A typical example of a game effect that involves icon changes is a predictive variable hold (hold) effect.

A predictive effect is an effect that begins when a preceding change occurs that precedes a target change (target change) that is executed when a targeted target hold (target hold) is consumed. It is an effect (a provocative effect) that suggests the game result of a target change before the target hold is reached, based on the results of a pre-read (pre-determination result) of the winning/losing outcome (target change winning/losing outcome) when the target hold is consumed. Generally, predictive effects can be executed when the holds up until the target hold is consumed (until the target change is reached) do not include any holds that will result in a winning outcome when consumed. In such predictive effects, for example, the game result of the target hold can be provocatively predicted by changing the icon of the target hold.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned look-ahead effect in combination with a text effect. Therefore, below, an example of a screen transition for an effect that combines a look-ahead effect and a text effect is shown in Figure 74, followed by an explanation of the features. For simplicity, the reserved icon display in Figure 74 only shows the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved first special pattern, but in reality, the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved second special pattern may also be displayed. The same applies to the reserved number display, which will be described later. The maximum number of reserved first special patterns that can be stored is four.

Figure 74 shows an example of a screen transition in a display that combines a pre-reading display and a text display. For example, as shown in Figure 74(A), the bottom edge of the image display area 700 displays, from left to right, the relevant change icon 750 corresponding to the change in question, the first hold icon 761 corresponding to the first hold (the hold related to the next change), the second hold icon 762 corresponding to the second hold, the third hold icon 763 corresponding to the third hold, and the fourth hold icon 764 corresponding to the fourth hold. The first hold icon 761 through the fourth hold icon 764 are also collectively referred to as hold icons 760. In each diagram in Figure 74, these icons (the relevant change icon 750, hold icon 760) are represented as white circles when no corresponding change or hold exists, and are displayed in a manner other than white when a corresponding change or hold exists. In Figure 74, the normal display manner of the change icon when a corresponding change or hold exists is represented as a solid fill, and the display color of the change icon in this case is "black." Taking the above into consideration, in the case of Figure 74 (A), in addition to the variable icon 750, the hold icons 760 are shown filled in up to the third hold icon 763, indicating that hold memory has accumulated up to the third hold. In the following explanation, for simplicity, "hold [N]th" may be written as "hold [N]".

Figure 74(A) shows the image display area 700 in the situation just before the third reserve variation (reserve 3) is added when the game ball enters the starting hole while the main decorative pattern 710 is being varied. Figures 74(B) and onward show an example of the screen transition when the presentation control board 200 executes a pre-reading presentation if the result of the reserve 3 added in Figure 74(A) is a jackpot. In other words, reserve 3 in Figure 74(A) becomes the target reserve.

In Figure 74 (B), the target hold icon changes based on the results of the advance judgment made by the look-ahead performance. Specifically, the display mode of the third hold icon 763 changes from the normal "black" mode to "red (diagonal lines in the drawing)." In this example, the "red" display mode of the variable icon is a display mode that suggests a very high expectation for the game result (jackpot) (for example, an expectation rate of 55%). Furthermore, as will be described later, display modes of icons that suggest the expectation rate for the game result are prepared in addition to the above "red," and the suggested expectation rates are set to be highest in the order of "red (diagonal lines)," "star mark," and "hot letter."

The next Figure 74(C) shows the state when the fluctuations up to Figure 74(B) have stopped, with the main decorative pattern 710 displayed frozen in the losing pattern "235". After that, the hold icon 760 moves one space to the left, and the next fluctuation begins (Figure 74(D)). Therefore, in Figure 74(D), the hold icon for the target hold in the pre-reading performance has moved from the third hold icon 763 to the second hold icon 762.

Then, in the variation that began in Figure 74(D), the first dialogue effect appears (Figure 74(E)). In Figure 74(E), character A is displayed as the first dialogue effect, along with the string of characters (lines) spoken by character A, "Something is...". This dialogue effect suggests the possibility that "something" that will be advantageous to the player will occur in the current or future variation (although at this point the likelihood is low, at around 5%).

Next, after the first dialogue performance ends, as shown in Figure 74(F), the main decorative pattern 710 for that variation is displayed stopped in the losing mode "186". Note that in Figure 74(F), one reserved variation is added when the game ball enters the starting hole, and a third reserved icon 763 is added in the normal mode (black). After that, the reserved icon 760 is shifted one space to the left, and the next variation begins (Figure 74(G)). Therefore, in Figure 74(G), the reserved icon for the target reserved for the pre-reading performance moves from the second reserved icon 762 to the first reserved icon 761, and the reserved variation added in Figure 74(F) is displayed in the second reserved icon 762.

Then, in the variation that began in Figure 74(G), a second dialogue effect appears (Figure 74(H)). In Figure 74(H), as the second dialogue effect, Character A is displayed again, and the string of characters (lines) "It's close!" is displayed by Character A. This dialogue effect suggests that an event that is advantageous to the player is "close" to occurring in the current or future variation (the expectation level is relatively high at this point, at 20%).

After the second dialogue presentation ends, as shown in Figure 74(I), an operation request presentation appears and a PUSH button image is displayed. At this time, if presentation button 3j is pressed or the valid operation period has elapsed, the presentation transitions to Figure 74(J). In this example, the operation request presentation ends with a successful result, and specifically, as a result of this success, the display mode of the first hold icon 761, which is the target hold for the pre-reading presentation, is upgraded from "red" to a "star mark" (see Figure 74(J)).

In Figure 74 (J), the main decorative pattern 710 of the corresponding variation is displayed stopped in the losing pattern "462". After that, the reserved icon 760 is shifted one space to the left, and the next variation begins (Figure 74 (K)). At this time, the reserved icon for the target reserved for the pre-reading performance moves from the first reserved icon 761 to the corresponding variable icon 760.

Figure 74 (K) shows the image display area 700 when the target change that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect has begun. In Figure 74 (K), the display mode of the change icon 750 has been upgraded from a "star mark" to a "heat letter." This is because a further icon change occurred when the target change began. The target change then establishes a reach state with the main decorative pattern 710 (Figure 74 (L)), and develops into the SP reach effect "The Moment of Decision" (Figure 74 (M)). Note that in Figure 74 (L), two reserves have been added when the game ball enters the starting hole.

In the SP reach effect that begins from Figure 74 (M), a caption effect that combines a movable role effect (Figure 74 (O)) appears (Figures 74 (N) to 74 (P)). The screen transitions from Figure 74 (M) to Figure 74 (P) have much in common with the screen transitions from Figure 71 (B) to Figure 71 (G), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

However, one point not shown in Figures 71(B) to 71(G) is that from Figure 74(M) onwards, the display of the hold number display 770 begins in the image display area 700 below the display of the sub-decorative symbol 720. The hold number display 770 displays the hold number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in small numbers or the like at the edge of the screen of the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) (in this example, the second special symbol is omitted). This hold number display 770 is displayed at least during the period when there is a hold change but the hold icon display 760 is not being displayed. In addition, the display priority of the hold number display 770 is high, so it is not overlapped with error displays (error displays when a door open error (low importance error type) or a magnet sensor error (high importance error type) occurs), and the display is not affected by the implementation of specific image processing (fade out, blackout, etc.) in the pseudo-stop symbol effect (i.e., the hold number display 770 is not subject to specific image processing). In the case of Figure 74, after the SP Reach effect begins, the display area for the hold icon 760 is hidden or made invisible (erased) as the moving image of the effect is displayed across almost the entire image display area 700. For this reason, hold number display 770 is displayed instead of the hold icon 760. However, as mentioned above, hold number display 770 may be displayed at all times regardless of whether the SP Reach effect is in progress or whether decorative symbols 781, 782 are in operation or not, and may be displayed at all times not only while the special symbols are changing but also while the special symbols are stopped.

Then, in Figure 74 (P), an image is displayed that evokes the victory of ally character A, and then, in Figure 74 (Q), the main decorative pattern 710 is displayed stationary in a jackpot pattern (in this example, "777"), indicating a jackpot in the target fluctuation.

As shown in Figure 74, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a performance pattern that combines a look-ahead performance and a text performance. Note that Figure 74 only shows the case where the target reserve becomes a reserve related to a jackpot, but even if the result of the advance judgment based on the look-ahead performance for the target reserve is a miss, it is possible to execute a performance that combines a look-ahead performance and a text performance.

In the example of the presentation in Figure 74, the dialogue presentation appears during the execution period of the look-ahead presentation (Figures 74 (B) to 74 (K)), but the caption presentation only appears after the look-ahead presentation has ended (i.e., the relevant change). Note that the dialogue presentation can be executed even after the look-ahead presentation has ended (i.e., the relevant change). This is because the control specifications are such that the SP reach presentation is not executed for changes between the start of the look-ahead presentation and the target change being reached (or the control specifications are such that the look-ahead presentation can be executed only if all changes before the target change is reached are changes that do not develop into an SP reach presentation), and the timing at which the dialogue presentation or caption presentation can be displayed is set to be before or after the timing at which the presentation develops into an SP reach presentation (the SP reach presentation can also be replaced with the establishment of a reach). In this case, if the dialogue effects that can appear before the development of the SP Reach effect are designed to be able to appear even with a losing variation, they can appear even during the look-ahead effect, but the caption effects that can appear during the SP Reach effect will not appear during the look-ahead effect. In other words, in this embodiment, when text effects (caption effects, dialogue effects) and look-ahead effects are executed in combination, the appearance of dialogue effects can be permitted during the look-ahead effect (which may be limited to certain look-ahead effects that suggest extremely high expectations when they appear), but the appearance of caption effects can be prohibited.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be configured to have the following features when combining text effects (telop effects, dialogue effects) and pre-reading effects.

First, while dialogue display (particularly dialogue display) can be executed in overlap with hold icon display, display using caption display (particularly caption display) can be configured not to be executed in overlap with hold icon display. To achieve this configuration, for example, during periods when dialogue display may appear, such as before the development of an SP reach performance (during high-speed fluctuations, immediately after a reach is established, etc.), the hold icon can be displayed (see Figure 74 (E)), while during periods when caption display may appear, such as after the development of an SP reach performance, the hold icon can be hidden (see Figure 74 (N)). Alternatively, the display area for the hold icon and the display area for the caption display may be set to different areas.

In addition, when a caption effect is performed, instead of being able to display the hold icon display, a hold number display 770 may be displayed to ensure visibility of the hold number (see Figure 74 (N)).

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can execute not only text color changes in text effects (dialogue effects, caption effects), but also various "preview display effects" that suggest expectations for game results or game developments through display modes, such as the icon changes resulting from the above-mentioned pre-reading effects. When the elements (color, text, pattern, etc.) that suggest expectations in such pre-view display effects are called attributes, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be configured so that the number of attribute types in pre-view display effects other than text effects (e.g., dialogue effects) (e.g., icon changes resulting from pre-reading effects) is greater than the number of attribute types in text effects (e.g., dialogue effects). Specifically, for example, the attribute types (text color of the string) in dialogue effects could be limited to five types: white, blue, red, gold, and rainbow, while the attribute types (icon display color) in the above-mentioned icon change effects could be eight types: white, blue, yellow, green, red, purple, gold, and rainbow. While the above description focuses on dialogue effects, they could also be replaced with caption effects, which are text effects.

<6-5. Relationship with Presentation Mode>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple types of presentation modes with different combinations of presentations that can be executed may be prepared. Furthermore, the multiple types of presentation modes may be selectable by a player through a predetermined operation, or may be configured to automatically switch (transition) under predetermined conditions.

Now, we will explain the presentation modes. In this embodiment, there are multiple presentation modes, and each presentation mode determines which type of presentation can be executed. To specifically explain the presentation modes and the content of the presentations executed in the presentation modes, for example, "normal mode" and "rush mode" are set as the multiple presentation modes. One of the multiple presentation modes is selectively set depending on the game state and the number of times special symbols are displayed, and a variable presentation corresponding to the set presentation mode is executed. Basically, when the game state is normal (low base), "normal mode" is set, and when the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state (high base), "rush mode" is set. When one of the presentation modes is set, a background image dedicated to that presentation mode (a background image that displays the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub decorative symbol 720 behind the main decorative symbol 710) is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variable presentation) indicating that the presentation mode is in that mode, and background music dedicated to that presentation mode is output from speaker 11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each presentation mode, so that the player can recognize which presentation mode he or she is currently in from the type of background image or BGM. Specifically, the "normal mode" has four stages: "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage." After 20 or more changes have occurred or the SP reach effect is a miss, the game will transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B," from "Stage B" to "Stage C," and from "Stage C" to "Stage A." If the predictive preview effect results in the execution (transition) of the "Prediction Stage," the game will transition from the current stage to the "Prediction Stage" (the execution of the SP reach effect is confirmed at the time of transition to the "Prediction Stage," and if a jackpot occurs, the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed in a jackpot mode on the "Prediction Stage," and if a miss occurs, the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed in a miss mode on the "Prediction Stage," and the game will return to the stage before the transition to the "Prediction Stage" on the next change). The background music (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage" (it is also different from the stage BGM in "Rush Mode"), but in "Stage A," the stage BGM is interrupted (ended) when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) for a non-reach miss (a miss that does not create a reach state, such as a variance such as "351") and starts again from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins, and in "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage," the stage BGM is not interrupted (ended) even when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) for a non-reach miss, and the stage BGM continues to be output for the next fluctuation (it is configured to be output continuously in the same way in "Rush Mode").

If the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple presentation modes, the dialogue presentation may be configured to display different presentation content depending on the presentation mode, while the caption presentation may be configured to display the same presentation content regardless of the presentation mode. Specifically, for example, the dialogue presentation may display the dialogue (text) of a character according to the presentation mode (for example, character A in presentation mode A, character B in presentation mode B), while the caption presentation may display subtitles (text) of the character corresponding to the presentation without changing the character depending on the presentation mode (for example, character B's subtitles may be displayed even in presentation mode A, or character C may be used independent of presentation modes A and B).

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 1 is provided with multiple presentation modes, it may be configured with the following features (1) to (4).
(1) The background music (mode background music) differs depending on the presentation mode.
(2) In a predetermined presentation mode, the mode BGM is output (continues) even across the change stop/start. However, even in a predetermined presentation mode, when the decorative symbol changes again in the symbol pseudo-stop presentation, the mode BGM is not output (interrupted).
(3) During the SP reach performance, the mode BGM is not output, and a dedicated BGM (SP reach BGM) corresponding to the SP reach performance is output instead.
(4) After a losing pattern is shown in the SP reach performance, when the final stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns is displayed, neither the mode BGM nor the SP reach BGM is output, while the mode BGM is output from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be configured with the following features regarding the relationship between the presentation mode and the pseudo-stop symbol presentation:

The following describes "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage" as specific examples of presentation modes that pachinko machine 1 may have. At this time, the pseudo-stop symbol presentation described below can be executed in any of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage," but in any stage, when the pseudo-stop symbol presentation occurs (when the "NEXT" symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and upon a re-change (a second change after a temporary stop), the stage BGM is restarted from the beginning, or is switched to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-change (a specific BGM that suggests or notifies that a re-change is in progress). After that, if the SP reach effect develops in "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Prediction Stage," the background image of each stage (the stage you were on) will switch to the background image of the SP reach effect (and at the same time switch to BGM exclusive to the SP reach effect), and the stage BGM will not be output while the SP reach effect is being executed, and when an effect indicating a miss is displayed in the SP reach effect, the background image of each stage will switch again within the variable display in which the SP reach effect was executed (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the SP reach effect developed), but in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next variable display begins, the stage BGM will not be output, and the BGM exclusive to the SP reach effect will not be output either (it will be silent, or a specific BGM that is different from both the stage BGM and the BGM exclusive to the SP reach effect will be output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) without a reach miss, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (will not end), and even in "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage" where the stage BGM continues to be output in the next fluctuation (or even in "Stage A" where this is not the case), if the SP reach performance results in a miss, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts.

In "Rush Mode," the pseudo-stop symbol effect is not executed. Here, a predetermined suggestive effect (such as a dialogue effect such as "Continue!", which indicates that a subsequent pseudo-stop symbol effect will be executed or has a high probability of execution, or "Continue?", which indicates that a subsequent pseudo-stop symbol effect will not be executed) is executed, suggesting that a pseudo-stop symbol effect (re-change) will be executed in the future. However, this predetermined suggestive effect is only displayed in "Stage A" and "Stage C," and is not displayed in "Stage B" or the "Prediction Stage." In other words, by providing both stages where the possibility of a pseudo-stop symbol effect being executed can be detected in advance and stages where it cannot be detected, and by repeatedly transitioning between these stages, an effect that will not bore the player is realized. In "Stage A," a predetermined suggestive effect based on character A is executed, while in "Stage C," a predetermined suggestive effect based on character B is executed. In addition, there is also provided a pseudo-consecutive confirmation effect, which is different from the predetermined suggestive effect and whose occurrence alone confirms that a pseudo-stop symbol effect will be executed thereafter (for example, when character C appears, a cut-in with the message "Continue Confirmed!" is always displayed), and there is also provided a development confirmation effect, which is different from both the predetermined suggestive effect and the pseudo-consecutive confirmation effect and whose occurrence alone confirms that a pseudo-stop symbol effect will not be executed thereafter and that the effect will develop into an SP reach symbol effect (for example, when character D appears, a cut-in with the message "Development Confirmed!" is always displayed). These pseudo-consecutive confirmation effects and development confirmation effects can be executed in any of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage." In this way, when a pseudo-stop symbol effect is executed and when a pseudo-stop symbol effect is not executed, by displaying one or more combinations of the predetermined suggestive effect, pseudo-consecutive confirmation effect, and development confirmation effect, it is possible to diversify the expectation of the execution of the pseudo-stop symbol effect and the expectation of the effect developing into an SP reach symbol effect. It should be noted that during one display of fluctuations, all of the specified suggestive effects, pseudo consecutive confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed, and in this case, during a certain re-flux (for example, the first or second re-flux), there may be a pattern in which the specified suggestive effect is executed, a pattern in which the pseudo consecutive confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which the development confirmation effect is executed. Here, in a pattern in which the specified suggestive effect is executed during a certain re-flux (for example, the first or second re-flux), after the specified suggestive effect is executed during that certain re-flux, a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect may also be executed during that certain re-flux.

<7. Examples of pseudo-stop symbol effects>
In the above-mentioned <6-2>, with reference to Figure 72, an example of a pseudo-stop pattern effect that can be executed in combination with a text effect in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment was described in detail. Below, we will explain the first to fourth derivative patterns of other pseudo-stop pattern effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

<7-1. First derivative pattern>
The first derivative pattern of the pseudo-stop symbol effect is configured to have the following features (1) to (6).

(1) In a variation in which a development effect (for example, an SP reach effect) is displayed, if the first preview effect is executed during the re-change of the decorative pattern after the pseudo-stop of the pattern due to the pseudo-stop effect (hereinafter simply referred to as "during re-change"), it is certain that no further re-change will be executed before the development effect is displayed. The first preview effect is, for example, a preview effect that occurs immediately before the development of an SP reach, and specifically corresponds to a preview effect that displays the string "Next Preview" or a preview effect that displays a background image including the string "Super Hot," both of which suggest high expectations. In addition, caption effects are also included in the third preview effect.

(2) In a change in which a development effect is displayed, if a second preview effect is executed during a re-change, a further re-change may be executed before the development effect is displayed. The second preview effect corresponds to, for example, a step-up preview, an operation request effect such as defeating an enemy in response to repeated taps of a performance button, or an icon change effect for that change. Dialogue effects are also included in the second preview effect.

(3) In a variation in which a development effect is displayed, if a third preview effect is executed during a re-change, it is certain that a further re-change will be executed before the development effect is displayed. The third preview effect corresponds to, for example, a predetermined preview effect that suggests the continuation of the pseudo-consecutive change or high expectations for the development effect, and specifically corresponds to a dialogue effect that displays a string of characters such as "Continue!" or an icon display preview such as an icon with the word "NEXT" appearing in the corner of the screen.

(4) During a re-fluctuating period within the same fluctuation, the first preview effect may be executed, or the second preview effect may be executed. Specifically, for example, during the pseudo consecutive fluctuation after the second pseudo stop of the symbol (third pseudo consecutive fluctuation), a "next preview" (first preview effect) may occur, or a step-up preview (second preview effect) may occur.

(5) The display pattern is such that a second preview effect is executed during a re-fluctuation within the same fluctuation, and then a third preview effect is executed. Specifically, for example, a step-up preview (second preview effect) may occur on the second pseudo-consecutive win, and then at some point thereafter (on the third pseudo-consecutive win or later), a preview of the display of the "NEXT" icon (third preview effect) may occur.

(6) If, after a predetermined number of pseudo symbol stops, no further re-changes (pseudo consecutive hits) are performed due to the pseudo symbol stop effect, there are more candidate effects that can be executed in the subsequent reach-established state than if the further re-changes (pseudo consecutive hits) are performed. Specifically, for example, if the pseudo symbol stop effect ends with the second pseudo symbol stop, a weak reach effect (normal reach effect) that would not be selected if the pseudo symbol stop effect continued until the third pseudo symbol stop can be selected. Also, for example, if the pseudo symbol stop effect ends with the third pseudo symbol stop, various SP reach effects can be selected, but if the upper limit of four pseudo symbol stops is reached, only a full rotation reach can be selected, etc.

<7-2. Second derivative pattern>
The second derivative pattern of the symbol pseudo-stop effect is configured to have the following feature (7) in addition to the features (1) to (4) shown in the first derivative pattern above.

(7) In the same variation, if a second variation is executed after the fourth preview effect has been executed, the same fourth preview effect will not be executed again during the second variation. The fourth preview effect is, for example, a so-called premium preview effect that is set to occur extremely rarely and suggests extremely high expectations for the game result. Specifically, it corresponds to, for example, the output of a premium sound at the start of a variation, a stage change effect to a premium stage, a premium effect that does not appear multiple times during one variation, etc.

<7-3. The third derivative pattern>
The third derivative pattern of the pseudo-stop symbol effect is configured to have the following features (8) to (10).

(8) The expectation of whether a re-change will occur within a target change varies depending on the content of the special effect (e.g., a preview effect due to a pre-reading effect) executed within the preceding change that occurs before the target change. Specifically, for example, in a preceding change, if the hold icon for the target hold is changed to a "red lit" display, which differs from its normal state (e.g., a white lit display), due to a hold icon change due to a pre-reading effect, the expectation of the continuation of the pseudo-stop pattern due to the pseudo-stop pattern effect in the target change (the expectation of an increase in the number of pseudo-consecutive wins) can be considered to be higher than if the hold icon for the target hold is changed to a "white flashing" display, which differs from its normal state, due to the same hold icon change. Note that the expectation order of the hold icons is white lit display, white flashing display, and red lit display. Also, for example, in a preceding change, if the "NEXT" icon is displayed in the icon display preview due to the pre-reading effect, the expectation of the continuation of the pseudo-stop pattern due to the pseudo-stop pattern effect in the target change can be considered to be higher than if the "Reach?" icon is displayed in the same icon display preview.

(9) The execution of a predetermined suggestive effect that is executed during target fluctuation and suggests whether or not a re-fluctuating will occur is restricted until a predetermined condition is met. The above-mentioned predetermined suggestive effect is, for example, a preview effect limited to a certain presentation mode, and specifically corresponds to, for example, a preview effect in which a character corresponding to the presentation mode (a character that only appears in that presentation mode) displays a sign that says "Continue?" or "Continue!" to suggest the degree of expectation for the continuation of pseudo-consecutive fluctuations, or a pseudo-stop pattern effect using a special pattern corresponding to the stage. Satisfying a predetermined condition corresponds to pressing a presentation button, the expiration of the effective period for operating the presentation button, or reaching the specified presentation display time, etc.

(10) There are multiple types of presentation modes, and in certain presentation modes, re-changes can be performed, but the above-mentioned specified suggestive presentations are not performed. For example, this means that the above-mentioned specified suggestive presentations that can be performed in presentation mode B, which can perform a pseudo-stop pattern presentation, are not performed in presentation mode A, which can perform a pseudo-stop pattern presentation.

<7-4. The fourth derivative pattern>
The fourth derivative pattern of the symbol pseudo-stop effect is configured to have the following features (11) to (14).

(11) When a pre-reading effect is executed, the expectation level for a re-change (number of pseudo consecutive occurrences) of the pseudo-stop pattern effect during the target change varies depending on the content of the specific effect (e.g., dialogue effect) during the target change. For example, in the dialogue effect, if text is displayed in a text color that indicates high expectation, the expectation level for a large number of pseudo-stop patterns (pseudo consecutive occurrences) during the target change can be configured to be high.

(12) When a pre-reading effect is executed, the expectation level for re-fluctuations (number of pseudo consecutive wins) in the target fluctuation varies depending on the content of the special effect (for example, an effect in which decorative symbols can stop on a specific "chance symbol" that matches a specific pattern, such as a regular symbol such as "123" or "456" or a reverse symbol such as "321" or "654") in the advance fluctuation of the target fluctuation. In other words, if the above-mentioned chance symbol stops in the advance fluctuation, the expectation level for multiple pseudo symbol stops (pseudo consecutive wins) in the target fluctuation can be configured to be higher than if the above-mentioned chance symbol does not stop. Furthermore, if a chance symbol in the reverse order among the above-mentioned chance symbols stops in the advance fluctuation, the expectation level for multiple pseudo symbol stops (pseudo consecutive wins) in the target fluctuation can be configured to be higher than if a chance symbol in the normal order among the above-mentioned chance symbols stops in the advance fluctuation.

(13) During target fluctuations, the execution of a specified suggestive effect that suggests a re-fluctuating state is restricted until a specified condition is met. The specified suggestive effect corresponds to, for example, an operation request effect that requests the pressing of an effect button during a pseudo-stop pattern effect, and that, upon such pressing, displays "NEXT?" or "NEXT!" to suggest the likelihood of a re-fluctuating state. Satisfying a specified condition corresponds to pressing the effect button, the expiration of the effective period for operating the effect button, or the reaching of a specified effect display time, etc.

(14) There are multiple presentation modes, and in certain presentation modes, specific suggestive presentations that suggest re-changes are not executed.

<8. Suppression function>
A suppression function that can be installed in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment will be described. As will be described in detail later, the "suppression function" refers to a function that stops play and issues an alert when a predetermined count value "MY" reaches a predetermined value in the gaming machine. The MY counter is a counter for counting MY. "MY" is a count value expressed by the relationship "MY = number of safes (number of expected winning balls) - number of outs (number of balls played)." It is a count value based on the difference in balls between the number of safes and the number of outs, and is an indicator of the number of game value (balls held by the player or balls dispensed by the gaming machine) awarded to the player. The suppression function is managed by the main control board 100, and data related to the suppression function (e.g., the MY counter) is also stored in a memory area within the main control board 100. The suppression function-related effects executed in connection with the suppression function are executed by the effect control board 200 based on information notified by the main control board 100.

The suppression function activation flag is provided as a flag indicating that the count value of the MY counter has reached a predetermined threshold (the specified value of "95,000" described below), i.e., that the suppression function activation conditions described below have been met. The suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the suppression function activation conditions are met. The suppression function activation flag is also turned OFF when power is turned on with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). The MY counter is updated (added or subtracted) when a game ball enters each winning slot or outlet. Specifically, the safe number is added to the count value of the MY counter. The "safe number" refers to the number of game balls (safe balls) scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering each winning slot, i.e., the planned number of prize balls. In other words, the safe number is not the actual number of prize balls actually paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, but the planned number of prize balls determined to be paid out. When one game ball enters the first start port, the MY counter adds "3" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when one game ball enters the first start port. When one game ball enters the second start port, the MY counter adds "1" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the second start port. When one game ball enters the general prize port, the MY counter adds "3" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the general prize port. When one game ball enters the special prize port, the MY counter adds "15" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the special prize port. The MY counter also subtracts the number of outs from the count value of the MY counter. The "number of outs" refers to the number of game balls (out balls) that have been launched into the game area and used in play, i.e., the number of game balls (out balls) that have entered each winning slot (first starting slot, second starting slot, general winning slot, large winning slot, etc.) in the game area or the out slot and been ejected to the back side of the game board. The MY counter subtracts "1" from the number of outs each time a game ball enters an out slot (referred to as an out ball or played ball). However, if the MY counter is "0," the MY counter is not subtracted even if an out ball (played ball) is detected. In other words, the count value of the MY counter does not become a number less than "0" (a negative number). Even if an out ball (played ball) occurs when the MY counter's count value is "0," the number corresponding to the number of outs is not subtracted, and the MY counter's count value remains "0." Each time the MY counter is updated, an effect command (called a "ball difference signal") is generated and output to specify the count value of the MY counter. Based on this ball difference signal, the suppression function-related effects (pre-alert effect, suppression notification effect) described below are executed.

Figure 75 is a diagram explaining the counting method of the MY Counter. Figure 75(A) is a diagram conceptually illustrating the count value of the MY Counter, with the horizontal axis representing time and the vertical axis representing the count value of the MY Counter. Figure 75(B) is a diagram conceptually illustrating the actual cumulative value of the difference in ball count in a form corresponding to the time series of Figure 75(A), with the horizontal axis representing time and the vertical axis representing the actual cumulative value of the difference in ball count. Figure 75(A) shows an example of the time series change until the count value of the MY Counter reaches a predetermined threshold (prescribed value = "95,000") based on the above-mentioned control. The relationship between Figures 75(A) and 75(B) shows that even if the actual cumulative value of the difference in ball count updates to a negative value during play, the count value of the MY Counter can accurately count to the predetermined value when the actual cumulative value of the difference in ball count reaches the predetermined threshold (prescribed value = "95,000").

The suppression function is activated when the MY counter count reaches a predetermined threshold (referred to as the "predetermined value"). That is, the condition for the suppression function (referred to as the "suppression function activation condition") is that the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value. The predetermined value is set to "95,000," and the suppression function activation condition is met when the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value of "95,000." As mentioned above, when the suppression function activation condition is met, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON. Furthermore, when the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" and the suppression function activation condition is met, the MY counter count is not updated (added or subtracted) even if a safe ball or an out ball occurs until the suppression function is deactivated (until the suppression function activation flag is turned OFF), and the MY counter count remains at the predetermined value of "95,000." In other words, the upper limit value of the MY counter is "95000", and even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000". Additionally, even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000", the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000". In other words, before MY reaches "95000", the MY counter will be updated in conjunction with the update of MY. As a variant, even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter may also be updated in conjunction, i.e., updated to exceed "95000", or even if MY reaches or exceeds "95000" and then falls below "95000", the value of the MY counter may also be updated in conjunction, i.e., updated to fall below "95000". Even with this configuration, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000", so the suppression function can be reliably activated. As another variation, when MY exceeds "95000", the MY counter value can be set to "95000" and then switched to "0" (initialized (cleared)), and the MY counter can be configured not to be updated (fixed at "0"). Even with this configuration, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000", so the suppression function can be reliably activated.

When the suppression function is activated, the game transitions to a game stop state, and the game progress is halted. As an example, when the suppression function is activated, special symbol win/loss determination, symbol determination, and variation pattern determination are not performed, and easy-to-win states (also known as high base states) and special games are not executed. Furthermore, when the suppression function is activated, the operation of the launching device is restricted, and the launching of game balls is halted regardless of how the launching device is operated. However, even when the suppression function is activated, if there are game balls to be paid out (prize balls based on winning before the suppression function was activated), the payout operation is permitted, and the game balls are paid out without delay. In other words, since the MY counter is incremented based on the planned number of prize balls to be paid out, rather than the actual number of prize balls actually paid out, even in a situation where all of the prize balls corresponding to the planned number of prize balls have not been paid out, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to the increment of the planned number of prize balls, the suppression function will be activated (because the suppression function activation condition is naturally met), but even in that case, the remaining part of the planned number of prize balls (the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out when the suppression function starts to operate) will be paid out to the end. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, even while the suppression function is operating, a prize ball error (the above-mentioned game ball payout error) may occur in the gaming machine due to the payout of game balls during the operation of the suppression function, and in that case, an error notification corresponding to the prize ball error will be executed. Even when a special game is not being played, if the MY Counter's count reaches the specified value of 95,000 (for example, when the MY Counter's count is 94,998 and a game ball enters the general prize slot, three prize balls are paid out), the prize balls that cause the MY Counter's count to exceed the specified value of 95,000 (the remaining one prize ball in the above example) will be paid out until the end (however, of course, no prize balls will be paid out based on subsequent wins). When the suppression function is activated, the game stops and the firing stops, but this configuration is not limited to this; the suppression function may be configured to enter the game stop state but not the firing stops.

Furthermore, the timing of the suppression function activation differs between when the MY counter count reaches the specified value of "95,000" while special play is not being played (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied) and when the MY counter count reaches the specified value of "95,000" while special play is being played (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied). If the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while special play is not being played, the suppression function activates simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the satisfaction of this suppression function activation condition. In other words, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while special play is not being played, the satisfaction of this suppression function activation condition and the activation of the suppression function will be substantially the same timing. If the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while a symbol is changing and a miss is displayed, the suppression function will activate when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the MY counter count reaches the specified value of "95,000"), regardless of whether the change display is a miss or a jackpot. Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is met during the display of the changing symbols, the suppression function is activated at the time the suppression function activation condition is met, without waiting for the changing symbols to stop (even before the changing symbols stop), and the changing symbols are forcibly terminated midway. Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is met during the execution of the jackpot changing symbols, the player will not be able to enjoy the special game that would normally be played after the changing symbols end, and will not be able to earn the profits (prize balls) that would be obtained in the special game. The reason for this is that even if the game is forcibly stopped midway through the changing symbols of a jackpot, the player will not know the result of the game (that he or she has won a jackpot) at this point, so even if the game suddenly stops midway through the changing symbols, the player is unlikely to feel dissatisfied or distrustful. In addition, even if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to a winning ball entering the second starting port while the second starting port is open once every four seconds in the easy-to-enter state, or if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to a winning ball entering another general entry port, it is preferable to forcibly close the second starting port (even if the opening time remains) when the specified value is reached. On the other hand, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function will not be activated until the end of the special game (the jackpot end demo period in which the jackpot end demo effect is executed), and will be activated after the end of the special game (the jackpot end demo period). In other words, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, game play can be continued from the time the suppression function activation condition is satisfied until the end of the special game, and the timing of the suppression function activation will be substantially different from the timing of the suppression function activation. The reason for this is that if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, even if the special game is continued without immediately stopping, the player will only acquire a limited number of prize balls in the remaining rounds (unit games), and the player will not gain excessive profits (there will be no sense of unfairness with other players). Furthermore, if the suppression function is suddenly activated during the execution of a special game and the game is stopped, it may cause the player to feel distrustful or dissatisfied. As a variant, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the end of the final round of the special game, and the suppression function may be activated after the end of the final round. Alternatively, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the start of the jackpot end demo period of the special game, and the suppression function may be activated after the start of the jackpot end demo period. As a further modification, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95,000" during the execution of a special game (even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the count value of the MY counter may be updated if a safe ball or an out ball occurs until the special game ends (until the suppression function is activated). In this case, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the specified value "95,000" after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (even if it returns to the state before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the suppression function may be activated after the special game ends. In other words, once the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may be guaranteed to be activated when the special game ends, even if the count value of the MY counter increases or decreases from the specified value "95,000" until the special game ends. Note that even in this modification, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, prize balls can be paid out based on the entry of game balls into the large prize slot, etc., until the special game ends.

Next, we will explain how to disable the suppression function. If the suppression function is activated, it can be deactivated by clearing the RAM when the power is turned on. That is, if the suppression function is activated, the suppression function activation flag can be switched from ON to OFF by turning off the power to the gaming machine and then restoring power with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), thereby deactivating the suppression function. Here, a power restoration with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) refers to a power restoration that transitions to "RAM clear mode" (a mode in which a RAM clear process is executed, and which automatically transitions to "game mode," described below, upon completion of the RAM clear process) as the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored). Furthermore, a power restoration without a RAM clear refers to a power restoration that transitions to "game mode" (a mode in which play is possible, such as determining whether a special symbol is a hit or miss, determining symbols, and determining variation patterns) as the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored). In addition, if the suppression function is activated and the gaming machine is powered off and then power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will not switch from ON to OFF, and the suppression function will not be released. In that case, the suppression function will remain activated even after power is restored, and the game and firing states will continue. Also, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a special game (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is turned off before the special game ends and power is restored with RAM clearing (operating the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will switch from ON to OFF when power is restored, and the suppression function will not be activated even if the special game resumed after power is restored ends. On the other hand, if the suppression function activation conditions are met while a special game is being played (the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is turned off before the special game ends and then restored without clearing the RAM (by operating the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will not switch from ON to OFF when the power is restored, and the suppression function will be activated when the special game resumes after the power is restored and ends.

Next, we will explain how to initialize the MY counter. If the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on before the suppression function activation conditions are met (when the suppression function activation flag is OFF), the MY counter will be cleared (the MY counter will become "0") when power is restored, whether the power is restored with or without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). In other words, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be cleared (the count value before the power was cut off) when the gaming machine is powered on, regardless of whether the RAM clear switch was operated when the power was turned on. Therefore, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be cleared when power is restored, regardless of whether the transition mode when power is restored (when power is turned on) is the RAM clear mode or the game mode described above. On the other hand, if the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the MY counter is not cleared upon power restoration, and the count value before power restoration (95,000) is retained. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is powered off and powered back on after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the MY counter is cleared upon power restoration (the count value before power restoration is erased). As a variant, the MY counter may be configured to be initialized (cleared) when its count value reaches a specified value of "95,000," i.e., when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. As a further variant, an operating means (referred to as a "count continuation switch") for prohibiting initialization of the MY counter may be installed. For example, if the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of the advance notification effect described below and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, if the power is restored while the count continuation switch is operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, and the count value before the power was cut off will continue.

Next, we will explain external information signals related to the suppression function. External information signals (also referred to as external signals or external information) related to the suppression function include a suppression function pre-activation signal and a suppression function activation signal. The suppression function pre-activation signal indicates that the suppression function is scheduled to activate soon. The suppression function pre-activation signal is output continuously for a fixed period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) at a predetermined trigger before the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000." The predetermined trigger is when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specific value (e.g., any number greater than or equal to 90,000 and less than 95,000 can be applied). For example, the specific value is "94,500," which is 500 times before the specified value of "95,000." Therefore, the timing at which the suppression function pre-activation signal starts to be output is not the same as or approximately the same as (not substantially the same as) the timing at which the advance notification effect described below starts to be executed. As a variant, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90000," a suppression function pre-activation signal may be output, and the output timing of the suppression function pre-activation signal may be the same or approximately the same as the execution timing of the advance notification effect described below (they may be substantially the same timing). The suppression function activation signal is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is activated. The suppression function activation signal is output continuously from the time the suppression function is activated until the activation of the suppression function is deactivated. In other words, the suppression function activation signal begins to be output when the suppression function is activated, and stops being output when power is restored accompanied by RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch). Therefore, the output timing of the suppression function activation signal is the same or approximately the same as the time when the suppression function starts to activate (they are substantially the same timing).

Next, we will explain the content of the suppression function-related effects. Suppression function-related effects include advance notification effects (notification effects before the suppression function is activated) and suppression notification effects (notification effects when the suppression function is activated). Advance notification effects are executed before the suppression function is activated, and suggest or notify that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. Advance notification effects are executed when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value. In other words, the execution condition for the advance notification effect (referred to as the "advance notification condition") is met when the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value. "90000" is set as the predetermined value. The predetermined value, which is the count value of the MY counter ("95000") that is the execution condition for the suppression notification, may be referred to as the first predetermined value, and the predetermined value, which is the count value of the MY counter ("90000" in this case) that is the advance notification condition, may be referred to as the second predetermined value. The predetermined value is not limited to "90000" and can be set by the administrator at will (however, it is preferable that the predetermined value be "90000" or less). In other words, the conditions for executing the advance notification effect (advance notification conditions) are set as variable conditions (fluid conditions) that can be set by the administrator at will. On the other hand, the predetermined value is limited to "95000" and cannot be set by the administrator at will. In other words, the conditions for activating the suppression function (suppression function activation conditions) are set as fixed conditions that cannot be set by the player at will. The term "administrator" refers to a person who manages gaming machines, typically a store clerk at a gaming parlor or an employee of a gaming machine manufacturer. Advance notification effects include advance notification display effects and advance notification sound output effects. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the term "advance notification effect" refers to either "advance notification display effects only" or "advance notification effects and advance notification sound output effects."

The advance notification display includes, as image displays, a first message display stating, "When today's ball output reaches 95,000, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, play will end and firing will stop," and a second message display stating, "Approximately **** balls remaining until activation." Note that "****" indicates the MY value remaining until the suppression function is activated. This "****" value is updated based on the ball difference signal. The first and second message displays will continue to be displayed from the time the advance notification conditions are met until the suppression function is activated (except when the MY counter count value falls to the specified lower limit of "89,000," described below). The first message display is always a fixed message display while this advance notification display (advance notification display display) is being executed, regardless of whether the MY counter increases or decreases (the first message display does not change). On the other hand, the second message display is updated and displayed every time the count value of the MY counter increases by 500, starting from when the advance notification condition is satisfied (when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "90000"). In other words, the second message display is a message display that depends on the count value of the MY counter, and the "****" portion is updated and displayed every time "500" is added from the specified value "90000". Specifically, first, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90,000," the second message display displays the message "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "90,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91,000," the second message display switches to "Approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 3,500 shots remaining until activation," and similarly, the second message display switches every time the count value of the MY counter is increased by "500," and finally, when the count value of the MY counter reaches "94,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation." Although the second message display is updated in units of 500, it is not limited to this configuration and may be updated in units of a different number (for example, in units of 1, 10, 100, 1000, etc.). Furthermore, the advance notification display effect does not have a dedicated background image, and a background image according to the current game situation (a stage background image that is a background image corresponding to the stage currently in progress, a reach background image that is a background image corresponding to the reach effect currently being executed, and a jackpot background image that is a background image corresponding to the jackpot effect currently being executed) is displayed behind the first message display and the second message display. The display priority of this advance notification display effect (layer priority, the priority of whether to display it on the front or back compared to other images) is set higher than the display priority of the background image and main decorative pattern 710 according to the current game status described above, and lower than the priority (layer priority) of the right-hit notification image (text effect suggesting the recommended firing position, such as "right hit"), sub-decorative pattern 720, and variable right display (icon display indicating a hold, which can display up to four hold icons corresponding to up to four holds, and variable icon, which is an icon display that is displayed when the first hold icon moves after the hold is consumed, and can display only one icon indicating that the game is changing). Furthermore, when a player performs a volume adjustment operation or a light intensity adjustment operation, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the volume setting adjustment screen (a screen showing the current volume level, a screen in which the display mode of the image showing the volume level changes in response to the volume adjustment operation, for example, a screen in which a musical note mark image is accompanied by one of number images 1 to 5 indicating the current volume level, and the number in the number image changes in response to the volume adjustment operation) and the light intensity setting adjustment screen (a screen showing the current light intensity level, a screen in which the display mode of the image showing the light intensity level changes in response to the light intensity adjustment operation, for example, a screen in which a light bulb mark image is accompanied by one of number images 1 to 5 indicating the current light intensity level, and the number in the number image changes in response to the light intensity adjustment operation). Furthermore, when a predetermined error occurs in the gaming machine, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the error notification image (an image that notifies the user that an error has occurred and is displayed in a manner that allows the user to determine the type of error currently occurring; for example, if magnetism is detected, a text image of "Magnetic Sensor Error" is displayed; if a door opening is detected, a text image of "Door Open Error" is displayed; and if prize ball payout has stopped, a text image of "Game Ball Payout Error" is displayed). Note that while the main decorative pattern 710 can be superimposed on the advance notification display effect, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect be set higher. Therefore, when the advance notification display effect is executed while the main decorative pattern 710 is performing the movement at the start of fluctuation, the movement at the temporary stop, the movement at the time of reach, or the swinging movement, the display of each movement and the display of the advance notification display effect are superimposed, but the advance notification display effect is displayed in the foreground because of its higher display priority (layer priority). However, it is preferable that the sub-decorative pattern 720 not be superimposed on the advance notification display effect. Furthermore, the aforementioned demo effect, which is a standby effect (a screen displayed when the fluctuation has stopped and there are no reserved balls for a predetermined period of time, such as 255 seconds, indicating that the game is in standby mode, also referred to as a standby demo effect), can be superimposed on the advance notification display effect, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect be set higher. It is preferable that the volume setting adjustment screen, the light intensity setting adjustment screen, and the right-hit notification image not be superimposed on the advance notification display effect. The volume adjustment operation is performed by operating the left and right arrow keys. Operating the right key increases the volume level and increases the number image on the volume setting adjustment screen, for example, from 3 to 4, while operating the left key decreases the volume level and decreases the number image on the volume setting adjustment screen, for example, from 3 to 2. Additionally, the light intensity adjustment operation involves operating the up and down arrow keys; operating the up key increases the light intensity level and increases the displayed number image on the light intensity setting adjustment screen from 3 to 4, for example; operating the down key decreases the light intensity level and decreases the displayed number image on the light intensity setting adjustment screen from 3 to 2, for example.

Figures 76 and 77 show examples (parts 1 and 2) of pre-announcement display. Specifically, Figure 76 shows an example of the pre-announcement display when the MY counter count reaches "90,000" immediately after the start of a jackpot game (first round). Figure 77 shows an example of the pre-announcement display when the MY counter count reaches "91,000" during the easy-to-score state after the jackpot game ends. Note that in Figures 76 and 77, as explained above, the first specified value, which is the MY counter count that serves as the suppression function activation condition, is set to "95,000," the second specified value, which is the MY counter count that serves as the pre-announcement condition, is set to "90,000," and the second message display is updated and displayed in units of 500. Figure 76 shows that when the MY counter count reaches the second specified value, the first and second message displays are displayed as images for the pre-announcement display. The "94,500 points" shown in the lower right of FIG. 76 corresponds to the cumulative prize ball count display when the prize ball count-up effect is executed. The prize ball count-up effect is an effect that counts up and displays the cumulative prize ball count in a predetermined advantageous play area. The prize ball count-up effect and cumulative prize ball display may count up and display the prize balls in individual special games (e.g., jackpot games) (each special game may be considered an advantageous play area), or may count up and display the prize balls in one or more special games and advantageous states after the special games (specifically, for example, a probability fluctuation state, a fluctuation time reduction state, an electric chute support state, a small win rush, etc.) (a series of play areas consisting of one or more special games and advantageous states after the special games may be considered an advantageous play area). In the case of FIG. 76, "94,500 points" means that the cumulative prize ball count in the series of play areas is "approximately 94,500 balls." Furthermore, Figure 77 shows that the count value of the MY counter has increased from the state in Figure 76, causing the second text display in the advance notification effect image display to be updated.

The pre-alarm sound output effect is an effect in which a predetermined pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker. The pre-alarm sound may be, for example, "The suppression function will be activated with **** shots remaining." Note that "****" represents the remaining MY (number of balls remaining) value until the suppression function is activated, and corresponds to the "****" in the second message display. This pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker one or more times when the MY counter count reaches "90000," "90500," "91000," "91500," "92000," "92500," "93000," "93500," "94000," or "94500," i.e., when the second message display is updated. While this pre-alarm sound is being output, i.e., while the first and second message displays are being displayed and the pre-alarm sound is being output, other audio effects (such as background music and sound effects) are muted. After the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) are restored. As a variation, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, other sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) may be simultaneously played. In such a configuration, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, the volume of the other sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) may be reduced to make the advance warning sound easier to hear (after the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original volume is restored).

This advance notification effect ends when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" (when the suppression function activation conditions are met). In other words, when the suppression function activation conditions are met, the advance notification effect switches to the suppression notification effect. However, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while special play is being played (when the suppression function activation conditions are met), the advance notification effect will continue to be executed until the end of the special play, and when the special play ends, the advance notification effect will end and the suppression notification effect will begin. As a modified example, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value of "95,000" during the execution of a special game (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the MY counter's count value reaching the specified value of "95,000" may be triggered by the occurrence of the trigger, and the pre-announcement display effect may be switched to a special message stating, "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end after the special game ends and ball firing will stop." This special message may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. This special message is also a type of pre-announcement effect and may be referred to as a special pre-announcement effect (special pre-announcement display effect). As a further modified example, the pre-announcement effect may be configured not to be executed during the execution of a special game. In other words, if a special game starts during the execution of a pre-announcement effect, the pre-announcement effect being executed may be interrupted when the special game starts, and the interrupted pre-announcement effect may be resumed when the special game ends. In such a configuration, it is preferable to resume the advance notification effect in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter after the special game has ended. Furthermore, if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the advance notification effect may not be started during the execution of the special game (the execution of the advance notification effect may be delayed until the end of the special game), and the advance notification effect may be started after the end of the special game. In such a configuration, it is preferable to start the advance notification effect in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter after the end of the special game. Furthermore, the advance notification effect also ends when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit (e.g., "89000"). In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" and the advance notification effect is started, if the count value of the MY counter falls to or below the predetermined lower limit "89000" without reaching the specified value "95000," the advance notification effect ends without progressing to the suppressed notification effect. Here, when the advance notification effect is started, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the predetermined value "90000" without reaching the specified value "95000", the advance notification effect continues to be executed until it falls below the predetermined lower limit value "89000". Note that if the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000", the advance notification effect will not be executed again even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. However, if a special condition is satisfied after the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000" and before the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again, the advance notification effect may be executed again when the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. For example, if the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit of "89000," the special condition may be satisfied when the count value of the MY counter subsequently falls to "80000," which is a value even smaller than the predetermined lower limit of "89000." When the count value of the MY counter then reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, the advance notification effect may be executed again. As another variation, if the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit of "89000," the special condition may be satisfied when the count value of the MY counter subsequently falls to the initial value of "0" (when the bottom value at which MY is not subtracted even if an out ball is hit, or when the count value is cleared), and when the count value of the MY counter then reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, the advance notification effect may be executed again. In addition, if the count value of the MY counter falls below the predetermined value "90000" and before it falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000," a so-called consecutive win break occurs (when the consecutive win state ends), even if the count value of the MY counter has not fallen to the predetermined lower limit value "89000." Here, consecutive wins (consecutive win state) refer to a state in which the easy-to-score state continues without returning to the normal game state after the occurrence of a first win that triggers a transition from the normal game state (low base state) to the easy-to-score state (high base state) (a state in which jackpots occur consecutively in the easy-to-score state starting from the first win), or a state in which the high-probability state continues without returning to the normal state after the occurrence of a first win that triggers a transition from the normal state (low probability state) to the high-probability state (a state in which jackpots occur consecutively in the high-probability state starting from the first win). As a further variant, without requiring any special conditions, when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit value of "89000", if the count value of the MY counter again reaches the predetermined value of "90000", a pre-announcement effect may be executed again. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the second message display is updated (by adding "500" to the difference between the thresholds) every time the count value of the MY counter reaches each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update to the advance notification display, but conversely, the second message display is also updated (by subtracting "500" from the difference between the thresholds) when the count value of the MY counter falls below each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update to the advance notification display. For example, if the MY counter is subtracted from "91,000" to "90,999," the second message display is updated (decremented) from "Approximately 3,500 shots remaining until activation" to "Approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation." However, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the specified value of "90,000," the second message display is not updated and continues to display "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" until it falls below the specified lower limit of "89,000." In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter is subtracted from "90,000" to "89,999," the second message display continues to display "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" (until it falls below the specified lower limit of "89,000"). As a modified example, when the count value of the MY counter falls below each threshold value (90,000, 90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500) that triggers an update of the advance notification effect, the second message display may not be updated, and the current display (original display) may be continued. For convenience, in the following description, 500 MYs, which are the update cycle of the second message display, are considered as one unit, and the advance notification effect that occurs when the count value of the MY counter is between "90,000" and "90,499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) among the series of advance notification effects may be referred to as the "first unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "90500" and "90999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "second unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "91000" and "91499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "third unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "91500" and "91999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fourth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "92000" and "92499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fifth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "92500" and "92999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 2500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "sixth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "93000" and "93499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 2000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "seventh unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "93,500" and "93,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 1,500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "8th unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "94,000" and "94,499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 1,000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "9th unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "94,500" and "94,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "10th unit notification effect."

The suppression notification effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the MY counter's count value has reached the specified value of "95,000," i.e., that the suppression function has been activated and the game has transitioned to a stopped state. This suppression notification effect is executed when the suppression function is activated. Specifically, if the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is not being played, the suppression notification effect is executed when the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000." If the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is being played, the suppression notification effect is executed after the special game ends. The suppression notification effect includes a suppression notification image display effect and a suppression notification sound output effect. Note that, while the suppression notification effect is being executed, the frame lamp (the lamp located on the frame) is fully lit (or fully flashing) in red, and the board lamp (the lamp located on the game board) is turned off, although this is not shown in the figure. As a variant, both the frame lamp and the board lamp may be turned off during the suppression notification effect. The suppression notification display effect displays a dedicated screen (suppression screen) to notify players that the suppression function has been activated. This suppression screen includes a special message display and a special background image. The special message display includes a message such as, "Today's ball output has reached 95,000. The suppression function has been activated. Today's game will end. Please be careful not to forget to remove your cards." The special background image is a special background image displayed behind the special message display, and is composed of, for example, a blackout image. The display priority of this suppression screen is set higher than the display priority of any other effect image (i.e., it is set as the highest priority layer). When this suppression screen is displayed, any other effect image (normal game screen) becomes invisible or difficult to see. When a specific error (e.g., an error of high priority or importance) occurs, an error notification image corresponding to the specific error may be displayed in front of the suppression screen. The suppression notification sound output effect is an effect in which a suppression notification sound is output from a speaker. The suppression notification sound is, for example, a sound saying "The suppression function has been activated." This suppression notification sound output effect repeatedly outputs the suppression notification sound while the suppression function is activated. Note that the suppression notification sound output effect may be configured to output a specific error sound for a short period of time, followed by repeatedly outputting the suppression notification sound. The suppression notification effect ends when the suppression function is deactivated. In other words, by performing a RAM clear operation when the power is turned on, the suppression function is deactivated and the suppression notification effect ends. Note that while the suppression notification display effect continues until the suppression function is deactivated, the suppression notification sound output effect may continue for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the suppression function is activated. In this case, if a power outage occurs before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the suppression notification effect was executed, and power is restored without clearing the RAM (by operating the RAM clear switch), it is preferable that after power is restored, the suppression notification display effect continues to be executed, but the suppression notification sound output effect is not executed (even if there is time remaining in the predetermined time).

Figure 78 is a diagram showing an example of the display of a suppression notification effect. Specifically, Figure 78 shows an example of the display of a suppression notification effect when the count value of the MY counter reaches the first specified value of "95,000," which is the condition for activating the suppression function. Figure 78 shows that, when the condition for activating the suppression function is met, the display switches from the advance notification effect exemplified in Figures 76 and 77 to the display screen for the suppression notification effect (suppression screen), and that the display priority of the suppression screen is set to the highest priority.

When a special game is not being played (when the symbol is being displayed), if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of 95,000 (for example, if the specified value of 95,000 is reached upon winning a prize at the general prize slot), a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated. The game state immediately before this suppression function is activated is an easy-to-score state, and activation of the suppression function ends this easy-to-score state. Therefore, when the suppression function is activated, the flag indicating the easy-to-score state is turned OFF, and if the second starting port is open, it is forcibly closed in the middle of the process, and the variable display in the easy-to-score state (the variable display currently being executed) is forcibly ended. Furthermore, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during a round of play in a special game, the suppression function will not be activated until the end of the special game (jackpot end demo period), and the advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) will continue to be executed until the end of the special game (jackpot end demo period). Note that if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter will not be updated even if safe balls (the number of expected winning balls) and out balls (played balls) are generated until the end of the special game (the count value of the MY counter will maintain the specified value "95000"). Furthermore, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met while a special game is being played (if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000"), the most recent advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect: approximately 500 balls remaining until activation) will continue to be displayed until the end of the special game, but this configuration is not limited to this, and for example, it is also possible to display a message saying "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends," or, as mentioned above, the advance notification display effect may be switched to a special message saying "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so play will end after the special game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. When configured in this manner, the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed even in the tenth round (final round). However, this is not limited to a configuration in which the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed. For example, a message saying "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends" may be displayed, or, as described above, the advance notification display may be switched to special message saying "Today's ball output has reached 95,000, so play will end after the special game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may be displayed continuously until the special game ends. Thereafter, when the special game ends, a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated.

The cumulative prize ball count display area displays the cumulative number of prize balls (cumulative prize ball count) won up to the present time based on game balls entering the large prize slot during special games during consecutive wins, and this cumulative prize ball value (cumulative prize ball display) is updated and displayed by executing the prize ball count-up effect (also simply referred to as the count-up effect). The prize ball count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the large prize slot during special games during consecutive wins, the value of the cumulative prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is added to the value of the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the large prize slot. Because the system is designed so that 15 prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the large prize slot (the unit prize ball count for the large prize slot is 15), when a game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is counted up in units of 15 (a prize ball count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added to the cumulative prize ball count). Here, the cumulative prize ball count display area can display five-digit numbers, and more specifically, the cumulative prize ball count display can display 100,000 numbers from "0" to "99,999." Therefore, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display is "99,999." In this case, if the cumulative prize ball count display has reached the upper limit of "99,999," even if a game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count display does not change and maintains the upper limit of "99,999." In this way, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display, "99999," is set to a value greater than the specified value of "95000," which is the upper limit of MY. In other words, the cumulative prize ball count display when the upper limit of "99999" is reached can be greater than the specified value of MY of "95000" notified in advance in the advance notification effect. This allows accurate notification that the number of prize balls won by the player has exceeded the specified value of MY of "95000," thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. Furthermore, since the cumulative prize ball count display is a value that does not take into account outgoing balls and can be a value that exceeds the specified value of MY of "95000," it is preferable to configure it to be able to display up to the upper limit of "99999." As a variant, even if the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," a pseudo prize ball count-up effect (variable display of the cumulative prize ball count display) may be executed when a game ball enters the large prize slot. A pseudo prize ball count-up effect may be, for example, 99999 → 91111 → 92222 → 93333 → ... → 98888 → 99999, where the initial value (99999) and the final value (99999) are the same, but the values between them are displayed randomly, making it appear as if the cumulative prize ball count is being counted up. As a further variation, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," if a new prize ball is paid out (when a gaming ball enters a big prize), "FFFFF" may be displayed as the cumulative prize ball count display to suggest or notify that the cumulative prize ball count display has exceeded the display limit (is in an overflow state). As a further variation, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," or when a new prize ball payout occurs after the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," the display may be switched to "FFFFF" (without displaying "99999" thereafter), and the "FFFFF" display may be maintained regardless of whether a new prize ball payout occurs thereafter. As a further variation, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "94999," which is the number just before the MY default value of "95000." When this number is exceeded, a text image "Limit Reached" may be displayed, and thereafter the cumulative prize ball count display may not be updated, but the text image "Limit Break" may continue to be displayed. As a variation, when this number is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. Similarly, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "95,000," which is the same as the MY default value of "95,000." If the value is exceeded, the text image "Limit Reached" is displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, but the text image "Limit Breaking" continues to be displayed. Even in this configuration, if the value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image "Limit Breaking" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. As a further variation, in order to prevent players from being overly gambling-minded, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to a value (e.g., "50,000") sufficiently smaller than the default value of "95,000." If the value is exceeded, the text image "Limit Reached" is displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, but the text image "Limit Breaking" continues to be displayed. Even with this configuration, if the cumulative prize ball count exceeds that value, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden and instead a "Break the Limit" text image may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. The display conditions for "Break the Limit" can be set as appropriate, but while "Break the Limit" is displayed, it is preferable not to execute the highlight effect (a display that notifies players that the cumulative prize ball count has reached a predetermined specific value when a game ball enters a special prize ball slot during special play, and displays the aforementioned highlight effect) even if the cumulative prize ball count value is a specific value. Furthermore, if the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit and another ball subsequently enters the special prize ball slot, the cumulative prize ball display does not display a value exceeding the upper limit, while the MY counter count is incremented.

The highlight effect is an effect that notifies players that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a predetermined specific value when a game ball enters the big prize slot during a special game. It is an effect that can simultaneously display a prize ball count corresponding to the specific value (for example, a prize ball count display such as "2500" or "35000" displayed in a larger size than the cumulative prize ball count display, and unlike the cumulative prize ball count display, a count-up effect is not performed, but a fixed value that is a multiple of 2500, such as "2500" or "35000," is displayed for a certain period of time and then disappears) in addition to the cumulative prize ball count display. Here, the highlight effect may be configured to include specific characters in addition to the numerical value, such as "2500 GET" or "35000 GET." The specific value corresponds to a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2,500), and is set in increments of 2,500, such as "2,500," "5,000," "7,500," "10,000," "12,500," etc. The value of the predetermined number of prize balls, "2,500," is set to a value smaller than the difference value "5,000" obtained by subtracting the predetermined value "90,000" from the MY default value "95,000." As a result, during the period from when the count value of the MY counter, which is updated in response to a ball entering the large prize slot during a special game during a consecutive win, reaches the scheduled value "90,000" to when it reaches the default value "95,000," i.e., from when the advance notification effect begins until the suppression function is activated, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value (the multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls) at least once, and the highlight effect will be executed at least once. This ensures that at least one highlight effect will be executed even if the suppression function is about to be activated, and gives the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

Even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during special play and the suppression function activation condition is met, the prize ball count-up effect will continue without being interrupted. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is met during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the end of the special play, and the special play will continue as is. Therefore, the prize ball count-up effect will not be interrupted midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). Although details will be described later, if a subsequent prize ball count-up effect is executed based on a second game ball entering the first large prize slot (a prize that triggers the MY counter's count value to reach the specified value of 95,000) while a previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize slot, the previous prize ball count-up effect and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as continuous and integrated count-up effects. Therefore, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect, the currently executing prize ball count-up effect can be continued without interruption. This allows the player to see the prize ball count-up effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's motivation to play even after the MY counter's count value has reached the specified value of 95,000. In other words, if the count value of the MY Counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while a special game is being played, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but the special game will continue as is, so no actual harm will occur even if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is allowed. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Note that although the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the specified value of "95000" is "a game ball entering the large prize slot," this is not limited to this configuration, and the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the specified value of "95000" may also be "a game ball entering the general prize slot."

Even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during special play and the advance notification condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up effect will continue without interruption. In other words, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (the advance notification effect has begun), the prize ball count-up effect will not be terminated midway, and the prize ball counter-up effect will be completed (executed to the end) to continue the special play as is. In this case, if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game but the suppression function activation condition is not satisfied, the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) not only during the execution of the special game but also after the special game has ended, and the advance notification effect will be executed throughout the execution and after the special game has ended. Although details will be described later, if a subsequent prize ball count-up effect is executed based on a game ball entering a second large prize entry slot (a prize that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000") while a previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize entry slot, the previous prize ball count-up effect and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as continuous and integrated count-up effects. Therefore, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect, the currently executing prize ball count-up effect can be continued without interruption. This allows the player to see the prize ball count-up effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's motivation to play even after the count value of the MY counter has reached the predetermined value "90,000." In other words, even if the count value of the MY Counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue as is until the suppression function is activated, so there is no real harm caused by allowing the execution of the prize ball count-up effect. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, the player's motivation to play may be reduced. When the prize ball count-up effect and the advance notification effect are displayed overlapping each other, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect. Note that the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000" is "a game ball entering the large prize entry slot," but this configuration is not limited thereto. The winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000" may also be "a game ball entering the general prize entry slot."

Even if the MY counter count reaches the specified value of 95,000 during the execution of an emphasis effect during a special game and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect will continue without being interrupted. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of an emphasis effect (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game will continue as is. Therefore, the emphasis effect will not be interrupted midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). This allows the player to see the emphasis effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's desire to play even after the MY counter count reaches the specified value of 95,000. In other words, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while a special game is being played, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but the special game will continue as is, so even if the execution of the emphasis effect is permitted, no real harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced.

Even if the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000" during the execution of a special game and the advance notification condition is met, the ongoing emphasis effect continues without interruption. In other words, even if the advance notification condition is met during the execution of an emphasis effect (the execution of an advance notification effect has begun), the ongoing emphasis effect is not terminated midway and is completed (executed to the end) to allow the special game to continue. In this case, if the advance notification condition is met during the execution of a special game but the suppression function activation condition is not met, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) not only during the execution of the special game but also after the special game has ended, and the advance notification effect is executed throughout the execution of the special game and after its end. This allows the player to view the emphasis effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's desire to play even after the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000." In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue as is until the suppression function is activated, so no actual harm will occur even if the execution of the emphasis effect is allowed. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Furthermore, when the emphasis effect and the advance notification effect are displayed overlapping each other, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the emphasis effect.

The count-up display time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to 0.03 seconds. In other words, the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is counted up in increments of 0.03 seconds. Therefore, the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect, which is performed when one game ball enters the large prize opening, is calculated by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening. In other words, the execution time of this prize ball count-up effect (the time from the start to the end of one prize ball count-up effect) is 15 (unit prize ball number) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds. The execution time of the highlighting effect (the period from the start of display to the end of display) is the time value from the start of displaying the highlighting display (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of prize balls to the end, and the execution time of the highlighting effect is set to "3 seconds" regardless of which specific value the cumulative number of prize balls reaches (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000...). The execution time of this highlighting effect (3 seconds) is set longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one game ball into the big prize slot. Therefore, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value upon the entry of one gaming ball into the large prize opening, the prize ball count-up effect and the emphasis effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, but by setting the execution time of the emphasis effect to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect executed in response to the entry of one gaming ball into the large prize opening, it is possible to make the emphasis effect, which is rare, stand out even when the emphasis effect and the prize ball count-up effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, thereby further improving the player's sense of satisfaction and accomplishment when the emphasis effect occurs. Note that when the emphasis effect and the prize ball count-up effect are displayed overlapping each other, the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the emphasis effect is displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect. Additionally, the inter-round time (the time during which the large prize opening closes upon completion of the Nth round of play and remains closed until the N+1th round of play begins) may be set to a time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to one game ball entering the large prize opening, but shorter than the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasis effect.

The execution time of a pre-announcement effect is the time value from the start to the end of one pre-announcement effect, and is the time value from when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "90000" to when it reaches the specified value of "95000". However, this execution time of the pre-announcement effect does not include the execution time of the pre-announcement effect when the MY counter reaches the specified value of "90000" but then falls below the specified lower limit value of "89000" without reaching the specified value of "95000". In other words, the execution time of the pre-announcement effect here is the execution time when the pre-announcement effect is completed by reaching the specified value. The execution time of this advance notification effect is the time it takes for the MY counter count to increase by 5,000 (95,000 - 90,000 = 5,000) from the predetermined value of 90,000. This 5,000 increase requires the number of prize balls obtained through multiple special games (for example, approximately 1,500 balls x 3 or more in the case of a 10R jackpot). Therefore, it basically takes the execution time of multiple special games from the start to the end of one advance notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the advance notification effect is significantly longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the advance notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed simultaneously, the advance notification effect, which is a continuous display, is prioritized over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, thereby increasing the player's attention to the advance notification effect. This allows the player to reliably understand the current game situation (that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon). The advance notification effect described here is an advance notification display effect, but it has a similar relationship when compared with the execution time of the advance notification sound output effect (e.g., 5 seconds of audio output). Furthermore, as mentioned above, the advance notification effect is updated and displayed each time the MY counter count value is incremented by 500 from the predetermined value "90000," progressing in the order of the first unit notification effect → the second unit notification effect → the third unit notification effect → ... → the tenth unit notification effect. The execution time of any of the unit notification effects from the first unit notification effect to the tenth unit notification effect that make up this advance notification effect is longer than the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasis effect. In other words, the execution time of each unit notification effect is the time value until the MY counter count value increases by 500. This increase of 500 balls requires the number of prize balls obtained through multiple rounds of play (e.g., approximately 150 balls x 3 or more rounds). Therefore, it basically takes the execution time of multiple rounds of play from the start to the end of one unit notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the unit notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the unit notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed at the same time, the unit notification effect, which is a continuous display, is made to stand out preferentially over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, and the player's attention to the unit notification effect can be increased, so that the player can reliably know how many shots are left until the suppression function is activated each time the unit notification effect (second message display) changes. Note that because the highlighting effects are executed in units of 2500 earned prize balls, the highlighting effects are executed at most once (although at most one type of highlighting effect is displayed per special game) during one special game (for example, a 10R special game: number of earnable prize balls = approximately 1500), but because the unit notification effects are executed in units of 500 MY, the unit notification effects can be executed multiple times (multiple types of unit notification effects can be displayed per special game) during one special game (for example, a 10R special game: number of earnable prize balls = approximately 1500). This allows the player to see multiple types of unit notification effects during one special game, further increasing the player's attention to the advance notification effects.

When the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the large prize opening switch (also called the large prize detection device) detects the entry of the first game ball, a prize ball count-up effect based on this first entry (called the "previous prize ball count-up effect") begins. If a second game ball (a new game ball) enters the large prize opening while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and the large prize opening switch detects the entry of the second game ball, the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted and a prize ball count-up effect based on the second entry (called the "later prize ball count-up effect") begins. Specifically, in a previous prize ball count-up effect, if a count-up display from "1000" to "1015" is originally scheduled, and a new game ball enters the special prize entry slot while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and is detected by the special prize entry slot switch, the previous prize ball count-up effect being executed will be terminated midway (for example, the count-up display will be interrupted at "1010"), and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect will begin. Then, in the subsequent prize ball count-up effect, the remaining portion of the previous prize ball count-up effect (the count-up display from "1011" to "1015") will be omitted, and the count-up display will continue from the final value "1015" and continue from "1016" to "1030". Note that although some of the count-up displays of the previous prize ball count-up effect (count-up displays from "1011" to "1015") are omitted, the end (interruption) of the previous prize ball count-up effect and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up display. In this way, of the two prize ball count-up effects, the later prize ball count-up effect is set to have a higher priority than the previous prize ball count-up effect, and if the end of the previous prize ball count-up effect and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect overlap in time, the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect is given priority. Therefore, even if game balls continuously enter the large prize entry port and two prize ball count-up effects are executed consecutively, the first and second prize ball count-up effects can be executed smoothly without any delay, preventing a timing discrepancy between the entry of game balls into the large prize entry port and the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (which would cause a player to feel uncomfortable), and enabling the prize ball count-up effect to be properly completed during the execution of the special game (round game). As a variant, when the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted, the count-up display may be forcibly switched to the final value "1015" (i.e., if the execution was interrupted at "1010," the count-up display may be switched from "1010" to the final value "1015" in one go), and the count-up display of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect (a count-up display from "1016" to "1030") may be started from this final value. As a further variation, even if a second game ball (a new game ball) enters the large prize entrance while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and the large prize entrance switch detects the entry of the second game ball, the previous prize ball count-up effect will not be interrupted, and the previous prize ball count-up effect will be executed in its entirety before the next prize ball count-up effect begins (for example, even if the second game ball enters the large prize entrance when the count-up display shows "1010," the remaining part of the previous prize ball count-up effect, "1011" to "1015," may be executed, followed by the next prize ball count-up effect, "1016" to "1030").

If one more game ball enters the large prize opening during the execution of a special game, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). However, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening, there is a situation (referred to as a "specific situation") in which the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000." Specifically, in a specific situation where the cumulative number of prize balls is "97,485" during the execution of a special game and the count value of the MY counter is "94,998," if one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97,500" and an emphasis effect will be executed. On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before the last game ball enters the large prize opening (if three prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97,500," and the count value of the MY counter will reach the specified value of "95,000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3 - 1 = 2, MY = 94,998 + 2 = 95,000), thereby satisfying the suppression function activation condition (the suppression function activation flag will be turned ON). In this particular situation, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume after power is restored. When the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored (power restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), and after the power is restored, the MY counter will start counting again from the initial value "0." Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter at the time of the power cut reaches the specified value "95,000" when one more game ball enters the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart from the initial value "0," and even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the count value of the MY counter will not reach the specified value "95,000," and the suppression function activation conditions will not be satisfied (the suppression function activation flag will not be turned ON). Therefore, when the special game resumes after the power is restored, even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the special advance notification effect (special advance notification display effect) will not be executed, which contains the special message "Today's ball output has reached 95,000, so the game will end after the special game ends and ball firing will stop." However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0," if the MY counter count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" by continuing play after the power is restored, the suppression function activation condition will be met (the suppression function activation flag will be turned ON).

If one more game ball enters the large prize opening during the execution of a special game, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). However, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening, there is a situation (referred to as a "specified situation") in which the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90000." Specifically, in a predetermined situation where the cumulative number of prize balls is "97,485" during the execution of a special game and the count value of the MY counter is "89,998," if one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97,500" and an emphasis effect will be executed, whereas if one game ball enters the general prize opening before the last game ball enters the large prize opening (if three prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97,500," and the count value of the MY counter will reach the specified value of "90,000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3 - 1 = 2, MY = 89,998 + 2 = 90,000), thereby satisfying the advance notification condition. In this predetermined situation, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume after power is restored. When the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, if the power is turned off and then restored (without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), and after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart counting from its initial value of "0." Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter at the time of the power outage reaches the predetermined value of "90000" when one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the MY counter will restart from its initial value of "0" when the special game resumes after the power is restored. Therefore, even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the count value of the MY counter will not reach the predetermined value of "90000," and the advance notification condition will not be met. Therefore, in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the advance notification display effect (the first and second message displays) will not be executed, even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot. However, even if the MY counter returns to the initial value "0," if the game is continued after the power is restored and the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000," the advance notification condition will be satisfied. As a modified example, in a case where the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied and the power is restored while operating the count continuation switch (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the advance notification effect may not be resumed immediately after the power is restored. For example, if the power is cut off while the second unit notification display (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed (power is cut off when the MY counter count value is between "90,500" and "90,999"), and the count continuation switch is operated to restore power (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, but the second unit notification display (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) will not be resumed immediately after power is restored, and then, when the MY counter count value reaches "91,000", the advance notification display may be resumed from the third unit notification display (approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation). As a further variation, when the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation conditions are met and then power is restored while the count continuation switch is being operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, but the advance notification effect will not resume immediately after power is restored. For example, if the power is turned off while the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed (power is turned off when the MY counter count value is between "90,500" and "90,999"), and the count continuation switch is operated to restore power (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, and the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) will resume immediately after power is restored.

During the execution of a special game, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (after the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), there is a situation (referred to as "Situation A") in which the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the large prize opening. Specifically, in Situation A, during the execution of a special game, if the count value of the MY counter has already reached the specified value of "95000" and the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485," which is 15 balls less than the predetermined specific value of "97500," when one more game ball enters the large prize opening (15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed. In this situation A, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being played before the power outage will resume. However, after the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the predetermined value of "97,500," and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be played when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value of "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching the specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, in this situation A, if power is restored without clearing the RAM (if power is restored without clearing the RAM after the suppression function activation conditions are met), the MY counter is not initialized (the MY counter's count value of "95,000" is not cleared) and the suppression function activation flag remains ON. Therefore, in the special game resumed after power is restored, a special advance notification effect (special advance notification display effect) is executed, which contains special wording stating, "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end after the special game ends and ball firing will stop." In addition, when the special game resumed after power is restored (the jackpot end demo period) ends, the suppression function is activated, and the suppression notification effect is executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. As a variant, in the special game resumed after power is restored, the suppression function is activated when the special game (the jackpot end demo period) ends without executing the special advance notification effect (special advance notification display effect), and the suppression notification effect is executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously.

During the execution of a special game, after the advance notification conditions are satisfied, i.e., after the advance notification effect has begun, there is a situation (referred to as "Situation B") in which the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the large prize slot. Specifically, in Situation B, during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter has already reached the specified value of "90000" (however, it is preferable that the count value of the MY counter be "90000" or "90500" or the like, with some margin before reaching the specified value of "95000"), and the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485," which is 15 balls less than the specified value of "97500." When one more game ball enters the large prize slot (and 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500," and an emphasis effect will be executed. In this situation B, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being played before the power outage will resume. However, after the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the predetermined value of "97,500," and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be played when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value of "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching the specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, even if the pre-alarm conditions are met, if the power is turned off and then restored (without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Therefore, when special gameplay resumes after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart counting from its initial value of "0." Therefore, after the power is restored, the pre-alarm conditions are no longer met, and the pre-alarm effect that was running at the time of the most recent power outage will not resume after the power is restored (special gameplay resumed after the power is restored). (The pre-alarm effect will not be executed; more specifically, the first and second message displays will not be executed.) However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0," if gameplay continues after the power is restored, and the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "90,000" (if the pre-alarm conditions are met), the pre-alarm effect will be executed.

The system is configured so that volume and light intensity settings are disabled while the suppression function is activated (while the suppression notification effect is being executed). In other words, when the suppression function is activated and the game is transitioned to a stopped state, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed, the volume level does not change (the volume operation is disabled). Therefore, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed during the execution of the suppression notification effect, the volume level of the suppression notification sound (the voice saying "The suppression function has been activated") does not change, and the suppression notification sound is always output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume). Furthermore, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed, the volume setting adjustment screen is not displayed. Alternatively, the suppression notification sound may be output in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level. Similarly, when the suppression function is activated and the game is transitioned to a stopped state, even if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed, the light intensity level does not change (the light intensity operation is disabled). Therefore, even if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed during the execution of the suppression notification effect, the light intensity of the frame lamp related to the suppression notification when fully lit does not change. Furthermore, even if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed, the light intensity setting adjustment screen is not displayed. However, even if the suppression function activation conditions are met, if a special game is being played, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression notification effect is not being executed), so volume and light intensity settings are possible during the special game, and a volume setting adjustment screen based on the volume adjustment operation and a light intensity setting adjustment screen based on the light intensity adjustment operation are displayed. Note that, if a pre-notification effect is being played, whether during a variable or special game, a volume adjustment operation changes the volume level (the volume operation is enabled), and a light intensity adjustment operation changes the light level (the light operation is enabled), and a volume setting adjustment screen based on the volume adjustment operation and a light intensity setting adjustment screen based on the light intensity adjustment operation are displayed. Here, the pre-notification sound output effect may be configured to always output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume) rather than in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level, or may be configured to output in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level.

The relationship between the various effects (standby demo effects, effect button operations, and specified operations of the main decorative pattern 710) and the suppression function is as follows. Details of the effect button operations will be described later. The standby demo effect can be executed (started) even while a pre-announcement effect is being executed, but the standby demo effect will not be executed (started) while a suppression notification effect is being executed. The pre-announcement effect can be executed (started) even while a standby demo effect is being executed, and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (started) even while a standby demo effect is being executed, but the standby demo effect will be forcibly terminated. The effect button operation can be executed (started) even while a pre-announcement effect is being executed, but the effect button operation will not be executed (started) while a suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that advance notification effects can be executed (started) even while effect button operations are being executed, and can be executed in parallel; however, while effect button operations are being executed, suppression notification effects can be executed (started), while effect button operations are forcibly terminated (however, as a variant, even if suppression notification effects are started during execution of effect button operations, effect button operations may continue and end at the original end timing). Also, while advance notification effects are being executed, predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 (operation at the start of fluctuation, operation at temporary stop, operation at the establishment of a reach, and swinging operation) can be executed (started), but the predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are not executed (started) while suppression notification effects are being executed. Note that advance notification effects can be executed (started), while predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are being executed, and can be executed in parallel; however, while predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are being executed, suppression notification effects can be executed (started), while predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are being executed, while predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are being executed,

The aforementioned effect button operation will now be described in detail. In this embodiment, the effect button is configured so that its internal mechanism can vibrate or rotate a movable object inside the effect button. In this way, the effect button is configured so that not only can the player's operation affect the effect content displayed on the effect display device 70, but also the operation of the effect button itself can suggest or notify the player of the likelihood of a jackpot. Such effect button operation is referred to as effect button operation. This effect button operation can be performed during variable display or jackpot play. During variable display, it is performed to suggest or notify a player that a jackpot expectation is very high (for example, it may be performed in conjunction with the execution of a specific preview effect executed by the effect display device 70, or it may be performed suddenly regardless of the execution of such a specific preview effect). During jackpot play, it is performed in conjunction with the execution of the aforementioned consecutive wins within the reserved mode or promotion effect (for example, during special play, an effect that appears to be a 5R jackpot in the early stages and then notifies the player that it is a 10R jackpot in the middle stages). More specifically, during the variable display, the effect button operation is executed in the middle of the variable display (before the mid-way point, i.e., before the reach is reached), and is simultaneously executed when the next preview effect, which is a specific preview effect that displays the character string "next preview" (a preview effect with a high probability of a jackpot that suggests or notifies of future performance developments), is executed, and when the hit/lose branching device effect (which can be executed at a later timing than the movable device effect described above) that notifies of a jackpot win is executed in the middle of the variable display (after the reach is reached, i.e., at the end), which is executed (the effect button operation associated with the preview effect). Note that, during one variation (jackpot variation), both the next preview effect and the hit/lose branching device effect that notifies of a jackpot win are executed, but the execution time of the effect button operation is longer when the hit/lose branching device effect that notifies of a jackpot win is executed (for example, 8 seconds for the former and 15 seconds for the latter). Here, if the effect button action is an intermittent effect button action (an action in which an intermittent pattern in which the effect button action is stopped and then resumed is repeated one or more times), the total execution time of the intermittent effect button action is the execution time of the effect button action. Note that, although predetermined preview effects other than specific preview effects (for example, dialogue effects, etc.) are configured so that they are not associated with and executed by effect button actions, their execution timing may overlap with the effect button action at the start of the variation as a pre-read, which will be described later, and they may happen to be executed simultaneously. Also, as a pre-read preview effect, a pre-read preview effect is performed immediately after the start of the variation display related to the activated reserved ball that is consumed before the target of the pre-read preview effect (for example, an activated reserved ball related to a high expectation variation such as the above-mentioned next preview effect or a win/lose branching role effect that notifies of a jackpot win). When this effect button operation as a pre-reading notice (pre-reading effect button operation at the start of a variation) is executed, even at the start of the variation display related to the activated reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect that arrived via the pre-reading notice effect, the effect button operation is not a pre-reading notice, but is executed as a notice effect that suggests or notifies the expected probability of a jackpot for that variation (pre-reading effect button operation at the start of a variation). Note that the pre-reading effect button operation at the start of a variation and the pre-reading effect button operation at the start of a variation are configured to have a shorter execution time (for example, 1 second) than the effect button operation associated with the above-mentioned notice effect. Note that the effect button operation is completed during one variation display and does not continue to be executed across two or more variation displays (for example, it is not configured so that the vibration of the effect button continues from the end of a certain variation display to the beginning of the next variation display after that certain variation display). Furthermore, during jackpot play, it is executed in association with the execution of promotion effects or consecutive win effects within the reserved slot, and is executed in association with the execution of the aforementioned jackpot role effects (effect button operation during jackpot). Note that effect button operation during jackpot play is configured to be executable across multiple rounds of play (for example, the effect button is configured to continue vibrating from the end of a certain round of play to the beginning of the next round of play following that certain round of play).

Here, effect button actions can be broadly divided into those that are executed based on the player's operation of the effect button and those that are not executed based on the player's operation of the effect button. In other words, they can be broadly divided into those that are executed immediately when the player operates the effect button and those that do not require the player to operate the effect button at all. The effect button actions during a jackpot described above and those associated with the win/lose branching device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win are executed immediately when the player operates the effect button (in other words, the player operates the effect button to execute a promotion effect, a consecutive win effect in a reserved jackpot, or a win/lose branching device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win). The effect button actions associated with the above-mentioned start-of-variation effect button action as a pre-read, the start-of-variation effect button action via pre-read, and the next preview effect are executed without the player having to operate the effect button (in other words, the start-of-variation effect button action, the start-of-variation effect button action via pre-read, and the next preview effect are executed without the player having to operate the effect button). As a variant, even if a jackpot variable display is being displayed, if the player operates a function button, the win/lose branching device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win may not be executed, and the corresponding function button operation may not be executed (indicating a loss in the win/lose branching scene). In such a case, the same variable display may be configured to display the word "Revival!" at a timing later than the timing at which a loss is suggested in the win/lose branching scene, to suggest or notify the player of a jackpot. In such a configuration, the function button operation is executed even during the effect in which the word "Revival!" is displayed (also called the resurrection effect or reversal effect), and this function button operation is configured to be executed without the player having to operate the function button in the first place.

Furthermore, when an effect button operation is performed, the frame lamp 10 and the aforementioned board lamp 25 are configured to emit light in a specific manner. The light emission mode (light color) is configured to differ depending on the effect situation when the effect button operation is performed. Specifically, when a promotion effect, a consecutive win in a reserved lottery effect, a win/lose branching role effect that notifies a jackpot win, or a revival effect is performed, the light is emitted in rainbow colors, and when a variation start effect button operation, a variation start effect button operation via a pre-reading, or a next preview effect is performed, the light is emitted in blue. However, in any case, if an error state occurs during rainbow or blue light emission due to effect button operation, the light is always configured to switch to red light (a light emission mode different from the red light emission during the suppression notification effect; for example, it is desirable for the flashing cycle to be different or for the brightness to be higher than the red light emission during the suppression notification effect).

Furthermore, if a selection operation to transition to RAM clear mode or game mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, a button action is executed after powering on as a confirmation of operation, rather than as a presentation. In this case, the button action is executed in a relatively short time (e.g., 5 seconds) (shorter than the button action associated with the win/lose branching device presentation that notifies the player of a win), and the frame lamp 10 and the aforementioned board lamp 25 also emit red light. If a variable display begins during the button action, a button image prompting the player to press a button may be displayed. However, even during this button action, button operation can change the presentation display on the presentation display device 70 (e.g., pressing a button can erase the button image and display a dialogue presentation). Furthermore, if a selection operation to transition to the setting change state (also referred to as setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (also referred to as setting confirmation mode) is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the button action as a confirmation of operation is not executed after powering on. This makes it possible to omit the button action as a confirmation of operation. As a variant, it may be possible to execute a button action as an operation confirmation by exiting the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

<9. Text effects (title effects)>
In the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment, the effect control board 200 can execute a title effect that displays a title on a predetermined display device (for example, the effect display device 70) as a type of text effect different from the dialogue effect and caption effect described above. The title effect can display various titles in text (including character strings) depending on the execution timing and type of the title effect. Specific examples of "titles" include the names of reach effects and preview effects, the names of jackpots, the names of rounds during jackpots, the names of various advantageous games (time-saving mode, easy-to-score mode, small-win rush, etc.), and the names of songs that play during jackpots, etc. Specifically, for the names of reach effects or preview effects, the words would be "moment of decision" or "final battle", "appearance of character I" or "descendance of character H", "next preview!" or "second pseudo-consecutive!"; for the name of a jackpot, the words would be "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS", for the name of a round during a jackpot, the words would be "Round 1" or "1st round", for the names of various advantageous games (time-saving state, easy-to-score state, small hit rush, etc.), the words would be "chance time" or "rush mode", and for the name of a song that plays during a jackpot, the words would be the name of the song.

Text effects, including title effects, may be configured to suggest a predetermined type of expectation level for the game by using the "text effect corresponding color," which is the color of the text itself displayed by the effect or the color of the area around the text. In other words, the "text effect corresponding color" that can suggest expectation levels is not limited to the color of the text itself, but may also be the color of the background or surrounding area of the text (such as the background color of the title for title effects, the background color of the text for caption effects, or the color of the speech bubble itself or the color of the speech bubble border for dialogue effects). Multiple types of text effect corresponding colors may be prepared, and the expected level suggested by each color may differ. Furthermore, text effects may also suggest expectation levels based on which of multiple types of text strings are displayed.

A typical example of the degree of expectation that can be suggested by the text effect's corresponding color is the degree of expectation of transitioning to special play (special play transition expectation), but it may also suggest the degree of expectation for a favorable game situation to develop, such as an increase in the number of rounds during special play (during a jackpot), promotion to a probability hit, or entering a state where it is easy to score after the jackpot ends. Also, for example, it may suggest the degree of expectation for the effect to develop while the special pattern is changing (the degree of expectation for a preview effect to develop into a reach effect, or the degree of expectation for an SP reach effect to develop after a reach state is established).

<9-1. Variable character effects and jackpot character effects>
When the character effects including the title effect are classified by the game period based on the variation of the special symbol, the character effects include a character effect during variation in which characters (e.g., a title) are displayed on the display device while the special symbol is varying, and a character effect during a jackpot in which characters (e.g., a title) are displayed on the display device during a special game such as a jackpot. Note that the variation of the special symbol may be interpreted as the variation of the decorative symbol (main decorative symbol 710, sub decorative symbol 720).

The variable character effect displays text in the image display area 700 of the effect display device 70 at a predetermined timing while the special symbol is varying. The variable character effect can be executed before or after the decorative symbol is in a reach state, as long as it is during the display of the decorative symbol's variable effect that is executed in conjunction with the special symbol's variation. Specifically, for example, variable character effects executed before the decorative symbol is in a reach state include effects that display the name of the effect when a preview effect is executed (e.g., "Next Preview!" for a next preview effect) or effects that display the name of a specific stage during the gradual development of a pseudo-consecutive effect (e.g., "Second Time!" for a second pseudo-consecutive effect). Furthermore, variable character effects executed after the decorative symbol is in a reach state include effects that display the name of the development effect that develops after the reach state is established or the names of characters in the development effect (e.g., "The Moment of Decision" or "The Final Battle," or "Character I Appears" or "Character H Descends"). Furthermore, the variable character effect after the reach state is established may be limited to a specific development effect (hereinafter also referred to as an SP reach effect) with a relatively high expectation level among the multiple types of development effects, or may be limited to a specific SP reach effect among the SP reach effects (for example, it may be configured so that it is not executed in an SP reach effect with a relatively low expectation level among the multiple types of SP reach effects).

A predetermined variable character effect has multiple character effect colors, which are the color of the characters themselves or the color of the area around the characters displayed in the effect. Depending on which of the multiple character effect colors is used to display the characters in the predetermined variable character effect, a predetermined type of expectation level (e.g., the expectation level of transition to a special game) can be indicated. Examples of the multiple character effect colors that indicate expectation levels, in order of decreasing expectation level, include white < green < red < gold < giraffe pattern (manufacturer pattern) < rainbow. In the following explanation, when specific examples of character effect colors that indicate expectation levels are given, the relationship between the expected levels indicated by each color will basically follow the example above. In other words, "white" is a color with extremely low expectation levels, and "green" is a color with a higher expectation level than "white," which has the lowest expected level, but is overall a color with low expectation levels. On the other hand, a "rainbow" is a color with an extremely high expectation (desirably, when displayed in normal game mode and in the easy-to-score state, it indicates a guaranteed jackpot), and a "giraffe pattern" is a color with a lower expectation than the highest-reliability "rainbow" but a high expectation overall (desirably, when displayed in normal game mode, it indicates a guaranteed jackpot, but when displayed in the easy-to-score state, it indicates a guaranteed jackpot). While "rainbow" and "giraffe patterns" are technically color patterns formed by combining multiple colors, they are generally recognized as a type of "color" in the presentation of gaming machines, and therefore are treated as examples of colors in this explanation. Furthermore, "gold" may be a color with a high expectation similar to that of a "giraffe pattern," and may be used as a substitute when it is difficult to display using a "giraffe pattern." Furthermore, "red" may be an example of a color with a high expectation because it has a higher expectation than the low-expectation "green," but may be treated as an example of a color with a medium expectation because it has a lower expectation than the high-expectation "giraffe pattern." Furthermore, as for multiple types of text colors, for example, in terms of order of expectation, the text color "blue" may be prepared between "white" and "green," or "purple" may be prepared between "green" and "red."

The color of the characters displayed in the variable character effects (character effect corresponding colors) can be a specific color composed of multiple colors. The "giraffe pattern" manufacturer pattern mentioned above is a color pattern that imitates the pattern on a giraffe's skin, and is composed of multiple colors, including at least black, white, and yellow, so it falls under this specific color. A "rainbow" also falls under this specific color composed of multiple colors. Note that the specific colors that can be used in the variable character effects may also be used in other preview effects (for example, title preview effects that preview the title, or stage change previews that preview a change in the performance stage). However, the fineness of the colors that make up the specific color differs when the specific color is used in the variable character effects and when it is used in the other preview effects mentioned above; for example, the specific color is displayed in finer colors when used in the variable character effects.

The character effects can be executed simultaneously with or in combination with other specified effects displayed on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700). An example of an effect that can be executed in combination with a changing character effect is a special effect that can transform the effect image displayed on the effect display device 70 into a special form. The "special form" in this special effect can be, for example, enlarging, reducing, tilting, oscillating, upside down, left to right, rotating, color conversion, color inversion, or partial cracking of the effect image, and many different types of special forms can be combined. More specifically, a "special effect" is a change in the display mode from a normal mode (a mode that is not enlarged, reduced, tilted, not oscillating, not upside down, not flipped left to right, not rotating, not color-converted, not color-inverted, or a mode in which partial cracks do not occur) to a special mode (a mode that is enlarged, reduced, tilted, oscillating, upside down, flipped left to right, rotating, color-converted, color-inverted, or a mode in which partial cracks do occur) when one or more of the main decorative pattern 710 that is being displayed or temporarily stopped, a background image corresponding to the stage currently being displayed, or a specific preview effect (for example, a dialogue effect) is being displayed during the changing display. That is, in this embodiment, the variable character effect can be the target of a special effect (not limited to the dialogue effect described above, but also including subtitle effects and title effects). In this case, the effect control board 200 can transform the characters (including the effect image) displayed by the variable character effect into a special form and display it on the effect display device 70. Note that the sub-decorative pattern 720 is not the target of a special effect and does not change to a special form. On the other hand, the jackpot character effect is not the target of a special effect. In other words, a special effect is not executed during special play. As a variant, even if a special effect is executed during special play, the characters displayed by the jackpot character effect may be configured not to be transformed into a special form.

By making the variable character effect the target of special effects, not only can players be drawn to the character type and color of the characters displayed while the special symbol is changing, but players can also be drawn to whether or not the characters are image-transformed into a special manner, further heightening the player's sense of anticipation. On the other hand, by not making the jackpot character effect the target of special effects, the characters displayed by the jackpot character effect during special play are not image-transformed into a special manner, which prevents the player's feelings of celebration over the jackpot from being disturbed, and moreover, prevents the image transformation from unnecessarily raising the player's sense of anticipation.

The jackpot text effect is an effect in which the effect control board 200 displays text in the image display area 700 of the effect display device 70 at a predetermined timing during a special game (e.g., a jackpot game, but it can also be a small jackpot game). The jackpot text effect includes title effects such as displaying the name of the jackpot (jackpot title) immediately after the start of a jackpot game or the name of an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to score balls, such as a time-saving game) to which the jackpot game will transition before its end. Specific examples of jackpot titles include "Jackpot," "BONUS," "SUPER BONUS," "Challenge Bonus," and "1500-shot jackpot." The number (1500) in these examples indicates the number of play values expected to be acquired at the start of the jackpot. The jackpot text effect may also include dialogue effects that display dialogue corresponding to the story unfolding during the jackpot game, or caption effects that display the lyrics or story of the music played during the jackpot game.

The character effect color of the characters displayed during the jackpot character effect may be a single color or a predetermined color from among several options. However, it is preferable that the character effect color available during the jackpot character effect be a color (e.g., "white" indicating the lowest expectation, "red" indicating a medium or high expectation, or "rainbow" indicating the highest expectation) that is different from either the first color indicating a predetermined expectation level during a predetermined variable character effect (e.g., "green" indicating a low expectation level other than the minimum expectation level) or the second color indicating a predetermined expectation level higher than the expectation level indicated by the first color during a predetermined variable character effect (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level) during the predetermined variable character effect. It is particularly preferable to use such a character effect color for title effects, which are the names of songs played during jackpots, and for caption effects that display captions containing the lyrics or story of songs played during jackpot play.

As mentioned above, by not displaying text in colors that suggest an incomplete expectation, such as "green" or "giraffe pattern," during the jackpot mid-game text effect, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from being unnecessarily raised. For example, if the jackpot mid-game text effect is executed in "white," which suggests the lowest expectation, it will not unnecessarily raise the player's expectations, and if the jackpot mid-game text effect is executed in "rainbow," which suggests the highest expectation, it can be expected to have the effect of heightening the player's sense of celebration for the jackpot. Furthermore, these color restrictions on the jackpot mid-game text effect may also be applied to the "prize ball count-up effect" and "emphasis effect" described below.

The text effects can be executed simultaneously with or in combination with other specified effects displayed on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700). Examples of effects that can be executed simultaneously with text effects during a jackpot include the aforementioned "prize ball count-up effect" and "emphasis effect." The prize ball count-up effect is an effect that counts up and displays (counts up display) the cumulative number of prize balls in a specified advantageous play area (see, for example, "94,500 pt" shown in Figure 74). As mentioned above, the count-up display may use individual special games (jackpot games) as the advantageous play area to be counted up, or a series of play areas consisting of one or more special games and advantageous states after the special games (probability fluctuation state, fluctuation time reduction state, electric chute support state, small win rush, etc.) as the advantageous play area to be counted up. The specific method of counting up the display may be to display the cumulative prize balls counted up in units of a predetermined number of 1 or more, such as "00000" → "00001" → ... → "00015" or "00000" → "00015" → "00030", or to clearly indicate the cumulative prize balls counted up in units of a predetermined number of 1 or more (15 in this case), such as "00000" → "000#$" → "000"&" → "00015", and to display ambiguous numbers (equivalent to #, $, ", & in the above example) between the clearly indicated cumulative prize ball numbers. As mentioned above, when the cumulative number of prize balls during a special game (or during consecutive special games with an easy-to-score state in between, i.e., a consecutive win state) reaches a specific value (for example, a multiple of 2500), the specific value is highlighted and displayed. The highlighting effect is preferably an additional display of the cumulative number of prize balls equivalent to a specific value (for example, a multiple of 2500) while the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by the count-up display. The jackpot character effect can be executed simultaneously with this kind of prize ball count-up effect (display of the cumulative number of prize balls) and the highlighting effect. However, when the jackpot character effect is displayed, The characters displayed are configured so as not to be superimposed on at least the prize ball count-up effect (accumulated prize ball count display). For example, title effects, which are the names of songs played during a jackpot, and telop effects, which display telops of the lyrics and story of songs played during a jackpot game, are not displayed superimposed on the prize ball count-up effect (accumulated prize ball count display). In addition, it is preferable that the characters displayed in the jackpot character effect are configured so as to be superimposed on the highlight effect (for example, title effects, which are the names of songs played during a jackpot, and The caption effect, which displays captions of the lyrics or story of the song played during a jackpot game, may be configured to be displayed superimposed on the highlight effect), but it may also be configured not to be displayed superimposed (for example, the title effect, which is the name of the song played during a jackpot, or the caption effect, which displays captions of the lyrics or story of the song played during a jackpot game, may be configured not to be displayed superimposed on the highlight effect). On the other hand, the variable text effect is not executed simultaneously with the prize ball count-up effect (display of the cumulative number of prize balls) or the highlight effect.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of executing an error character effect, separate from the variable character effect and the jackpot character effect. The error character effect displays text related to the error on the effect display device 70 when an error occurs. Specifically, as an example, when a No. 11 door/frame open error occurs, the text "Door/frame is open" is displayed; when a No. 1 magnet sensor error (magnetic detection error) occurs, the text "Magnetic field detected" is displayed; when a No. 10 setting change/setting confirmation state occurs, the text "Settings being changed" or "Settings being confirmed" is displayed; and when a No. 2 radio wave sensor error (radio wave detection error) occurs, the text "Unauthorized radio waves detected" is displayed. The error character effect may have multiple colors corresponding to the character effect, which are the color of the characters themselves or the color of the area around the characters displayed in the effect. However, it is preferable that the color corresponding to the character effect that can be used in the error character effect be a color (for example, either "white" indicating the lowest expectation level or "red" indicating a medium or high expectation level, or a color other than "black" or "yellow") that is different from either the first color that indicates a predetermined expectation level in the variable character effect (for example, "green" indicating a low expectation level other than the lowest expectation level) or the second color that indicates a predetermined expectation level higher than the expectation level indicated by the first color in the variable character effect (for example, "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the highest expectation level or "rainbow" indicating the highest expectation level) (for example, either "white" indicating the lowest expectation level or "red" indicating a medium or high expectation level, or other colors such as "black" or "yellow").

Furthermore, by not targeting the error text effects with the special effects mentioned above, the characters displayed in the error text effects are prevented from being distorted and interfering with the error notification, and furthermore, the image deformation of the characters is prevented from meaninglessly building up the player's expectations.

As shown in Figure 73, an example of error output settings, pachinko machine 1 has multiple types of errors. Errors No. 1 to No. 4 shown in Figure 73 (magnet sensor error, radio wave sensor error, vibration sensor error, abnormal operation error) are errors that may occur due to cheating by a player or the like, and are relatively more important in terms of illegal play. Errors No. 5 to No. 8 (abnormal winning error, abnormal passing error, ejection error, connection abnormality error) are errors that may occur due to cheating by a player or the like, and are relatively less important in terms of illegal play. Errors No. 9 to No. 11 (power-on warning, setting change/setting confirmation, door/frame open error) are errors (warnings) that may be caused by both cheating and other reasons. Errors No. 12 to No. Errors 15 (communication error, tray full error, game ball payout error, game ball lending device unconnected error) are errors that can occur due to reasons other than player fraud.

The various errors described above can be classified into multiple types based on the importance of the fraud or the importance of the error notification (hereinafter, for example, referred to as first errors and second errors). These classifications may be set when the gaming machine is manufactured, or may be set appropriately during operation of the gaming machine. For example, errors such as No. 11 door/frame open error and No. 1 magnet sensor error (magnetic detection error) could be classified as first errors, and errors such as No. 10 setting change/setting confirmation could be classified as second errors. As a variant, errors such as No. 11 door/frame open error and No. 13 tray full error could be classified as first errors, and No. 1 magnet sensor error (magnetic detection error) and No. 2 radio wave sensor error (radio wave detection error) could be classified as second errors. For example, the low-importance error types described in the description of FIG. 73 could be classified as first errors, and the high-importance error types could be classified as second errors (or vice versa).

The error character effects include a first error character effect that displays characters related to the first error on the effect display device 70 when a first error occurs, and a second error character effect that displays characters related to the second error on the effect display device 70 when a second error occurs. The first error character effect can display characters while suppressing other effects that were running when the first error occurred. Specifically, for example, if the first error character effect is started while a variable character effect or a jackpot character effect is running, the variable character effect and the jackpot character effect will not be hidden. However, because the first error character effect is displayed in the foreground (has higher display priority), at least a portion of the display of the variable character effect and the jackpot character effect will be hidden (or will be difficult to see). Therefore, while the variable character effect, the jackpot character effect, and the first error character effect are executed simultaneously, the variable character effect and the jackpot character effect can be said to be suppressed display. On the other hand, the second error character effect displays characters so as not to conflict with other effects that were running when the second error occurred. Specifically, for example, if the second error character effect is started while the variable character effect or jackpot character effect is being executed, the variable character effect and jackpot character effect will be hidden and then the second error character effect will be displayed. As a result, the variable character effect and jackpot character effect and the second error character effect will not be executed simultaneously, and it can be said that the variable character effect and jackpot character effect are not displayed in conflict.

Unlike the characters in the variable character effect, the characters in the first error character effect can be displayed simultaneously with the prize ball count-up effect (display of cumulative prize ball count) and the highlight effect. Furthermore, the characters in the first error character effect may be configured to be displayed superimposed on at least one of the prize ball count-up effect or the highlight effect. However, the display priority for the superimposed display is set higher for the first error character effect (displayed in the foreground). Specifically, for example, if the first error character effect is started while the prize ball count-up effect (display of cumulative prize ball count) or the highlight effect is being executed, the prize ball count-up effect (display of cumulative prize ball count) and the highlight effect are not hidden, but the first error character effect is displayed in the foreground (has a higher display priority). On the other hand, the second error character effect is not executed simultaneously with the prize ball count-up effect and the highlight effect, and the prize ball count-up effect and the highlight effect are not executed while the characters in the second error character effect are being displayed. Specifically, for example, if the second error message effect is started while the prize ball count-up effect (display of cumulative prize ball count) or highlight effect is being executed, the prize ball count-up effect (display of cumulative prize ball count) or highlight effect will be hidden, and the second error message effect will be displayed in that situation.

Also, as mentioned above, the first error character effect can be executed simultaneously with both the variable character effect and the jackpot character effect, but the second error character effect is not executed simultaneously with either the variable character effect or the jackpot character effect, and only the second error character effect is executed while the second error is occurring.

As described above, by differentiating the display format (simultaneous display or superimposed display) between the first error text effect and the second error text effect and other display effects, it is possible to realize error notification according to the severity of the error that has occurred.

The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with operation means (such as effect buttons and a cross key) that can accept operations by the player, and player operation of these operation means can trigger the execution of a specified effect.

With regard to character effects, for example, operation of the effect button (first operating means) may be configured to trigger the execution of a variable character effect, but not to trigger the execution of other character effects (such as a jackpot character effect, an error character effect, the suppression-related character effect and the advance character effect described below). In other words, when a variable character effect is started, an effect requiring the operation of the effect button may be executed, but when a character effect other than a variable character effect is started, an effect requiring the operation of the effect button will not be executed. For example, if the effect button is operated while the PUSH button image is displayed and within the effect button's valid operation period, that operation may trigger a dialogue effect (see FIG. 63). However, even if the effect button is operated while the PUSH button image is displayed and within the effect button's valid operation period, that operation does not trigger a caption effect such as displaying the title of the song that plays during a jackpot or displaying captions containing the lyrics or story of the song that plays during a jackpot game. Furthermore, even if the effect button is operated while the PUSH button image is displayed and within the effect button's valid operation period, that operation does not trigger the first error character effect or the second error character effect (the same applies to suppression-related character effects and pre-operation character effects). Furthermore, if an effect that requires the effect button to be operated to trigger the execution of a variable character effect is executed, the variable character effect may be executed even if the effect button is not operated within the valid operation period.

Furthermore, for example, operation of the cross key (second operating means) may be configured to trigger the execution of a jackpot character effect, but not to trigger the execution of other character effects (variable character effects, error character effects, suppression-related character effects, advance character effects, etc.). In other words, when a jackpot character effect starts, an effect requiring operation of the cross key may be executed, but when a character effect other than a jackpot character effect starts, an effect requiring operation of the cross key is not executed. For example, when the directional pad is operated within the valid operation period of the directional pad, that operation may trigger a caption effect that displays the name of a song that plays during a jackpot or the lyrics or story of a song that plays during a jackpot game (specifically, operating the directional pad during a special game may display a specific song name or the lyrics of a song corresponding to that specific song name). However, even if the directional pad is operated within the valid operation period of the directional pad, that operation does not trigger a title effect such as a dialogue effect or a variable character effect (a reach character effect, as described below). Furthermore, even if the directional pad is operated within the valid operation period of the directional pad, that operation does not trigger a first error character effect or a second error character effect (the same applies to suppression-related character effects and pre-operation character effects). Note that if an effect requiring operation of the directional pad is executed to trigger a jackpot character effect, the jackpot character effect may be executed even if the directional pad is not operated within the valid operation period.

<9-2. Text effects during and after a reach>
When character effects, including title effects, are classified by the game period based on the establishment of a reach state due to a decorative pattern, the character effects include reach-in character effects that can be executed in a development effect that develops after a reach state due to a decorative pattern is established, and reach-in character effects that can be executed when a predetermined condition is met in a development effect and can be executed after the reach-in character effect has ended. More specifically, reach-in character effects are character effects that display characters (e.g., an SP title, which is the name of the SP reach effect) on the effect display device 70 in a development effect (e.g., an SP reach effect) that develops after a reach state due to a decorative pattern (main decorative pattern 710) is established. For example, the characters "The Final Battle" shown on the display screen illustrated in FIG. 70(D) correspond to the SP title of the SP reach effect. The post-reach character effect is a character effect that displays characters (e.g., the title of the jackpot or the name of the jackpot round) on the effect display device 70 when a predetermined condition is met in a predetermined development effect (e.g., when a jackpot result is announced) and after the reach character effect has ended. For example, the character "Round 1" shown on the display screen illustrated in FIG. 76 corresponds to the name of the jackpot round. Furthermore, the characters "BONUS" and "SUPER BONUS" described above correspond to the jackpot title, with "BONUS" corresponding to a 5R jackpot and "SUPER BONUS" corresponding to a 10R jackpot. Both are executed as jackpot start demo effects (executed during the jackpot start demo period in which the jackpot start demo effect is executed). The jackpot title may be executed during the jackpot fluctuation and during a specific period after the end of the SP reach. When comparing the executable game period, the character effects during reach correspond to the character effects during change, and the character effects after reach correspond to the character effects during change or the character effects during a big win.

A predetermined mid-reach character effect has multiple character effect colors, which are the color of the characters themselves or the color of the surrounding area of the characters displayed in the predetermined mid-reach effect. Depending on which of the multiple character effect colors is used to display the characters (e.g., the SP title) in the predetermined mid-reach effect, a predetermined type of expectation level (which may be the expectation level for transitioning to a special game, or the expectation level for progression to a higher expectation level, etc.) can be indicated. The character effect colors that can be used to indicate the expectation level in a mid-reach character effect, like the character effect colors in variable character effects, may be white < green < red < gold < giraffe pattern (manufacturer pattern) < rainbow, in order of decreasing expectation level, but may also be limited to some of these multiple colors (e.g., white, red, gold, rainbow). For example, the aforementioned SP title "The Final Battle" is the title of SP Reach performance B in which a battle between characters unfolds, and is accompanied by a number of stars (four) indicating the likelihood of a jackpot for that SP Reach. In addition, for example, the SP title of SP Reach performance A in which a search for a friend unfolds, "Where are my friends going?", is accompanied by a number of stars (three) indicating the likelihood of a jackpot for that SP Reach. SP Reach performance B is configured so that the likelihood of transitioning to a special game is relatively higher than that of SP Reach performance A, and when the colors corresponding to the character effects of the SP title of SP Reach performance A are white, red, gold, or rainbow, the likelihood of transitioning to a special game is 5%, 20%, 70%, and 100%, respectively. Furthermore, when the color corresponding to the text effect of the SP title in SP Reach effect B is white, red, gold, or rainbow, the expected probability of transition to special game is 50%, 60%, 90%, and 100%, respectively. The expected probability of transition to special game is the expectation (expected value) that the variation in which that effect is executed will result in a jackpot variation. For example, a 5% expected probability of transition to special game means that when that effect appears, a jackpot will occur on average once in 20 times. If other advance effects that confirm a jackpot appear, there is a 100% chance of a jackpot. However, if neither other effects that confirm a jackpot nor other effects with high expectations appear, the expected probability of transition to special game may be 1%. The terms jackpot expectation and special game transition expectation are synonymous, and both refer to the expectation of a jackpot (the execution of a special game).

Multiple types of reach character effects may be prepared in terms of the content of the displayed string, the display mode, the display timing, etc. Furthermore, when multiple types of development effects (SP reach effects) that develop after the reach state of the decorative pattern is established are prepared (for example, a first development effect that is SP reach effect A and a second development effect that is SP reach effect B), the reach character effects that can be executed in the development effect may be configured to differ depending on the type of development effect being executed. Note that the correspondence between development effects and reach character effects does not have to be limited to one-to-one; when one development effect is executed, one of two or more reach character effects corresponding to that development effect may be selected and executed. In this way, by varying the types of reach character effects that can be executed depending on the development effect, it is possible to execute reach character effects that are appropriate for the content and expectation level of the development effect, and by linking the development effects and reach character effects, a unified effect can be achieved.

The combination of development effects and reach character effects is described in detail below. In the following explanation, the "first development effect" and "second development effect" are different types of development effects, and for example, correspond to the aforementioned "SP reach effect A" and "SP reach effect B," respectively. Furthermore, the "first color" is a color corresponding to the character effect that suggests a predetermined low expectation level in the reach character effect, and the "second color" is a color corresponding to the character effect that suggests a predetermined high expectation level higher than the first color in the reach character effect, and for example, correspond to the aforementioned "white" and "gold," respectively.

(1) The likelihood of transitioning to a special game is relatively higher when a reach-in character effect using a color corresponding to the first color is executed in the second development effect than when a predetermined reach-in character effect using a color corresponding to the first color is executed in the first development effect. Specifically, for example, if "SP reach-in character effect A" is the first development effect, "SP reach-in character effect B" different from SP reach-in character effect A is the second development effect, and "white" is the first color, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when a reach-in character effect is executed during the execution of SP reach-in character effect B and the title of SP reach-in character effect B (SP title B, "The Final Battle") is displayed in white than when a reach-in character effect is executed during the execution of SP reach-in character effect A and the title of SP reach-in character effect A (SP title A, "Where are the Friends Going?") is displayed in white (as mentioned above, the former has a jackpot expectation of 5%, and the latter has a jackpot expectation of 50%).

(2) The probability of transition to a special game is relatively higher when a predetermined reach character effect is executed in a color corresponding to the second character effect in the second development effect than when a predetermined reach character effect is executed in a color corresponding to the second character effect in the first development effect. Specifically, for example, if the second color is "gold," which has a higher probability of transition to a special game than the first color "white," the probability of a jackpot is higher when a reach character effect is executed during the execution of SP reach character effect B and the SP title B is displayed in gold than when a reach character effect is executed during the execution of SP reach character effect A and the SP title A is displayed in gold (as mentioned above, the probability of a jackpot is 70% in the former and 90% in the latter).

(3) The difference between the expected degree of transition to special game suggested by a predetermined character display during a reach using a color corresponding to the character display of the second color in the first development effect and the expected degree of transition to special game suggested by a predetermined character display during a reach using a color corresponding to the character display of the first color in the first development effect is greater than the difference between the expected degree of transition to special game suggested by a predetermined character display during a reach using a color corresponding to the character display of the second color in the second development effect and the expected degree of transition to special game suggested by a predetermined character display during a reach using a color corresponding to the character display of the first color in the second development effect. Specifically, for example, the difference in the likelihood of a jackpot depending on whether SP title A is displayed in gold or white when a reach-in character effect is executed during the execution of SP reach effect A (as mentioned above, when displayed in gold the likelihood of a jackpot is 70%, when displayed in white the likelihood of a jackpot is 5%, the difference is 65%) is greater than the difference in the likelihood of a jackpot depending on whether SP title B is displayed in gold or white when a reach-in character effect is executed during the execution of SP reach effect B (as mentioned above, when displayed in gold the likelihood of a jackpot is 90%, when displayed in white the likelihood of a jackpot is 50%, the difference is 40%).

The above conditions (1) through (3) may be combined. For example, by combining (1) through (3), even in the case of a first development effect in which the expected value varies greatly depending on the corresponding color of the character effect due to (1) and (2), if the corresponding color of the character effect in the reach character effect reaches a certain level (the second color), the expected value difference is significantly reduced by (3), suggesting a jackpot expected value similar to that when a reach character effect using the second corresponding color of the character effect is executed in the second development effect. In this case, even if a first development effect is executed in which the expected value of a jackpot is relatively lower than that of the second development effect, the expected value of a jackpot can increase to a level comparable to that of the second development effect depending on the reach character effect. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest immediately after the start of the first development effect and maintains the player's interest throughout the period in which the reach character is displayed repeatedly (the second part of the development effect, described below).

The development effect has three effect parts capable of executing a predetermined mid-reach character effect: a first part before the predetermined mid-reach character effect is executed; a second part during which the predetermined mid-reach character effect is executed; and a third part after the predetermined mid-reach character effect is executed. Here, the execution periods of the first, second, and third parts are different, and the execution period of the third part is set to be longer than the execution period of the first part. Specifically, in the case of SP reach effect A, the first part is an introductory part before the SP title begins to be displayed, and is a 10-second effect part during which the player is wondering where their allies are; the second part is a 3-second effect part during which the SP title is displayed; and the third part is the main part after the SP title has finished being displayed, and is composed of a 50-second effect part (in the case of a jackpot variation) during which the player searches for their allies and eventually finds them, or a 30-second effect part (in the case of a miss variation, and 20 seconds longer in the case of a jackpot variation due to the epilogue effect after meeting their allies) during which the player searches for their allies and eventually finds them. Similarly, in the case of SP reach effect B, the first part is an introductory part before the SP title starts to be displayed, and is a 20-second effect part in which characters face each other and an effect that looks like a battle is about to begin is executed, the second part is a 4-second effect part in which the SP title is displayed, and the third part is the main part after the SP title has finished being displayed, and is composed of a 60-second effect part (in the case of a jackpot variation) in which characters clash with each other and an effect in which character B ultimately wins, or a 35-second effect part (in the case of a miss variation, and in the case of a jackpot variation, it is 25 seconds longer because there is an epilogue effect after the victory) in which characters clash with each other and an effect in which character B ultimately loses. Furthermore, in the third part, a specific character effect that is a variable character effect separate from the predetermined reach character effect can be executed, while in the second part, the specific character effect may not be executed. The above-mentioned specific character effects are, for example, "telop effects" that display character strings on the effect display device 70 and can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to a special game or the degree of expectation for the development of the effect by the content of the character string and the color of the character string. More specifically, a telop effect like that shown in FIG. 70(E) is executed, and this is not limited to SP reach effect B, but is similar for SP reach effect A. However, because the effect content (story) differs between SP reach effect A and SP reach effect B, the content of the telop (character strings corresponding to utterances) differs, and further, the number of telops (number of character strings corresponding to utterances) also differs. However, the types of character effect-corresponding colors that can be used in the telop are the same for SP reach effect A and SP reach effect B. With this configuration, in the development effect (SP reach effect), a specified reach character effect can be executed from the first part to the second part, and by not executing a caption effect that overlaps with the reach character effect during this time, the player can focus their attention on the content of the reach character effect (for example, the color corresponding to the character effect displaying the SP title). Then, in the third part after the reach character effect has finished executing, a "specific character effect" such as a caption effect can be executed, which can pique the player's interest after the reach character effect has been achieved, and this is expected to have the effect of maintaining the player's interest throughout the development effect.

As mentioned above, post-reach character effects can be performed when certain conditions are met in the development effects, and can be performed after the reach character effects have ended.

The execution period of a predetermined post-reach character effect may be longer than the execution period of a predetermined mid-reach character effect. Furthermore, the display area of a predetermined post-reach character effect may be larger than the display area of a predetermined mid-reach character effect. The display area for each character effect may be considered to be the display area for the displayed characters or string of characters, or it may be considered to be the display area that includes the background accompanying the displayed characters (for example, the panel when displaying characters on a panel).

As a specific example of the above configuration, consider a case where a mid-reach text effect displaying the SP title is executed during a specified SP reach effect (development effect), the SP reach effect announces the jackpot result (meeting specified conditions), and then a post-reach text effect displaying the jackpot title is executed. In this case, during the series of gameplay developments from the mid-reach text effect (SP title display) to the post-reach text effect (jackpot title display), the jackpot title displayed in the latter half is displayed for a longer period of time and in a larger size than the SP title displayed in the first half, thereby gradually increasing the player's sense of excitement at hitting a jackpot. For example, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the SP title of SP Reach effect B is displayed in a portion of the upper part of the display area of effect display device 70 (note that SP Reach effect A is also displayed in a similar area), but the jackpot title "BONUS" is displayed occupying a large area in the center of the display area of effect display device 70 (for example, occupying about the same amount of space as the word "LOSE" shown in FIG. 70(J)), and the other jackpot title "SUPER BONUS" is displayed in an even larger area. Note that the color corresponding to the character effect of "BONUS" is "gold" and is displayed for 8 seconds (8 seconds from the start of display to the end of display), and the color corresponding to the character effect of "SUPER BONUS" is "rainbow" and is displayed for 8 seconds (8 seconds from the start of display to the end of display).

Furthermore, the probability of a predetermined post-reach character effect being executed may be configured to differ depending on the display mode of the predetermined mid-reach character effect executed before it is executed. In other words, the predetermined mid-reach character effect may have multiple display modes, and the probability of the predetermined post-reach character effect being executed thereafter may differ depending on the display mode of the executed predetermined mid-reach character effect. Here, the multiple display modes of the mid-reach character effects may be display modes in which the characters of the displayed title, etc., have different character effect colors, which are the colors of the characters themselves or the colors surrounding the characters (for example, a mode in which the color corresponding to the character effect in "SP Title A" is different and a mode in which the color corresponding to the character effect in "SP Title B" is different), display modes in which the character sizes or fonts are different, or display modes in which the characters themselves are different, such as "SP Title A" and "SP Title B" (more specifically, whether the characters read "Where are my allies?" or "The Final Battle"). When configured in this manner, for example, the probability of a post-reach character effect that displays characters such as "SUPER BONUS" corresponding to a 10R jackpot being executed differs between when the SP title A is displayed in a white color corresponding to the character effect in the reach character effect related to the SP reach effect A and when the SP title A is displayed in a red color corresponding to the character effect. Basically, when the display mode of the reach character effect is different in the color corresponding to the character effect, the probability of a predetermined post-reach character effect being executed is higher when the color corresponding to the character effect has a relatively high suggestive expectation (for example, red rather than white), and when the display mode of the reach character effect is different in the size or font of the characters, the probability of a predetermined post-reach character effect being executed is higher when the display mode is an emphasized display mode (large characters, conspicuous font), but this is not limited to this. In other words, for a specific post-reach character effect (for example, "BONUS"), it can be configured so that when a reach-period character effect is executed using a character effect corresponding color with a relatively low suggestive expectation, the specific post-reach character effect is more likely to be executed subsequently than when a reach-period character effect is executed using a character effect corresponding color with a relatively high suggestive expectation. By adopting these configurations, the expectation of whether or not a specific post-reach character effect will be executed subsequently changes depending on the display mode in which a specific reach-period character effect is executed, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the development of the effects after the reach-period character effect.

Furthermore, when the display mode of a predetermined mid-reach character effect (e.g., "SP Title A" or "SP Title B") includes a first display mode (e.g., the color corresponding to the character effect is white) in which there is a relatively low probability that a predetermined post-reach character effect (e.g., "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS") will be executed thereafter, and a second display mode (e.g., the color corresponding to the character effect is red) in which there is a relatively high probability that the predetermined post-reach character effect will be executed thereafter, the configuration may be such that, when the predetermined mid-reach character effect is executed in the first display mode and a specific effect is executed in the development effect in which the predetermined mid-reach character effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the predetermined post-reach character effect will be executed thereafter than when the predetermined mid-reach character effect is executed in the second display mode and a specific effect is not executed in the development effect in which the predetermined mid-reach character effect is executed. The specific effect may be, for example, a button effect that notifies the player of a win or loss (an effect prompting the player to press an operation button), or a specific aspect of a specific effect, such as a button effect in which an effect image prompting the player to press an operation button is displayed in a specific pattern, such as a rainbow-colored light. Furthermore, the specific effect may also be a chance-up effect that may be executed during a development effect. For example, in the case of SP Reach effect A, it may be an effect in which a telescope is used during a search, or an effect in which a cut-in image of a character is displayed with a text effect (displayed in red) that reads "They might be over there!" just before the win or loss branch. In the case of SP Reach effect B, it may be an effect in which the attack during the battle is a kick rather than a punch, or an effect in which a cut-in image of a character is displayed with a text effect (displayed in gold) that reads "We will definitely win!" just before the win or loss branch. In this configuration, other effects (specific effects) can be associated and displayed consecutively with the during-reach text effect and the after-reach text effect, which display the title in text, and this is expected to have the effect of realizing unexpected developments for the player.

Furthermore, when a predetermined reach-state character effect (e.g., "SP Title A" or "SP Title B") is executed after a reach-state character effect (e.g., "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS") is established, the probability of the predetermined reach-state character effect being executed after the reach-state character effect ends may be configured to vary depending on the type of decorative symbol that established the reach state. The decorative symbol is primarily the main decorative symbol 710 (or may be a sub-decorative symbol 720). The probability of the predetermined reach-state character effect (e.g., the display of a jackpot title) appearing after the reach-state character effect ends varies depending on the type of main decorative symbol 710 that is easily visible to the player and that established the reach state (type may be for each symbol or a group of one or more symbols, such as odd symbols, even symbols, or character symbols), thereby increasing the player's interest after the reach state is established. More specifically, for example, when the decorative symbol that has established the reach state is a "7 symbol" and "SP title A" or "SP title B" is displayed, the probability of "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS" being executed after "SP title A" or "SP title B" has ended may be configured to be higher than when the decorative symbol that has established the reach state is a "3 symbol" and "SP title A" or "SP title B" is displayed, and further, when the decorative symbol that has established the reach state is a "3 symbol" and "SP title A" or "SP title B" is displayed, the probability of "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS" being executed after "SP title A" or "SP title B" has ended may be configured to be higher. The probability of "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS" being executed after "SP TITLE A" or "SP TITLE B" has ended may be higher than when "SP TITLE B" is displayed, and further, when the decorative symbol that created the reach state is a "1 symbol" or a "5 symbol" and "SP TITLE A" or "SP TITLE B" is displayed, the probability of "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS" being executed after "SP TITLE A" or "SP TITLE B" has ended may be higher than when the decorative symbol that created the reach state is a "2 symbol," "4 symbol," "6 symbol," or "8 symbol" and "SP TITLE A" or "SP TITLE B" is displayed.

Furthermore, when a specified post-reach character effect has multiple display modes (for example, "BONUS" and "SUPER BONUS"), if a reach state is established with a specific decorative pattern during the fluctuation of special patterns in a specified situation in which the execution of the specified post-reach character effect is scheduled, the probability that the specified post-reach character effect will be executed in a specific display mode (for example, "SUPER BONUS") may be higher than if a reach state is established with a specified decorative pattern that is a different type of decorative pattern from the specific decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, if a predetermined post-reach character effect is an effect that displays the jackpot title, and the characteristic decorative pattern is a "7 pattern," if a reach state is established with a 7 pattern decorative pattern during the fluctuation of the special pattern in which the post-reach character effect that displays the jackpot title is scheduled to be executed, there is a higher probability that the post-reach character effect that displays the jackpot title will be executed in a specific manner (for example, "SUPER BONUS" with a gold corresponding color for the character effect) than if a reach state is established with other types of decorative patterns.With this configuration, by linking an effect other than the post-reach character effect (in this example, a display effect of a decorative pattern that indicates the establishment of a reach state with a 7 pattern) to the execution of a predetermined post-reach character effect in a specific manner (in this example, the display of the jackpot title "SUPER BONUS" with a gold corresponding color for the character effect), it is expected that the effect will be that the player will be able to realize an unexpected development in the performance. More specifically, for example, in the case where the decorative symbol that has established the reach state is a "7 symbol" and "SP title A" or "SP title B" is displayed and then a jackpot title is displayed, the probability that "SUPER BONUS" will be executed rather than "BONUS" after "SP title A" or "SP title B" has ended may be configured to be higher than in the case where the decorative symbol that has established the reach state is a "3 symbol" and "SP title A" or "SP title B" is displayed and then a jackpot title is displayed, and further, in the case where the decorative symbol that has established the reach state is a "3 symbol" and "SP title A" or "SP title B" is displayed and then a jackpot title is displayed, the probability that "SUPER BONUS" will be executed rather than "BONUS" after "SP title A" or "SP title B" has ended may be configured to be higher. It may be configured so that the probability of "SUPER BONUS" being executed rather than "BONUS" after "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" has ended is higher than when "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" is displayed followed by a jackpot title; and further, when the decorative symbol that created the reach state is a "1 symbol" or a "5 symbol" and "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" is displayed followed by a jackpot title, it may be configured so that the probability of "SUPER BONUS" being executed rather than "BONUS" after "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" has ended is higher than when the decorative symbol that created the reach state is a "2 symbol," "4 symbol," "6 symbol," or "8 symbol" and "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" is displayed followed by a jackpot title.

<9-3. Relationship between the text effects during and after a reach and the suppression function>
As described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment can be equipped with a suppression function that controls the game to a suppressed state in which progress is suppressed when a predetermined condition is met in which the difference between the number of game values awarded and the number of game values used reaches a predetermined number (specifically, when a predetermined count value "MY" (the count value of the MY counter) reaches a predetermined specified value). The suppression function is controlled by the main control board 100, and the effects executed in connection with the suppression function (suppression function-related effects) are executed by the effect control board 200 based on information notified by the main control board 100. In the following description, the specified value of the count value "MY" under the predetermined condition in which the game is controlled to a suppressed state (hereinafter referred to as the "predetermined condition of the suppression function") is assumed to be "95,000" as an example.

In a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are met during the execution of a predetermined mid-reach character effect (for example, the display of the SP title, "SP Title A" or "SP Title B"), the specified mid-reach character effect is forcibly terminated. On the other hand, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are met during the execution of a predetermined post-reach character effect (for example, the display of the jackpot title, "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS"), the specified post-reach character effect is not forcibly terminated. This configuration prioritizes the execution of the suppression function (control of the suppression state and notification thereof) for title displays when a jackpot has not been confirmed (for example, the display of the SP title while the special symbol is fluctuating), thereby preventing excessive gambling caused by the execution of mid-reach character effects. On the other hand, with regard to the title display when a jackpot has been confirmed (in the above example, the display of the jackpot title), to avoid the disadvantage of the suppression function being implemented after the display and preventing the special game from being played, the post-reach text effect (jackpot title display) is executed until the original effect period has elapsed, and then the round game is also executed, thereby providing the player with an appropriate benefit corresponding to the effect (jackpot title). More specifically, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are met during the title display when a jackpot has not been confirmed (in the above example, the display of the SP title executed while the special pattern is changing), the title display is forcibly terminated and a suppression notification effect is executed. Conversely, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are met during the title display when a jackpot has been confirmed (in the above example, the display of the jackpot title), the title display is continued without being forcibly terminated, and then a special advance notification effect (special advance notification display effect) is executed.

Note that "a performance is forcibly terminated" means that the performance is immediately terminated even if it is in the middle of execution (a short period of time required for the termination process is allowed to pass), and not only is the display of images (including text) related to the performance terminated, but audio output is also terminated. Also, if a specific component (an operation button or movable decorative part) is operating during the performance, the forcible termination will cause the specific component to return to its normal state (for example, return to its initial position (standby position)), stop operating in the position in which it was operating, or move to a specific state corresponding to the forcible termination (for example, move to a specific position). These may be set individually for each component.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment, which is equipped with a suppression function, is configured to be able to issue an advance notification regarding the suppression state (the advance notification effect described above) when a specific condition is met in which the difference between the number of game values awarded and the number of game values used reaches a specific number different from a predetermined number. The advance notification can be executed by the effect control board 200 based on information notified from the main control board 100 (for example, the count value of the MY counter). In the following description, the specific condition under which an advance notification regarding the suppression state is issued is also referred to as the "specific condition for advance notification." The specific number for the count value "MY" in the specific condition for advance notification may be set to multiple numbers; for example, the specific number for "MY" may be "90000," "90200," "90400," ..., "94800."

In a gaming machine according to this embodiment, even if a specific condition for advance notification (MY reaches a specific number) is met during the execution of a predetermined mid-reach character effect (for example, the display of the SP title, "SP Title A" or "SP Title B"), the predetermined mid-reach character effect may be configured not to be forcibly terminated. Furthermore, even if a specific condition for advance notification is met during the execution of a predetermined post-reach character effect (for example, the display of the jackpot title, "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS"), the predetermined post-reach character effect may be configured not to be forcibly terminated. By configuring it in this way, regardless of whether the title display is when a jackpot has not been confirmed (in the example above, the display of the SP title executed while the special symbol is changing) or when a jackpot has been confirmed (in the example above, the display of the jackpot title), if the specific conditions for advance notification are met during the title display, the title display will continue to be displayed without being forcibly terminated, and an advance notification effect will then be executed, making it possible to execute an appropriate effect (title display) according to the progress of the game while reliably communicating to the player the current situation, which is approaching the suppression function.

When configured as described above, if certain conditions for advance notification are met, the effect display device 70 may simultaneously execute an ongoing reach text effect or reach post text effect and a display effect for advance notification of the suppressed state (for example, an advance text effect, described below). In this case, it is preferable that the display effect for advance notification of the suppressed state be set to a higher display priority (higher display layer priority) than the reach text effect and reach post text effect, and if the display areas overlap, the display effect for advance notification of the suppressed state is displayed in the foreground.

A gaming machine according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function may be configured so that, during a special symbol change in a predetermined situation where a predetermined post-reach character effect (e.g., "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS," which display the jackpot title) is scheduled to be executed, if a predetermined condition of the suppression function is met at a specific timing after a predetermined mid-reach character effect (e.g., "SP Title A" or "SP Title B," which display the SP title) is executed but before the execution of the predetermined post-reach character effect during the change. The "specific timing" is, for example, the third part of the first through third parts of the aforementioned extended effect, which occurs after the execution of the predetermined mid-reach character effect. In other words, during a change where the display of the jackpot title is scheduled to be executed, if the predetermined condition of the suppression function (MY = 95000) is met after the SP title is displayed but before the jackpot title is displayed (which may be interpreted as before the start of jackpot play), the jackpot title will not be displayed. With this configuration, when a jackpot has not been confirmed (in the example above, the display of the jackpot title that is executed immediately before the jackpot game), the suppression function (control of the suppression state and notification thereof) takes priority, thereby preventing excessive gambling caused by the execution of post-reach text effects.

A gaming machine according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function may be configured so that, in a given situation where a certain reserved symbol related to a variation that is scheduled to execute a predetermined in-reach character effect (e.g., the SP title display "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS") exists, if a power outage occurs after the specified conditions of the suppression function are satisfied and power is subsequently restored, the predetermined in-reach character effect (e.g., the SP title display "SP Title A" or "SP Title B") that was scheduled to be executed when the certain reserved symbol is consumed is not executed. Specifically, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are satisfied in a changing situation where a specific reserved symbol that can execute a predetermined in-reach character effect (the SP title display "SP Title A" or "SP Title B") exists, the machine is controlled to a suppressed state and game play is stopped. However, even if the power of the gaming machine is subsequently turned OFF/ON (power is restored after a power outage), the predetermined in-reach character effect (the SP title display) that was scheduled to be executed when the specific reserved symbol is consumed is not executed. With this configuration, when a jackpot has not been confirmed, the title display (in the example above, the display of the SP title that was scheduled to be executed when the specific hold was consumed) prioritizes the implementation of the suppression function (control of the suppression state and notification thereof), and the display is not performed even if the power is turned OFF/ON after the suppression state is controlled (power is restored after a power outage), thereby preventing excessive gambling caused by the execution of text effects during a reach.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment, which is equipped with a suppression function, can execute a suppression-related character effect that displays characters when a predetermined condition of the suppression function is met. The suppression-related character effect is an effect that displays predetermined characters (strings of characters) related to the suppression function being executed. Figure 78 shows an example of a display screen using the suppression-related character effect.

The suppression-related character effect may be configured to display different characters (strings of characters) depending on the game state when the specified conditions of the suppression function are satisfied (i.e., multiple types of suppression-related character effects may be provided). For example, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are satisfied while a special game is being played, a first suppression-related character effect (equivalent to the special advance notification effect or special advance notification display effect described above) may be executed, and if the specified conditions of the suppression function are satisfied while a special game is not being played, a second suppression-related character effect (equivalent to the suppression notification effect or the suppression function activation notification effect described above) may be executed. Specifically, the first suppression-related text effect indicates that play will be stopped due to the activation of the suppression function after the end of the currently running jackpot game, for example, by displaying text such as "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls. The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends, ending today's play. Please be careful not to forget to remove your cards." (Alternatively, as mentioned above, it may display text such as "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, so play will end after the special play ends and firing will stop."). The second suppression-related text effect indicates that play will be stopped due to the activation of the suppression function, for example, by displaying text such as "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls. The suppression function has been activated, ending today's play. Please be careful not to forget to remove your cards." (Alternatively, it may display text such as "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, so play will end and firing will stop.").

In a gaming machine capable of executing the first suppression-related character effect and the second suppression-related character effect as described above, while the first state in which the first suppression-related character effect is being executed can transition to the second state in which the second suppression-related character effect is being executed, the system is configured not to transition from the second state to the first state. In other words, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are satisfied during a jackpot, the first suppression-related character effect is executed during the jackpot game (first state), and after the jackpot game ends, the second suppression-related character effect is executed (second state), but the system does not transition from the second state to the first state. More specifically, once the second state is reached, the second state will not end unless a power outage occurs and the power is restored, which involves clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), and therefore the system does not transition from the second state to the first state. Furthermore, by causing a power outage and restoring power while clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), it is possible to transition from the second state to RAM clear mode. In other words, by causing a power outage and restoring power while clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), it is possible to transition from the second state to the normal gaming state, which is a low base state. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player in stages of the suppression function activation at the appropriate time.

Note that when transitioning from a first situation in which a first suppression-related character effect is being executed to a second situation in which a second suppression-related character effect is being executed, it is not limited to a direct transition, but may also include a transition after an intermediate transition into a third situation in which any of the suppression-related character effects are not displayed or are temporarily hidden (for example, a transition may be made after a blackout image is momentarily displayed to switch the type of suppression-related character effect, with the third situation being a situation in which only a blackout image is momentarily displayed without displaying the first and second suppression-related character effects).

Furthermore, the character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the characters themselves or the color of the surrounding area of the characters displayed in the first suppression-related character effect and the second suppression-related character effect, may be a color different from either the first color (e.g., "green" indicating a low expectation other than the minimum expectation) which is the character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level in a predetermined mid-reach character effect (e.g., "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" displaying an SP title), or the second color (e.g., "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level, or "rainbow" indicating the maximum expectation) which is the character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level higher than the expectation level indicated by the first color in a predetermined mid-reach character effect (e.g., "white" indicating a minimum expectation level, "red" indicating a medium or high expectation level, or other colors such as "black" or "yellow"), and the above-mentioned predetermined mid-reach character effect may be configured not to be executed simultaneously with either the first suppression-related character effect or the second suppression-related character effect. Furthermore, the character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the characters themselves or the color of the surrounding area of the characters displayed in the first suppression-related character effect and the second suppression-related character effect, may be a color different from either the first color (e.g., "green" indicating a low expectation other than the minimum expectation) which is a character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level in a predetermined mid-changing character effect (e.g., a dialogue effect) or the second color (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level or a "rainbow" indicating the highest expectation level) which is a character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level higher than the expectation level indicated by the first color in a predetermined mid-changing character effect (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level or a "rainbow" indicating the highest expectation level) (e.g., either "white" indicating the minimum expectation level or "red" indicating a medium or high expectation level, or other colors such as "black" or "yellow"), and the above-mentioned predetermined mid-changing character effect may be configured not to be executed simultaneously with either the first suppression-related character effect or the second suppression-related character effect. By configuring it in this way, the suppression-related character effects can notify the player of the occurrence of the suppression function in a color corresponding to the character effect without being interfered with by other effects (reach character effects or other variable character effects) and without creating excessive expectations. In other words, the occurrence of the suppression function can be notified to the player without being interfered with by other effects and without encouraging gambling.

Furthermore, when the gaming machine according to this embodiment is capable of executing the aforementioned first and second suppression-related character effects as suppression-related character effects, it may be configured so that a specified post-reach character effect (for example, the jackpot title "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS" or the display of the jackpot round) can be executed simultaneously with the first suppression-related character effect, but not simultaneously with the second suppression-related character effect.

To explain in more detail, the first suppression-related character effect is executable when the specified conditions of the suppression function are met while a special game is being played. Since it is executed after the special game ends and before the suppression function is implemented, if post-reach character effects such as the display of a jackpot title or a jackpot round are executed while a special game is being played, allowing these effects to be executed simultaneously will not excessively stimulate the player's gambling spirit or affect the progress of the special game. On the other hand, the second suppression-related character effect is executable when the specified conditions of the suppression function are met while a special game is not being played. Since the suppression function is implemented when this effect is executed, allowing the simultaneous execution of specified post-reach character effects executed while a special game is not being played (e.g., the display of a jackpot title such as "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS" or the display of a jackpot round) would encourage gambling even though there is no possibility of winning a profit from the special game, and therefore is not permitted. As a result of the above, the above configuration makes it possible to notify the player of the suppression function's occurrence without encouraging gambling, and also ensures that the player can obtain profits (by winning balls through jackpot play).

In this regard, the gaming machine according to this embodiment may be configured so that, when a predetermined reach-in character effect (e.g., the display of the SP title "SP Title A" or "SP Title B") is executed, a predetermined light-emitting element (e.g., a display lamp such as frame lamp 10 or board lamp 25) emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the reach-in character effect) corresponding to the predetermined reach-in character effect. The light-emitting pattern corresponding to "SP Title A" and the light-emitting pattern corresponding to "SP Title B" may be the same to reduce the size of the light-emitting pattern data (e.g., both may emit light in a blue light-emitting pattern). However, to further differentiate the effects, "SP Title A" may emit light in a blue light-emitting pattern and "SP Title B" may emit light in a green light-emitting pattern. However, in such a gaming machine, if a predetermined condition of the suppression function is satisfied during the execution of a predetermined reach-in character effect, it is preferable to forcibly terminate the light-emitting pattern. More specifically, if a predetermined condition of the suppression function is met while a predetermined reach-in character effect is being executed and while a predetermined light-emitting unit is illuminating in a predetermined light-emitting pattern corresponding to the predetermined reach-in character effect, the execution of the predetermined reach-in character effect is forcibly terminated and the light-emitting unit is also forcibly terminated in the predetermined light-emitting pattern, a second suppression-related character effect is displayed, and the predetermined light-emitting unit is turned off or emits light in a purple light-emitting pattern (light-emitting other than blue, green, or red). With this configuration, when a predetermined condition of the suppression function is met, the predetermined light-emitting unit is turned off (the predetermined light-emitting unit does not emit light in accordance with the reach-in character effect) or emits light in the purple light-emitting pattern corresponding to the second suppression-related character effect, and the second suppression-related character effect can be executed, thereby reliably notifying the player of the occurrence of the suppression function without being interfered with by other effects.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment can execute an error character effect that displays text related to an error when an error occurs. Furthermore, in a gaming machine according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function, if a predetermined error character effect (e.g., the text "The door/frame is open") is executed while a predetermined light-emitting element (e.g., a display lamp) is emitting light in a predetermined light pattern (a light pattern corresponding to the reach character effect) in conjunction with the execution of a predetermined reach character effect (e.g., the display of the SP title "SP Title A" or "SP Title B"), the light emission according to the predetermined light pattern may be forcibly terminated and a specified light emission pattern (red light emission pattern) different from the predetermined light emission pattern may be used instead (the predetermined reach character effect and the predetermined error character effect can be executed simultaneously in parallel). Furthermore, if a predetermined condition of the suppression function is met during the execution of the predetermined error character effect, the light emission according to the specified light emission pattern may be forcibly terminated. With this configuration, even if the predetermined light-emitting element emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern in conjunction with the execution of a predetermined reach character effect (display of the SP title), when an error occurs and the predetermined error character effect is executed, the predetermined light-emitting pattern is changed to a specified light-emitting pattern, thereby prioritizing the error notification. Furthermore, even if the predetermined light-emitting element emits light in a specified light-emitting pattern, if the predetermined condition of the suppression function (MY = 95000) is met, the specified light-emitting pattern is forcibly terminated, thereby preventing the execution of the suppression function from being interfered with by the error notification. (As described above, when the predetermined condition of the suppression function is met, the predetermined light-emitting element turns off (the predetermined light-emitting element does not emit light in conjunction with the reach character effect or the error character effect), or emits light in a purple light-emitting pattern corresponding to the second suppression-related character effect, allowing the second suppression-related character effect to be executed.) As a result, while the error notification is prioritized over the predetermined reach character effect, the execution of the suppression function can be notified without being interfered with by the error notification.

Note that if errors are classified into multiple types (e.g., the aforementioned first and second errors) and two error character effects are possible: a first error character effect that displays characters related to the first error when the first error occurs, and a second error character effect that displays characters related to the second error when the second error occurs, the error character effect corresponding to either type of error (e.g., the first error character effect) may be used as the "predetermined error character effect" in the preceding paragraph. In other words, when the first error character effect is executed in response to the first error, the lighting pattern may be controlled so that it takes priority over a predetermined reach character effect (e.g., display of the SP title). However, even in such cases, the second error character effect executed in response to the second error simply does not take priority over the predetermined reach character effect; when the suppression function is activated, the lighting of the predetermined light-emitting element is forcibly terminated. As a modified example, whether it is a first error character effect executed in response to the occurrence of a first error or a second error character effect executed in response to the occurrence of a second error, the illumination of the predetermined light emitting part in a specified illumination pattern corresponding to the error character effect takes priority over the illumination of the predetermined light emitting part in a specified illumination pattern corresponding to a predetermined reach character effect (for example, display of an SP title) (while the illumination of the predetermined light emitting part in a specified illumination pattern corresponding to a predetermined reach character effect is being performed, it switches to the illumination of the predetermined light emitting part in a specified illumination pattern corresponding to the error character effect), and Alternatively, if a predetermined condition of the suppression function is satisfied while the predetermined light-emitting unit is emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern corresponding to the character presentation during a first error, the predetermined light-emitting unit may be configured to turn off or emit light in a purple light-emitting pattern corresponding to the second suppression-related character presentation, while if a predetermined condition of the suppression function is satisfied while the predetermined light-emitting unit is emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern corresponding to the character presentation during a second error, the predetermined light-emitting unit may be configured to continue emitting light in the predetermined light-emitting pattern without turning off or emitting light in the purple light-emitting pattern corresponding to the second suppression-related character presentation.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment may be configured such that, when a predetermined post-reach character effect (e.g., the display of the jackpot title "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS" after the start of a jackpot, or the display of a jackpot round, etc.) is executed, a predetermined light-emitting element (e.g., a display lamp such as frame lamp 10 or board lamp 25) emits light in a specific light-emitting pattern (e.g., a rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern) corresponding to the predetermined post-reach character effect. Furthermore, in such a gaming machine, it is preferable that the light emission in the specific light-emitting pattern continues even if the predetermined conditions of the suppression function are met during the execution of the predetermined post-reach character effect. This configuration temporarily suspends the execution of the suppression function for the title display when a jackpot has been confirmed, and continues the related effect of the title display (light emission in the specific light-emitting pattern), thereby eliminating any sense of incongruity in the ongoing jackpot game and preventing player confusion. However, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are met while a specified post-reach character effect is being executed, the light emission control of the specified light-emitting unit will be as described above, but the first suppression-related character effect, which is also a special advance notification effect, will be executed simultaneously with the specified post-reach character effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a predetermined error character effect (e.g., a first error character effect) is executed while a predetermined light-emitting unit is emitting light in a specific light-emitting pattern (e.g., a rainbow light-emitting pattern) corresponding to the predetermined end-of-reach character effect (e.g., displaying a jackpot title), the light-emitting unit may be forced to terminate the light-emitting pattern and enable a prescribed light-emitting pattern (e.g., a red light-emitting pattern) different from the specific light-emitting pattern. This may allow the predetermined light-emitting unit to continue emitting light in the prescribed light-emitting pattern even if a predetermined condition of the suppression function is satisfied during the execution of the predetermined error character effect. This configuration allows the predetermined light-emitting unit to change to the prescribed light-emitting pattern when an error (e.g., a first error) occurs and the predetermined error character effect is executed, even if the predetermined light-emitting unit is emitting light in the specified light-emitting pattern in response to the execution of the predetermined end-of-reach character effect, thereby alerting the user to the error. Furthermore, the predetermined light-emitting unit may maintain the prescribed light-emitting pattern even if a predetermined condition of the suppression function (MY = 95,000) is satisfied while emitting light in the prescribed pattern. This configuration is particularly suitable when the specified conditions of the suppression function are met during the execution of a special game. By prioritizing error notification over the post-reach character effect and temporarily suspending the execution of the suppression function, it is possible to ensure both the reliability of the error notification and the player's profit (acquisition of balls through jackpot play). Furthermore, if a first error occurs during the execution of a specified post-reach character effect, the specified post-reach character effect and the first error character effect can be executed simultaneously. In this situation, if the specified conditions of the suppression function are met, the light emission control of the specified light-emitting element is as described above, but the first suppression-related character effect, which is also a special advance notification effect, is also executed simultaneously in parallel with the specified post-reach character effect and the first error character effect.

A gaming machine according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function can execute a pre-notification character effect that displays text for pre-notification of the suppression state when a specific pre-notification condition (e.g., MY reaches a specific number) is met, in addition to a suppression-related character effect that displays text when a specific condition for the pre-notification is met (e.g., MY reaches a specific number). The pre-notification character effect is executed before the suppression function is activated and displays text indicating that the suppression function is scheduled to activate soon. Specifically, it can display information such as, "The suppression function will activate when today's payout reaches 95,000 balls. After activation, play will end and firing will stop," as well as information such as, "Approximately **** balls remaining until activation" (where "****" is the MY value remaining until the suppression function is activated). Figures 76 and 77 show examples of display screens using pre-notification character effects.

When the count value "MY" indicating a specific condition (the difference between the number of game values awarded and the number of game values used) has at least a first specific number (e.g., "90,000") and a second specific number greater than the first specific number (e.g., "90,200"), the first pre-character effect can be executed when the count value "MY" reaches the first specific number, and the second pre-character effect can be executed when the count value "MY" reaches the second specific number. The first pre-character effect is a combination of the display "When today's payout reaches 95,000 balls, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, play will end and firing will stop" and the display "Approximately 5,000 balls remaining until activation," and the second pre-character effect is a combination of the display "Approximately 5,000 balls remaining until activation." The pre-event character effect is a combination of the message "When today's ball output reaches 95,000, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, play will end and firing will stop" and the message "Approximately 4,800 balls remaining until activation." This gaming machine is configured to be able to transition from a first state in which the first pre-event character effect is being executed to a second state in which the second pre-event character effect is being executed (this transition is possible by a further increase in the MY counter from the first state), and also to transition from the second state to the first state (this transition is possible by a decrease in the MY counter from the second state). This configuration allows for advance notification of the suppression function to be implemented in stages at appropriate times.

Note that transitions from the first situation to the second situation, and from the second situation to the first situation, may not only be direct transitions, but may also include transitions via a third situation in which any of the pre-event character effects are not displayed or are temporarily hidden (for example, a transition may be made after a blackout image for switching the type of pre-event character effect is momentarily displayed; the third situation may be a situation in which only a blackout image is momentarily displayed without displaying the first suppression-related character effect and the second suppression-related character effect; or, when switching between the first and second pre-event character effects, a transition may be made via a combination of the third pre-event character effect, which displays "When today's ball output reaches 95,000 balls, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, play will end and firing will stop," and "Approximately 4,900 balls remaining until activation," and the third situation in which the third pre-event character effect is displayed).

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment equipped with a suppression function, the character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the characters themselves or the color of the surrounding characters displayed in the first pre-character effect and the second pre-character effect, is a color different from either the first color (e.g., "green" indicating a low expectation other than the minimum expectation) that is the character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level in a predetermined mid-reach character effect (e.g., "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" displayed as an SP title), or the second color (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level or a "rainbow" indicating the maximum expectation level) that is the character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level higher than the expectation level indicated by the first color in a predetermined mid-reach character effect (e.g., "white" indicating the minimum expectation level or "red" indicating a medium or high expectation level, or other colors such as "black" or "yellow"), and the above-mentioned predetermined mid-reach character effect may be configured to be able to be executed simultaneously with either the first pre-character effect or the second pre-reach character effect. Furthermore, the character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the characters themselves or the color of the surrounding area of the characters displayed in the first pre-character effect and the second pre-character effect, is a color different from either the first color (e.g., "green" indicating a low expectation other than the minimum expectation) that is a character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level in a predetermined mid-changing character effect (e.g., a dialogue effect) or the second color (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level or a "rainbow" indicating the maximum expectation) that is a character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level higher than the expectation level indicated by the first color in a predetermined mid-changing character effect (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level or a "rainbow" indicating the maximum expectation level) (e.g., "white" indicating the minimum expectation level or "red" indicating a medium or high expectation level, or other colors such as "black" or "yellow"). The predetermined mid-changing character effect may be configured to be able to be executed simultaneously with either the first pre-character effect or the second pre-character effect.

To explain in more detail, the pre-character effect is an effect that provides advance notification of the suppression function, and since there is no need to indicate the level of expectation through the color corresponding to the character effect, as with other effects (e.g., reach-in character effects), it is preferable to use a color that does not excessively stimulate speculation as the color corresponding to the character effect. Furthermore, since the suppression function has not yet been implemented at the time the pre-character effect is executed, there is not much need to emphasize and display the pre-character effect to the point of interfering with other effects (e.g., reach-in character effects). Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously execute the pre-character effect and other effects (e.g., reach-in character effects that display SP titles, etc.). Therefore, by configuring it as described above, it is possible to implement advance notification of the suppression function without interfering with the execution of both the pre-character effect of the suppression function and other effects, and without inciting speculation.

As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment equipped with the suppression function, the character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the characters themselves or the color of the surrounding characters displayed in the first pre-character effect and the second pre-character effect, is a color different from either the first color (e.g., "green" indicating a low expectation other than the minimum expectation) that is the character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level in a predetermined mid-reach character effect (e.g., "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" displayed as an SP title), or the second color (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level or a "rainbow" indicating the maximum expectation) that is the character effect corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level higher than the expectation level indicated by the first color in a predetermined mid-reach character effect (e.g., "white" indicating a minimum expectation level or "red" indicating a medium or high expectation level, or other colors such as "black" or "yellow"); and the above-mentioned predetermined mid-reach character effect may be configured to be able to be executed simultaneously with either the first pre-character effect or the second pre-reach character effect. Furthermore, the character performance corresponding color, which is the color of the characters themselves or the color of the surrounding area of the characters displayed in the first pre-character performance and the second pre-character performance, is a color different from either the first color (e.g., "green" indicating a low expectation other than the minimum expectation) which is a character performance corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level in a predetermined mid-changing character performance (e.g., a dialogue performance), or the second color (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level or a "rainbow" indicating the highest expectation) which is a character performance corresponding color suggesting a predetermined expectation level higher than the expectation level indicated by the first color in a predetermined mid-changing character performance (e.g., a "giraffe pattern" indicating a high expectation level other than the maximum expectation level or a "rainbow" indicating the highest expectation level) (e.g., either "white" indicating the minimum expectation level or "red" indicating a medium or high expectation level, or other colors such as "black" or "yellow"), and the above-mentioned predetermined mid-changing character performance may be configured to be able to be executed simultaneously with either the first pre-character performance or the second pre-character performance. Furthermore, a predetermined post-reach character effect (for example, the jackpot title "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS" or the display of the jackpot round) may be configured to be executable simultaneously with both the first advance character effect and the second advance character effect.

As mentioned above, the pre-text effect is an effect that provides advance notification of the suppression function, and there is no need to indicate the level of expectation through the color corresponding to the text effect, as with other effects (for example, mid-reach text effects). Therefore, it is preferable to use a color that does not excessively stimulate gambling as the color corresponding to the text effect. Furthermore, since the suppression function has not yet been implemented at the time the pre-text effect is executed, there is not much need to emphasize the pre-text effect to the point of interfering with other effects. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously execute the pre-text effect and other effects (for example, post-reach text effects that display the title of a jackpot, etc.). Therefore, by configuring it as described above, it is possible to implement advance notification of the suppression function without interfering with the execution of either the pre-notification of the suppression function or other effects, and without inciting gambling.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function, when a predetermined reach character effect (e.g., the display of the SP title "SP Title A" or "SP Title B") is executed, a predetermined light-emitting element (e.g., a display lamp such as frame lamp 10 or board lamp 25) can be made to emit light in a predetermined light pattern corresponding to the predetermined reach character effect. Even if specific conditions for advance notification are met during the execution of the predetermined reach character effect, the predetermined reach character effect and advance character effect can continue to emit light in the predetermined light pattern (the predetermined reach character effect and advance character effect can be executed simultaneously in parallel). When the specific conditions for advance notification are met, unlike when the specified conditions for the suppression function are met, the suppression function is not implemented, but only an advance notification of the suppression function is given. Therefore, there is little need to forcibly terminate the light emission in the predetermined light pattern corresponding to the predetermined reach character effect. Furthermore, forcibly terminating or changing the light emission pattern may be mistaken for some special effect, encouraging gambling. Therefore, with the above configuration, advance notification of the suppression function and other effects (predetermined reach text effects) can be implemented without interfering with the execution of each effect, and without encouraging gambling.

In addition, a gaming machine according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function may be configured so that, when a predetermined error character effect (e.g., the text "Door/Frame is Open") is executed while a predetermined light-emitting element (e.g., a display lamp) is emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern corresponding to the predetermined reach character effect (e.g., the display of the SP title "SP Title A" or "SP Title B"), the predetermined light-emitting pattern is forcibly terminated and a specified light-emitting pattern (red light-emitting pattern) different from the predetermined light-emitting pattern is emitted instead (the predetermined reach character effect and the specified error character effect can be executed simultaneously in parallel). Furthermore, in this gaming machine, the specified light-emitting pattern may continue to be emitted even if specific conditions for advance notification are met during the execution of the predetermined error character effect. Even in this case, the advance character effect, which is the character effect for advance notification of the suppression function, can still be executed. With this configuration, even if the predetermined light-emitting element emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern in conjunction with the execution of a predetermined reach character effect (display of the SP title), when an error occurs and the predetermined error character effect is executed, the light-emitting element changes to a specified light-emitting pattern, thereby prioritizing the error notification. Furthermore, even if a specific condition for advance notification (such as MY = 90000 or MY = 90200) is met when the predetermined light-emitting element emits light in a specified light-emitting pattern, the specified light-emitting element continues to emit light in the specified light-emitting pattern, thereby preventing the error notification from being interfered with by the advance notification of the suppression function (the predetermined reach character effect, the predetermined error character effect, and the advance notification character effect can be executed simultaneously in parallel). As a result, the advance notification character effect related to the advance notification of the suppression function can be executed while prioritizing the error notification over other effects (the predetermined reach character effect and the advance notification character effect), thereby ensuring the reliability of the error notification and realizing the advance notification of the suppression function.

In addition, if errors are categorized into multiple types (for example, the first and second errors mentioned above), and it is possible to implement a first error character effect that displays characters related to the first error when the first error occurs, and a second error character effect that displays characters related to the second error when the second error occurs, then the error character effect corresponding to either type of error (for example, the first error character effect) may be used as the "predetermined error character effect" mentioned above.

In addition, in a gaming machine according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function, when a predetermined post-reach character effect (e.g., the display of the jackpot title "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS") is executed, a predetermined light-emitting element can emit light in a specific light-emitting pattern (e.g., a rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern) corresponding to the predetermined post-reach character effect. Even if specific conditions for advance notification are met during the execution of the predetermined post-reach character effect, the light-emitting element may continue to emit light in the specific light-emitting pattern (the predetermined post-reach character effect and the advance notification character effect can be executed simultaneously in parallel). When the specific conditions for advance notification are met, unlike when the specified conditions for the suppression function are met, the suppression function is not implemented, but only an advance notification of the suppression function is given. Therefore, there is little need to forcibly terminate the light-emitting pattern corresponding to the predetermined post-reach character effect. Furthermore, forcibly terminating or changing the light-emitting pattern may be mistaken for some kind of special effect, potentially encouraging gambling. Therefore, with the above configuration, advance notification of the suppression function can be implemented without interfering with the execution of either the advance notification of the suppression function or other effects (predetermined post-reach text effects), and without encouraging gambling.

In addition, a gaming machine according to this embodiment equipped with a suppression function may be configured such that, when a predetermined post-reach character effect (e.g., displaying a jackpot title) is executed, a predetermined light-emitting element can emit light in a specific light-emitting pattern (e.g., a rainbow light-emitting pattern) corresponding to the predetermined post-reach character effect. If a predetermined error character effect is executed while the predetermined light-emitting element is emitting light in a specific light-emitting pattern in conjunction with the execution of the predetermined post-reach character effect, the light emission in the specific light-emitting pattern may be forcibly terminated and light may be emitted in a specified light-emitting pattern (e.g., a red light-emitting pattern) different from the specific light-emitting pattern. Furthermore, in this gaming machine, even if specific conditions for advance notification are met during the execution of the predetermined error character effect, the light emission in the specified light-emitting pattern may continue (the predetermined post-reach character effect and the predetermined error character effect can be executed simultaneously in parallel). Even in this case, the advance character effect, which is a character effect for advance notification of the suppression function, can be executed. With this configuration, even if the predetermined light-emitting element emits light in a specific light-emitting pattern in conjunction with the execution of a predetermined post-reach character effect (e.g., displaying a jackpot title), when an error occurs and a predetermined error character effect is executed, the light-emitting element changes to a specified light-emitting pattern, thereby prioritizing the error notification. Furthermore, even if a specific condition for advance notification (e.g., MY = 90000 or MY = 90200) is met when the predetermined light-emitting element emits light in a specified light-emitting pattern, the specified light-emitting element continues to emit light in the specified light-emitting pattern, thereby preventing the error notification from being interfered with by the advance notification of the suppression function (the predetermined post-reach character effect, the predetermined error character effect, and the advance notification character effect can be executed simultaneously in parallel). As a result, the advance notification character effect related to the advance notification of the suppression function can be executed while prioritizing the error notification over other effects (the predetermined post-reach character effect and the advance notification character effect), thereby ensuring the reliability of the error notification and realizing the advance notification of the suppression function.

<9-4. Other>
The above has explained various character effects that can be executed in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment, but this gaming machine can also adopt the following configurations for character effects. Note that, like the various configurations described above, the configurations described below can be combined as appropriate as long as there are no factors that inhibit the combination.

The gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment has multiple jackpot variation patterns, which are variation patterns for jackpots, among the multiple types of special symbol variation patterns (see FIG. 24). In this gaming machine, if jackpot variation pattern A is selected from among the multiple jackpot variation patterns as a result of the special symbol variation pattern lottery, it may be possible to execute a reach-in-progress character effect A in a manner in which a jackpot is confirmed, while if a jackpot variation pattern B other than jackpot variation pattern A is selected, it may be possible to disable the reach-in-progress character effect A in a manner in which a jackpot is confirmed. The reach-in-progress character effect A may be, for example, a reach-in-progress character effect that displays the reach effect name "SP Title A" of the SP reach-in-progress character effect A, and the manner in which a jackpot is confirmed may be, for example, the display of text in a color corresponding to the "rainbow" character effect. In other words, when the above configuration is adopted, jackpot fluctuation pattern A can execute SP reach effect A, and during its execution, reach-in character effect A can be executed in a color corresponding to the rainbow character effect, while jackpot fluctuation pattern B can execute SP reach effect A, but cannot execute reach-in character effect A in a color corresponding to the rainbow character effect. Furthermore, in response to jackpot fluctuation pattern B, it may be possible to execute reach-in character effect A in a notification mode indicating a non-confirmed jackpot (for example, a color corresponding to the character effect other than rainbow) during the execution of SP reach effect A, or to execute reach-in character effect B displaying SP title B in a notification mode indicating a confirmed jackpot (for example, a color corresponding to the rainbow character effect) during the execution of an SP reach effect B that is different from SP reach effect A.

However, even when the configuration described above is adopted, both jackpot fluctuation patterns A and B may be able to commonly (regardless of the jackpot fluctuation pattern) execute specific effects based on the notification mode of a confirmed jackpot (for example, premium effects that confirm a jackpot executed before a reach state is established, one-shot notification sounds, etc.).

Furthermore, regardless of whether jackpot fluctuation pattern A or B is selected, after the fluctuation pattern ends, it may be possible to execute a jackpot mid-character effect (for example, displaying the jackpot title), or it may be possible to execute a common predetermined jackpot mid-character effect (for example, displaying "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS").

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the main decorative symbols may be configured to have more color varieties than the predetermined mid-reach character effects (for example, "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" as the SP title display). "Color varieties" refers to the number of colors. By using a variety of colors for the main decorative symbols, the wide variety of pattern variations can be made to appear more dazzling. On the other hand, in the predetermined mid-reach character effects (for example, "SP Title A" or "SP Title B" as the SP title display), by using fewer color varieties than the main decorative symbols (in principle, a single color is preferable, but this does not apply to specific character effect colors such as rainbows or manufacturer patterns), it becomes easier for the player to identify the character effect color, and the effect of recognizing the degree of expectation suggested by the character effect color increases interest.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the number of colors used for the predetermined post-reach text effect (e.g., "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS," which display the jackpot title) may be greater than the number of colors used for the predetermined mid-reach text effect (e.g., "SP Title A" or "SP Title B," which display the SP title). This is because the jackpot title display provides more advantageous information (higher expected profits) to the player than the SP title display, and so the jackpot title display is made more visible by using more colors. Furthermore, by using fewer colors for the SP title display than for the jackpot title display (a single color is preferred as a general rule, but this does not apply to specific character display colors such as rainbows or manufacturer patterns), players can more easily identify the corresponding color for the character effect, thereby recognizing the level of expectation suggested by the corresponding color for the character effect and enhancing interest. Furthermore, by using a variety of colors to display the jackpot title in a luxurious manner, a sense of celebration can be created.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the main decorative pattern and the predetermined reach-in character effect (for example, the SP title display "SP Title A" or "SP Title B") may not be displayed superimposed. The main decorative pattern and the predetermined reach-in character effect may be displayed simultaneously if they do not overlap. For example, one possible implementation is to display the main decorative pattern in the reach-in state at the top right corner of the image display area, and then display the SP title near the center of the image display area. This configuration allows the reach-in character effect to be displayed without reducing the visibility of the changing main decorative pattern, so whether the player is interested in the main decorative pattern or the reach-in character effect, they can enjoy the game without stress.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the main decorative symbol and the predetermined post-reach text effect (for example, the jackpot title display "BONUS" or "SUPER BONUS") may not be displayed superimposed. The main decorative symbol and the predetermined post-reach text effect may be displayed simultaneously if they do not overlap. For example, one possible implementation is to display the main decorative symbol in a line of double numbers at the top right corner of the image display area, and then display the jackpot title near the center of the image display area. This configuration allows the post-reach text effect to be displayed without reducing the visibility of the main decorative symbol that is displaying the variable result indicating a jackpot. Therefore, whether the player is interested in the main decorative symbol or the post-reach text effect, the player can enjoy the game without stress.

The various features and configurations of the character effects described above may be limited to title effects that display the title, or, if execution conditions such as the game period are met, may be applied to character effects that display characters (strings of characters) other than the title (for example, dialogue effects or caption effects). In particular, the features and configurations of the reach character effects (mainly title effects) described above may be applied to other character effects (dialogue effects or caption effects) that are the same variable character effects.

The above describes a pachinko machine as one embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines. In other words, the present invention can also be applied to gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as slot machines, gaming machines that combine pachinko machines and slot machines, managed gaming machines that do not require gaming balls or gaming medals (sealed gaming machines, medalless gaming machines), casino machines, etc.

1: Pachinko machine, 2: Outer frame, 2a to 2d: Frame, 2e, 2f: Hinge member, 2p: Door opening sensor, 3: Glass frame (door frame), 3a, 3b: Hinge mechanism, 3c: Locking device, 3d: Through hole, 3e: Base unit, 3f: Dish unit, 3g: Area, 3h: Frame lamp (LED lamp), 3i: Speaker, 3j: Performance button, 3k: Second performance button, 4: Front frame, 4a: Handle, 4b: Frame body, 4c, 4d: Hinge, 4e: Firing device, 4f: Locking unit, 4g: Board unit, 4h: Back cover, 4i, 4j: Hinge member, 4p: Door opening detection member, 5: Game board, 5a: Game area, 5b: Main control unit, 5c: Peripheral control unit, 8: Upper ball tray, 9: Lower ball tray, 10: Performance lamp (frame lamp), 11: Speaker, 12: Launch handle, 13: Ball feeding mechanism, 14: Launch mechanism, 15: Performance button, 20A: Play area, 22: Center decoration, 25: Performance lamp (board lamp), 29: First outlet, 31: Storage tank, 34: Prize ball payout unit, 61: First start port, 62: Second start port, 63: Gate, 64: Big prize port, 66: General prize port, 70: Liquid crystal display device, 91: Lamp connection board, 92: Motor driver, 100: Main control board, 100a: Front member, 100b: Play panel, 100c: Function display unit, 100d: Inner rail, 100e: Out guideway, 100f: Outer rail, 100h: Opening, 100m: Front unit, 100n: Main control board case, 100p: Harness cover, 100q: Setting key switch, 101: Main control CPU, 101B: Strobe signal output port, 102: Main control ROM, 103: Main control RAM, 104: I/O port circuit, 109: Performance control board connection connector, 110: Ball entry determination means, 111: Data bus, 112: Strobe signal bus, 120: Game lottery random number generation means, 123: Normal electric role solenoid, 124: Special electric role solenoid, 130: Hold control means, 131: Special symbol hold control means, 132: Normal symbol hold control means, 135: Advance determination means, 140: Special symbol lottery processing means, 141: Special symbol win/loss determination means, 142: Special symbol stop symbol determination means, 143: Special symbol variation pattern determination means, 145: Ordinary symbol lottery processing means, 146: Ordinary symbol win/loss determination means, 147: Ordinary symbol stop symbol determination means, 148: Ordinary symbol variation pattern determination means, 150: Special game control means, 155: Symbol display control means, 156: Special symbol display control means, 157: Ordinary symbol display control means, 160: Electric role control means, 161: First start port switch, 162: Second start port switch, 163: Operation gate switch, 164: Big prize port switch, 166: General prize port switch, 167: Out ball detection switch, 169: Game status control means, 170: Error monitoring control means, 171: First special symbol display device, 172: Second special symbol display device, 173: First special symbol hold lamp, 174: Second special symbol hold lamp, 175: Normal symbol display device, 176: Normal symbol hold lamp, 180: Main information storage means, 190: Command transmission/reception means, 195: Setting change means, 196: Setting confirmation means, 197: Setting display unit, 200: Performance control board, 200a: Opening, 200m: Back unit, 201: Performance control CPU, 202: Performance control ROM, 203: Performance control RAM, 204: I/O port circuit, 210: Performance lottery random number generation means, 220: Performance supervision means, 221: Performance mode control means, 222: Hold information display control means, 223: Advance notice control means, 224: Decorative symbol determination means, 225: Variable performance determination means, 226: Pre-announcement performance determining means, 227: Big win performance determining means, 230: Lamp performance control means, 240: Role-playing device performance control means, 250: Error performance control means, 260: Performance control information storage means, 270: Command sending/receiving means, 300: Image control board, 300m: LCD base, 301: Image control CPU, 302: VDP, 303: Sound source IC, 304: ROM, 305: RAM, 306: I/O port circuit, 400: Payout control board, 400p: RAM clear switch cover, 400q: RAM clear switch, 401: Payout control CPU, 402: Payout control ROM, 403: Payout control RAM, 500: Attacker unit, 600: Power supply board, 600p: Power switch cover, 600q: Power switch, 622: Normal electric role, 642: Special electric role, 700: Image display screen, 710: Main decorative pattern (decorative pattern), 711: Left pattern, 712: Middle pattern, 713: Right pattern, 720: Sub decorative pattern, 750: The variable icon, 760: Hold icon, 761: First hold icon, 762: Second hold icon, 763: Third hold icon, 764: Fourth hold icon, 770: Hold number display, 781, 782: Decorative role

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that judges whether a game has been won or lost based on information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, performs a variable display of a special symbol based on the result of the judgment, and when a specific display result is displayed as a result of the variable display, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed,
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance control means for controlling the execution of performances according to the progress of a game by the main control means;
A display device capable of displaying a performance;
Equipped with
When a first condition that the difference between the number of game values to be awarded and the number of game values to be used reaches a predetermined number is satisfied, a suppression state in which the progress of the game is suppressed can be entered;
When a second condition is satisfied that the difference between the number of game values to be awarded and the number of game values to be used reaches a specific number different from a predetermined number, a prior notification regarding the suppression state can be executed;
It is possible to execute a development effect that develops after a reach state is established by a decorative pattern,
It is possible to perform character effects that display characters on a display device,
The character effects include a suppression-related character effect that displays a character when a first condition is satisfied , and an error character effect that displays a character related to an error when an error occurs ,
The suppression-related character effect includes a first suppression-related character effect and a second suppression-related character effect,
When a first condition is satisfied during execution of a special game, a first suppression-related character effect can be executed, and when the first condition is satisfied during non-execution of a special game, a second suppression-related character effect can be executed;
In a first situation in which a first suppression-related character effect is being executed, a transition to a second situation in which a second suppression-related character effect is being executed is possible, but a transition from the second situation to the first situation is not possible;
The error character effect includes a first error character effect that displays the occurrence of a first type of error in text when the first type of error occurs, and a second error character effect that displays the occurrence of a second type of error in text when the second type of error occurs,
During the execution of the special game, an accumulated value corresponding display that displays the accumulated value of the number of game values granted to a predetermined game section can be executed in one or more ways;
The first error character effect can be executed simultaneously with at least one of the cumulative value corresponding displays, and can be superimposed on at least one of the cumulative value corresponding displays and displayed with a higher priority than the cumulative value corresponding display,
The second error message will not be displayed simultaneously with any cumulative value display.
A gaming machine characterized by: